From c546cc6fc623d62db9bf5031fd98030db8e69495 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mend Renovate Date: Wed, 15 Feb 2023 22:42:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 1/3] chore(deps): update dependency google-api-python-client to v2.78.0 (#2065) --- samples/compute/requirements.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/samples/compute/requirements.txt b/samples/compute/requirements.txt index 54de9e2e5e6..eb0f3b939f7 100644 --- a/samples/compute/requirements.txt +++ b/samples/compute/requirements.txt @@ -1,3 +1,3 @@ -google-api-python-client==2.77.0 +google-api-python-client==2.78.0 google-auth==2.16.0 google-auth-httplib2==0.1.0 From f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: yoshi-code-bot <70984784+yoshi-code-bot@users.noreply.github.com> Date: Mon, 20 Feb 2023 23:24:12 -0800 Subject: [PATCH 2/3] chore: Update discovery artifacts (#2069) ## Deleted keys were detected in the following stable discovery artifacts: baremetalsolution v2 https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/1cca20e7cce92036d67e528123414f669ebd942a batch v1 https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/12b1c85fc3280dbbb23c4db396c64dd3601a303d safebrowsing v4 https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/940222c83f916b3b90bbacf4436bbf97a949f852 servicecontrol v1 https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/6c85d3c5e895805aa9b2e5a73d4d812c449b5388 servicecontrol v2 https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/6c85d3c5e895805aa9b2e5a73d4d812c449b5388 ## Deleted keys were detected in the following pre-stable discovery artifacts: alertcenter v1beta1 https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/547eb4a4f6b5577fcb6c80638cc9e93cced35089 ## Discovery Artifact Change Summary: feat(alertcenter): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/547eb4a4f6b5577fcb6c80638cc9e93cced35089 feat(androidenterprise): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/a5c14741ad7ca5b5f53dc4b4fcdab070132639b8 feat(baremetalsolution): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/1cca20e7cce92036d67e528123414f669ebd942a feat(batch): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/12b1c85fc3280dbbb23c4db396c64dd3601a303d feat(chat): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/bc983e9dd1e8dbc8ec910bbe36321afb81cf33cd feat(chromemanagement): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/b204e0fa6f03e35f70774067a52026d38bb90549 feat(cloudsearch): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/a57ae6337ea0612594b88badfb354b73d68f6a73 feat(compute): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/41d899c6514dbb5cf1a9c1358ac777fa19bbf8ae feat(content): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/b2704a04c366aedcd1c665f6f34db47bc81e178f feat(drive): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c189a81e8116af6ae96c26a82cbe0662c2f540a2 feat(healthcare): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/58ad8a45dcc3b7cd97f2f30c03a0ff9e0bdf1a83 feat(logging): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f365cf32684e625b772e60d45ea1dd188983ac25 feat(monitoring): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/48090571c1e8a2cb3831a9540363db8051284440 feat(networksecurity): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/aa9721a9179ece2acf74ca2067d48b11a2acce01 feat(ondemandscanning): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f247a051529550f3e55aeb456276bafe327517e8 feat(paymentsresellersubscription): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/a01ba7b18fb69f14d04e5c4ea67a47945a4b40b7 feat(privateca): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/5f5a1d83c419e0c3d9aac0746681a384dfc1af69 feat(redis): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/edc5f1f9ca6f56cfd945621414c369bff840ee4e feat(safebrowsing): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/940222c83f916b3b90bbacf4436bbf97a949f852 feat(serviceconsumermanagement): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/ba5bd7229c287f2b0636d1128f057334ca8ec4b9 feat(servicecontrol): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/6c85d3c5e895805aa9b2e5a73d4d812c449b5388 feat(servicenetworking): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/df40666a943166ca27603fb5c14e9b67c711c709 feat(serviceusage): update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/64cbf8291c51625042a94d6195dfa81e8da63ea7 --- docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.accounts.html | 4 +- .../analyticsadmin_v1alpha.properties.html | 6 +- docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.accounts.html | 4 +- .../dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.properties.html | 4 +- docs/dyn/analyticsdata_v1beta.properties.html | 4 +- docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html | 28 + ...ution_v2.projects.locations.instances.html | 295 ++-- .../dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html | 200 +-- .../batch_v1.projects.locations.state.html | 4 +- ...rojects.locations.capacityCommitments.html | 18 +- ...on_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html | 12 +- ...sinessprofileperformance_v1.locations.html | 1 + docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html | 2 + docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.messages.html | 259 ++-- ...chromemanagement_v1.customers.reports.html | 109 ++ ...beta2.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html | 2 +- ...beta3.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html | 2 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html | 2 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html | 16 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.html | 5 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.imageFamilyViews.html | 2 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.images.html | 16 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html | 355 +++++ .../compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html | 1200 +++++++++++++++++ docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html | 288 ++++ docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html | 336 +++++ docs/dyn/compute_v1.html | 5 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.imageFamilyViews.html | 2 +- docs/dyn/compute_v1.images.html | 16 +- docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html | 327 +++++ docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html | 106 ++ .../compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html | 1116 +++++++++++++++ ...r_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html | 12 +- ...projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html | 8 +- ...ainer_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html | 12 +- ...ta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html | 8 +- docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html | 40 +- docs/dyn/content_v2_1.conversionsources.html | 442 ++++++ docs/dyn/content_v2_1.html | 5 + docs/dyn/content_v2_1.products.html | 16 +- docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html | 396 +++--- .../dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html | 8 +- .../deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html | 8 +- ...s.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 2 +- ...jects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html | 6 +- ...s.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 2 +- ...jects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html | 6 +- ...displayvideo_v1.advertisers.lineItems.html | 28 +- ...displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html | 32 +- ...yvideo_v2.advertisers.youtubeAdGroups.html | 8 +- docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html | 8 + docs/dyn/drive_v2.drives.html | 16 + docs/dyn/drive_v2.teamdrives.html | 12 + docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html | 4 + docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html | 16 + docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html | 12 + ...store_v1.projects.databases.documents.html | 540 ++++---- ..._v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html | 540 ++++---- ...rojects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html | 29 + ...rojects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html | 29 + docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.html | 8 +- docs/dyn/identitytoolkit_v1.accounts.html | 8 +- ..._v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html | 148 +- .../logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html | 148 +- docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html | 148 +- ...ng_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html | 148 +- ...logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html | 148 +- ...toring_v3.projects.uptimeCheckConfigs.html | 6 + ...ty_v1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html | 2 +- ...ectivity_v1.projects.locations.spokes.html | 2 +- ...lpha1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html | 6 +- ...ty_v1alpha1.projects.locations.spokes.html | 6 +- ...organizations.locations.addressGroups.html | 524 +++++++ ...urity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html | 5 + ...eta1.projects.locations.addressGroups.html | 438 ++++++ ...rvices_v1.projects.locations.gateways.html | 8 +- ...s_v1beta1.projects.locations.gateways.html | 8 +- ...jects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html | 14 + ...jects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html | 14 + ...ubscription_v1.partners.subscriptions.html | 32 + ...uthorities.certificateRevocationLists.html | 2 +- ...ations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html | 230 +++- ...ojects.locations.caPools.certificates.html | 382 +++++- ...ivateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html | 116 +- ...ojects.locations.certificateTemplates.html | 114 +- ...chaenterprise_v1.projects.assessments.html | 6 +- ...redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html | 16 + ...v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html | 24 +- ...jects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html | 24 +- docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html | 48 +- .../run_v2.projects.locations.services.html | 48 +- ...projects.locations.services.revisions.html | 24 +- docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html | 3 - docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html | 3 - docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html | 1093 ++++++++++++++- docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html | 7 +- ...projects.instances.databases.sessions.html | 116 +- docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html | 2 +- docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html | 2 +- ...igration_v1.projects.locations.groups.html | 6 +- ...ocations.sources.datacenterConnectors.html | 6 +- ...gration_v1.projects.locations.sources.html | 6 +- ...ations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html | 2 +- ...ions.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html | 2 +- ...ojects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html | 4 +- ....locations.sources.utilizationReports.html | 4 +- ..._v1.projects.locations.targetProjects.html | 6 +- ...rojects.locations.workstationClusters.html | 16 +- ...orkstationClusters.workstationConfigs.html | 40 +- .../acceleratedmobilepageurl.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/accesscontextmanager.v1.json | 2 +- .../accesscontextmanager.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/adexchangebuyer2.v2beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/admin.datatransfer_v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/admin.directory_v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/admin.reports_v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/admob.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/adsense.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/advisorynotifications.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/alertcenter.v1beta1.json | 80 +- .../documents/analyticsadmin.v1alpha.json | 10 +- .../documents/analyticsadmin.v1beta.json | 8 +- .../documents/analyticsdata.v1beta.json | 4 +- .../documents/analyticshub.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../androiddeviceprovisioning.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/androidenterprise.v1.json | 31 +- .../documents/androidpublisher.v3.json | 2 +- .../documents/apigateway.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/apigateway.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/apikeys.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/appengine.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/appengine.v1alpha.json | 2 +- .../documents/appengine.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/area120tables.v1alpha1.json | 2 +- .../documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/baremetalsolution.v2.json | 12 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/batch.v1.json | 267 +--- .../documents/bigqueryconnection.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json | 18 +- .../documents/binaryauthorization.v1.json | 2 +- .../binaryauthorization.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v2.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v3.json | 2 +- .../businessprofileperformance.v1.json | 8 +- .../documents/calendar.v3.json | 2 +- .../documents/certificatemanager.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json | 49 +- .../documents/chromemanagement.v1.json | 214 ++- .../documents/chromepolicy.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/chromeuxreport.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/civicinfo.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudchannel.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/clouddebugger.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudprofiler.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudresourcemanager.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2.json | 2 +- .../cloudresourcemanager.v2beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudsearch.v1.json | 69 +- .../documents/cloudshell.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudtasks.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudtasks.v2beta2.json | 4 +- .../documents/cloudtasks.v2beta3.json | 4 +- .../documents/cloudtrace.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudtrace.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/cloudtrace.v2beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/composer.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/composer.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/compute.alpha.json | 8 +- .../documents/compute.beta.json | 551 +++++++- .../discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json | 558 +++++++- .../documents/connectors.v1.json | 8 +- .../documents/connectors.v2.json | 2 +- .../contactcenteraiplatform.v1alpha1.json | 2 +- .../documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/container.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/container.v1beta1.json | 4 +- .../documents/content.v2.1.json | 401 +++++- .../documents/customsearch.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/datacatalog.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/datacatalog.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/dataflow.v1b3.json | 2 +- .../documents/dataform.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/datapipelines.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json | 4 +- .../documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json | 4 +- .../documents/dfareporting.v3.5.json | 2 +- .../documents/dfareporting.v4.json | 2 +- .../documents/digitalassetlinks.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json | 4 +- .../documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json | 4 +- .../documents/displayvideo.v1.json | 8 +- .../documents/displayvideo.v2.json | 8 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/dlp.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/documentai.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/documentai.v1beta2.json | 2 +- .../documents/documentai.v1beta3.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/domains.v1alpha2.json | 2 +- .../documents/domains.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/domainsrdap.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v1.1.json | 2 +- .../documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v2.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json | 20 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json | 20 +- .../documents/driveactivity.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/drivelabels.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/essentialcontacts.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/eventarc.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/eventarc.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/factchecktools.v1alpha1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/fcm.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/fcmdata.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/file.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebase.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebasedatabase.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebasedynamiclinks.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebasehosting.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebasehosting.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebaseml.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebaseml.v1beta2.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebaserules.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/firebasestorage.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/fitness.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/forms.v1.json | 2 +- .../gamesConfiguration.v1configuration.json | 2 +- .../gamesManagement.v1management.json | 2 +- .../documents/gameservices.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/genomics.v2alpha1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/gmail.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1.json | 2 +- .../gmailpostmastertools.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/healthcare.v1.json | 64 + .../documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json | 64 + .../documents/homegraph.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json | 4 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/iamcredentials.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/iap.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/identitytoolkit.v1.json | 8 +- .../documents/identitytoolkit.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/kgsearch.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/kmsinventory.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/libraryagent.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/licensing.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/lifesciences.v2beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/localservices.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json | 457 ++++++- .../discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/monitoring.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/monitoring.v3.json | 12 +- .../mybusinessaccountmanagement.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/mybusinessbusinesscalls.v1.json | 2 +- .../mybusinessbusinessinformation.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/mybusinesslodging.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/mybusinessnotifications.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/mybusinessplaceactions.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/mybusinessqanda.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/mybusinessverifications.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/networkconnectivity.v1.json | 6 +- .../networkconnectivity.v1alpha1.json | 14 +- .../documents/networksecurity.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json | 994 ++++++++++++-- .../documents/networkservices.v1.json | 4 +- .../documents/networkservices.v1beta1.json | 4 +- .../documents/ondemandscanning.v1.json | 6 +- .../documents/ondemandscanning.v1beta1.json | 6 +- .../documents/orgpolicy.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/osconfig.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/osconfig.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/oslogin.v1alpha.json | 2 +- .../documents/oslogin.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/pagespeedonline.v5.json | 2 +- .../paymentsresellersubscription.v1.json | 7 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/people.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/playcustomapp.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/playintegrity.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/policyanalyzer.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/policyanalyzer.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/policysimulator.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/policysimulator.v1alpha.json | 2 +- .../documents/policysimulator.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/policytroubleshooter.v1.json | 2 +- .../policytroubleshooter.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/privateca.v1.json | 113 +- .../documents/privateca.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/prod_tt_sasportal.v1alpha1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/pubsub.v1beta1a.json | 2 +- .../documents/pubsub.v1beta2.json | 2 +- .../documents/pubsublite.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/realtimebidding.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/realtimebidding.v1alpha.json | 2 +- .../documents/recaptchaenterprise.v1.json | 24 +- .../recommendationengine.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/recommender.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/recommender.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json | 13 +- .../documents/redis.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/reseller.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/resourcesettings.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json | 8 +- .../documents/runtimeconfig.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/runtimeconfig.v1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/safebrowsing.v4.json | 566 ++++---- .../documents/searchconsole.v1.json | 2 +- .../serviceconsumermanagement.v1.json | 9 +- .../serviceconsumermanagement.v1beta1.json | 9 +- .../documents/servicecontrol.v1.json | 27 +- .../documents/servicecontrol.v2.json | 27 +- .../documents/servicemanagement.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/servicenetworking.v1.json | 9 +- .../documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json | 9 +- .../documents/serviceusage.v1.json | 9 +- .../documents/serviceusage.v1beta1.json | 9 +- .../documents/sourcerepo.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/spanner.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/speech.v1p1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/sqladmin.v1.json | 10 +- .../documents/sqladmin.v1beta4.json | 10 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json | 4 +- .../documents/storagetransfer.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/streetviewpublish.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/tagmanager.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/tagmanager.v2.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/tasks.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/testing.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/toolresults.v1beta3.json | 2 +- .../documents/transcoder.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/verifiedaccess.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/verifiedaccess.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/versionhistory.v1.json | 2 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/vision.v1p1beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/vision.v1p2beta1.json | 2 +- .../documents/vmmigration.v1.json | 38 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/webrisk.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/websecurityscanner.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/websecurityscanner.v1alpha.json | 2 +- .../documents/websecurityscanner.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/workflowexecutions.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/workflowexecutions.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/workflows.v1.json | 2 +- .../documents/workflows.v1beta.json | 2 +- .../documents/workstations.v1beta.json | 28 +- .../discovery_cache/documents/youtube.v3.json | 2 +- .../documents/youtubeAnalytics.v2.json | 2 +- .../documents/youtubereporting.v1.json | 2 +- 372 files changed, 13637 insertions(+), 2885 deletions(-) create mode 100644 docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html create mode 100644 docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html create mode 100644 docs/dyn/content_v2_1.conversionsources.html create mode 100644 docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.addressGroups.html diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.accounts.html index 535448af5ff..2054ae18ee9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.accounts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.accounts.html @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when account payload fields were last updated. } - updateMask: string, Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (e.g., "field_to_update"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string "*" to match all fields. + updateMask: string, Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (for example, "field_to_update"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string "*" to match all fields. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@

Method Details

"regionCode": "A String", # Country of business. Must be a Unicode CLDR region code. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when account payload fields were last updated. }, - "redirectUri": "A String", # Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI + "redirectUri": "A String", # Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI. } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.properties.html b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.properties.html index 1fab95f46ff..49c35b95f11 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.properties.html +++ b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1alpha.properties.html @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@

Instance Methods

acknowledgeUserDataCollection(property, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or via this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.

+

Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or through this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@

Instance Methods

Method Details

acknowledgeUserDataCollection(property, body=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or via this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.
+  
Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or through this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.
 
 Args:
   property: string, Required. The property for which to acknowledge user data collection. (required)
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "startDate": "A String", # The inclusive start date for the query in the format `YYYY-MM-DD`. Cannot be after `endDate`. The format `NdaysAgo`, `yesterday`, or `today` is also accepted, and in that case, the date is inferred based on the current time in the request's time zone.
     },
   ],
-  "dimensionFilter": { # Expresses dimension or metric filters. The fields in the same expression need to be either all dimensions or all metrics. # Dimension filters allow you to restrict report response to specific dimension values which match the filter. For example, filtering on access records of a single user. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter.
+  "dimensionFilter": { # Expresses dimension or metric filters. The fields in the same expression need to be either all dimensions or all metrics. # Dimension filters let you restrict report response to specific dimension values which match the filter. For example, filtering on access records of a single user. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter.
     "accessFilter": { # An expression to filter dimension or metric values. # A primitive filter. In the same FilterExpression, all of the filter's field names need to be either all dimensions or all metrics.
       "betweenFilter": { # To express that the result needs to be between two numbers (inclusive). # A filter for two values.
         "fromValue": { # To represent a number. # Begins with this number.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.accounts.html
index 0a268cc6a68..25cacfcd6a8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.accounts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.accounts.html
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when account payload fields were last updated.
 }
 
-  updateMask: string, Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (e.g., "field_to_update"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string "*" to match all fields.
+  updateMask: string, Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (for example, "field_to_update"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string "*" to match all fields.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "regionCode": "A String", # Country of business. Must be a Unicode CLDR region code.
     "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when account payload fields were last updated.
   },
-  "redirectUri": "A String", # Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI
+  "redirectUri": "A String", # Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI.
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.properties.html b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.properties.html
index 8e8b1fe9a0b..6a057746126 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.properties.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/analyticsadmin_v1beta.properties.html
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
 

   acknowledgeUserDataCollection(property, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or via this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.

+
Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or through this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Method Details

 

     acknowledgeUserDataCollection(property, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or via this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.
+  
Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or through this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.
 
 Args:
   property: string, Required. The property for which to acknowledge user data collection. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticsdata_v1beta.properties.html b/docs/dyn/analyticsdata_v1beta.properties.html
index c0c88de095e..7615fe27d76 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/analyticsdata_v1beta.properties.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/analyticsdata_v1beta.properties.html
@@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "startDate": "A String", # The inclusive start date for the query in the format `YYYY-MM-DD`. Cannot be after `end_date`. The format `NdaysAgo`, `yesterday`, or `today` is also accepted, and in that case, the date is inferred based on the property's reporting time zone.
         },
       ],
-      "dimensionFilter": { # To express dimension or metric filters. The fields in the same FilterExpression need to be either all dimensions or all metrics. # Dimension filters allow you to ask for only specific dimension values in the report. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter.
+      "dimensionFilter": { # To express dimension or metric filters. The fields in the same FilterExpression need to be either all dimensions or all metrics. # Dimension filters let you ask for only specific dimension values in the report. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter.
         "andGroup": { # A list of filter expressions. # The FilterExpressions in and_group have an AND relationship.
           "expressions": [ # A list of filter expressions.
             # Object with schema name: FilterExpression
@@ -1557,7 +1557,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "startDate": "A String", # The inclusive start date for the query in the format `YYYY-MM-DD`. Cannot be after `end_date`. The format `NdaysAgo`, `yesterday`, or `today` is also accepted, and in that case, the date is inferred based on the property's reporting time zone.
     },
   ],
-  "dimensionFilter": { # To express dimension or metric filters. The fields in the same FilterExpression need to be either all dimensions or all metrics. # Dimension filters allow you to ask for only specific dimension values in the report. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter.
+  "dimensionFilter": { # To express dimension or metric filters. The fields in the same FilterExpression need to be either all dimensions or all metrics. # Dimension filters let you ask for only specific dimension values in the report. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter.
     "andGroup": { # A list of filter expressions. # The FilterExpressions in and_group have an AND relationship.
       "expressions": [ # A list of filter expressions.
         # Object with schema name: FilterExpression
diff --git a/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html b/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html
index d879c23a381..eaf0f52cd81 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html
@@ -134,7 +134,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # A Devices resource represents a mobile device managed by the EMM and belonging to a specific enterprise user.
   "androidId": "A String", # The Google Play Services Android ID for the device encoded as a lowercase hex string. For example, "123456789abcdef0".
+  "device": "A String", # The internal hardware codename of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.DEVICE. (field named "device" per logs/wireless/android/android_checkin.proto)
+  "latestBuildFingerprint": "A String", # The build fingerprint of the device if known.
+  "maker": "A String", # The manufacturer of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MANUFACTURER.
   "managementType": "A String", # Identifies the extent to which the device is controlled by a managed Google Play EMM in various deployment configurations. Possible values include: - "managedDevice", a device that has the EMM's device policy controller (DPC) as the device owner. - "managedProfile", a device that has a profile managed by the DPC (DPC is profile owner) in addition to a separate, personal profile that is unavailable to the DPC. - "containerApp", no longer used (deprecated). - "unmanagedProfile", a device that has been allowed (by the domain's admin, using the Admin Console to enable the privilege) to use managed Google Play, but the profile is itself not owned by a DPC.
+  "model": "A String", # The model name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MODEL.
   "policy": { # The device policy for a given managed device. # The policy enforced on the device.
     "autoUpdatePolicy": "A String", # Recommended alternative: autoUpdateMode which is set per app, provides greater flexibility around update frequency. When autoUpdateMode is set to AUTO_UPDATE_POSTPONED or AUTO_UPDATE_HIGH_PRIORITY, this field has no effect. "choiceToTheUser" allows the device's user to configure the app update policy. "always" enables auto updates. "never" disables auto updates. "wifiOnly" enables auto updates only when the device is connected to wifi.
     "deviceReportPolicy": "A String", # Whether the device reports app states to the EMM. The default value is "deviceReportDisabled".
@@ -209,6 +213,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     ],
   },
+  "product": "A String", # The product name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.PRODUCT.
   "report": { # Device report updated with the latest app states for managed apps on the device. # The device report updated with the latest app states.
     "appState": [ # List of app states set by managed apps on the device. App states are defined by the app's developers. This field will always be present.
       { # List of states set by the app.
@@ -226,6 +231,8 @@ 
Method Details

     ],
     "lastUpdatedTimestampMillis": "A String", # The timestamp of the last report update in milliseconds since epoch. This field will always be present.
   },
+  "retailBrand": "A String", # Retail brand for the device, if set. See https://developer.android.com/reference/android/os/Build.html#BRAND
+  "sdkVersion": 42, # API compatibility version.
 }

 

 
@@ -269,7 +276,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "device": [ # A managed device.
     { # A Devices resource represents a mobile device managed by the EMM and belonging to a specific enterprise user.
       "androidId": "A String", # The Google Play Services Android ID for the device encoded as a lowercase hex string. For example, "123456789abcdef0".
+      "device": "A String", # The internal hardware codename of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.DEVICE. (field named "device" per logs/wireless/android/android_checkin.proto)
+      "latestBuildFingerprint": "A String", # The build fingerprint of the device if known.
+      "maker": "A String", # The manufacturer of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MANUFACTURER.
       "managementType": "A String", # Identifies the extent to which the device is controlled by a managed Google Play EMM in various deployment configurations. Possible values include: - "managedDevice", a device that has the EMM's device policy controller (DPC) as the device owner. - "managedProfile", a device that has a profile managed by the DPC (DPC is profile owner) in addition to a separate, personal profile that is unavailable to the DPC. - "containerApp", no longer used (deprecated). - "unmanagedProfile", a device that has been allowed (by the domain's admin, using the Admin Console to enable the privilege) to use managed Google Play, but the profile is itself not owned by a DPC.
+      "model": "A String", # The model name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MODEL.
       "policy": { # The device policy for a given managed device. # The policy enforced on the device.
         "autoUpdatePolicy": "A String", # Recommended alternative: autoUpdateMode which is set per app, provides greater flexibility around update frequency. When autoUpdateMode is set to AUTO_UPDATE_POSTPONED or AUTO_UPDATE_HIGH_PRIORITY, this field has no effect. "choiceToTheUser" allows the device's user to configure the app update policy. "always" enables auto updates. "never" disables auto updates. "wifiOnly" enables auto updates only when the device is connected to wifi.
         "deviceReportPolicy": "A String", # Whether the device reports app states to the EMM. The default value is "deviceReportDisabled".
@@ -344,6 +355,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "product": "A String", # The product name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.PRODUCT.
       "report": { # Device report updated with the latest app states for managed apps on the device. # The device report updated with the latest app states.
         "appState": [ # List of app states set by managed apps on the device. App states are defined by the app's developers. This field will always be present.
           { # List of states set by the app.
@@ -361,6 +373,8 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "lastUpdatedTimestampMillis": "A String", # The timestamp of the last report update in milliseconds since epoch. This field will always be present.
       },
+      "retailBrand": "A String", # Retail brand for the device, if set. See https://developer.android.com/reference/android/os/Build.html#BRAND
+      "sdkVersion": 42, # API compatibility version.
     },
   ],
 }

@@ -407,7 +421,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # A Devices resource represents a mobile device managed by the EMM and belonging to a specific enterprise user.
   "androidId": "A String", # The Google Play Services Android ID for the device encoded as a lowercase hex string. For example, "123456789abcdef0".
+  "device": "A String", # The internal hardware codename of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.DEVICE. (field named "device" per logs/wireless/android/android_checkin.proto)
+  "latestBuildFingerprint": "A String", # The build fingerprint of the device if known.
+  "maker": "A String", # The manufacturer of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MANUFACTURER.
   "managementType": "A String", # Identifies the extent to which the device is controlled by a managed Google Play EMM in various deployment configurations. Possible values include: - "managedDevice", a device that has the EMM's device policy controller (DPC) as the device owner. - "managedProfile", a device that has a profile managed by the DPC (DPC is profile owner) in addition to a separate, personal profile that is unavailable to the DPC. - "containerApp", no longer used (deprecated). - "unmanagedProfile", a device that has been allowed (by the domain's admin, using the Admin Console to enable the privilege) to use managed Google Play, but the profile is itself not owned by a DPC.
+  "model": "A String", # The model name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MODEL.
   "policy": { # The device policy for a given managed device. # The policy enforced on the device.
     "autoUpdatePolicy": "A String", # Recommended alternative: autoUpdateMode which is set per app, provides greater flexibility around update frequency. When autoUpdateMode is set to AUTO_UPDATE_POSTPONED or AUTO_UPDATE_HIGH_PRIORITY, this field has no effect. "choiceToTheUser" allows the device's user to configure the app update policy. "always" enables auto updates. "never" disables auto updates. "wifiOnly" enables auto updates only when the device is connected to wifi.
     "deviceReportPolicy": "A String", # Whether the device reports app states to the EMM. The default value is "deviceReportDisabled".
@@ -482,6 +500,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     ],
   },
+  "product": "A String", # The product name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.PRODUCT.
   "report": { # Device report updated with the latest app states for managed apps on the device. # The device report updated with the latest app states.
     "appState": [ # List of app states set by managed apps on the device. App states are defined by the app's developers. This field will always be present.
       { # List of states set by the app.
@@ -499,6 +518,8 @@ 
Method Details

     ],
     "lastUpdatedTimestampMillis": "A String", # The timestamp of the last report update in milliseconds since epoch. This field will always be present.
   },
+  "retailBrand": "A String", # Retail brand for the device, if set. See https://developer.android.com/reference/android/os/Build.html#BRAND
+  "sdkVersion": 42, # API compatibility version.
 }
 
   updateMask: string, Mask that identifies which fields to update. If not set, all modifiable fields will be modified. When set in a query parameter, this field should be specified as updateMask=<field1>,<field2>,...
@@ -512,7 +533,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # A Devices resource represents a mobile device managed by the EMM and belonging to a specific enterprise user.
   "androidId": "A String", # The Google Play Services Android ID for the device encoded as a lowercase hex string. For example, "123456789abcdef0".
+  "device": "A String", # The internal hardware codename of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.DEVICE. (field named "device" per logs/wireless/android/android_checkin.proto)
+  "latestBuildFingerprint": "A String", # The build fingerprint of the device if known.
+  "maker": "A String", # The manufacturer of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MANUFACTURER.
   "managementType": "A String", # Identifies the extent to which the device is controlled by a managed Google Play EMM in various deployment configurations. Possible values include: - "managedDevice", a device that has the EMM's device policy controller (DPC) as the device owner. - "managedProfile", a device that has a profile managed by the DPC (DPC is profile owner) in addition to a separate, personal profile that is unavailable to the DPC. - "containerApp", no longer used (deprecated). - "unmanagedProfile", a device that has been allowed (by the domain's admin, using the Admin Console to enable the privilege) to use managed Google Play, but the profile is itself not owned by a DPC.
+  "model": "A String", # The model name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MODEL.
   "policy": { # The device policy for a given managed device. # The policy enforced on the device.
     "autoUpdatePolicy": "A String", # Recommended alternative: autoUpdateMode which is set per app, provides greater flexibility around update frequency. When autoUpdateMode is set to AUTO_UPDATE_POSTPONED or AUTO_UPDATE_HIGH_PRIORITY, this field has no effect. "choiceToTheUser" allows the device's user to configure the app update policy. "always" enables auto updates. "never" disables auto updates. "wifiOnly" enables auto updates only when the device is connected to wifi.
     "deviceReportPolicy": "A String", # Whether the device reports app states to the EMM. The default value is "deviceReportDisabled".
@@ -587,6 +612,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     ],
   },
+  "product": "A String", # The product name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.PRODUCT.
   "report": { # Device report updated with the latest app states for managed apps on the device. # The device report updated with the latest app states.
     "appState": [ # List of app states set by managed apps on the device. App states are defined by the app's developers. This field will always be present.
       { # List of states set by the app.
@@ -604,6 +630,8 @@ 
Method Details

     ],
     "lastUpdatedTimestampMillis": "A String", # The timestamp of the last report update in milliseconds since epoch. This field will always be present.
   },
+  "retailBrand": "A String", # Retail brand for the device, if set. See https://developer.android.com/reference/android/os/Build.html#BRAND
+  "sdkVersion": 42, # API compatibility version.
 }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/baremetalsolution_v2.projects.locations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/baremetalsolution_v2.projects.locations.instances.html index 2dd1ce9bd48..0beb198df07 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/baremetalsolution_v2.projects.locations.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/baremetalsolution_v2.projects.locations.instances.html @@ -937,150 +937,12 @@

Method Details

RenameInstance sets a new name for an instance.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Immutable. The resource name of this `Instance`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance}` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The `name` field is used to identify the instance. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance} (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Message requesting rename of a server.
-  "instance": { # A server. # Required. The `name` field is used to identify the instance. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance}
-    "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create a time stamp.
-    "hyperthreadingEnabled": True or False, # True if you enable hyperthreading for the server, otherwise false. The default value is false.
-    "id": "A String", # Output only. An identifier for the `Instance`, generated by the backend.
-    "interactiveSerialConsoleEnabled": True or False, # Output only. True if the interactive serial console feature is enabled for the instance, false otherwise. The default value is false.
-    "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs.
-      "a_key": "A String",
-    },
-    "logicalInterfaces": [ # List of logical interfaces for the instance. The number of logical interfaces will be the same as number of hardware bond/nic on the chosen network template. For the non-multivlan configurations (for eg, existing servers) that use existing default network template (bondaa-bondaa), both the Instance.networks field and the Instance.logical_interfaces fields will be filled to ensure backward compatibility. For the others, only Instance.logical_interfaces will be filled.
-      { # Each logical interface represents a logical abstraction of the underlying physical interface (for eg. bond, nic) of the instance. Each logical interface can effectively map to multiple network-IP pairs and still be mapped to one underlying physical interface.
-        "interfaceIndex": 42, # The index of the logical interface mapping to the index of the hardware bond or nic on the chosen network template. This field is deprecated.
-        "logicalNetworkInterfaces": [ # List of logical network interfaces within a logical interface.
-          { # Each logical network interface is effectively a network and IP pair.
-            "defaultGateway": True or False, # Whether this interface is the default gateway for the instance. Only one interface can be the default gateway for the instance.
-            "id": "A String", # An identifier for the `Network`, generated by the backend.
-            "ipAddress": "A String", # IP address in the network
-            "network": "A String", # Name of the network
-            "networkType": "A String", # Type of network.
-          },
-        ],
-        "name": "A String", # Interface name. This is of syntax or and forms part of the network template name.
-      },
-    ],
-    "loginInfo": "A String", # Output only. Text field about info for logging in.
-    "luns": [ # Immutable. List of LUNs associated with this server.
-      { # A storage volume logical unit number (LUN).
-        "bootLun": True or False, # Display if this LUN is a boot LUN.
-        "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which LUN will be fully deleted. It is filled only for LUNs in COOL_OFF state.
-        "id": "A String", # An identifier for the LUN, generated by the backend.
-        "multiprotocolType": "A String", # The LUN multiprotocol type ensures the characteristics of the LUN are optimized for each operating system.
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the LUN.
-        "shareable": True or False, # Display if this LUN can be shared between multiple physical servers.
-        "sizeGb": "A String", # The size of this LUN, in gigabytes.
-        "state": "A String", # The state of this storage volume.
-        "storageType": "A String", # The storage type for this LUN.
-        "storageVolume": "A String", # Display the storage volume for this LUN.
-        "wwid": "A String", # The WWID for this LUN.
-      },
-    ],
-    "machineType": "A String", # Immutable. The server type. [Available server types](https://cloud.google.com/bare-metal/docs/bms-planning#server_configurations)
-    "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of this `Instance`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance}`
-    "networkTemplate": "A String", # Instance network template name. For eg, bondaa-bondaa, bondab-nic, etc. Generally, the template name follows the syntax of "bond" or "nic".
-    "networks": [ # Output only. List of networks associated with this server.
-      { # A Network.
-        "cidr": "A String", # The cidr of the Network.
-        "gatewayIp": "A String", # Output only. Gateway ip address.
-        "id": "A String", # An identifier for the `Network`, generated by the backend.
-        "ipAddress": "A String", # IP address configured.
-        "jumboFramesEnabled": True or False, # Whether network uses standard frames or jumbo ones.
-        "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs.
-          "a_key": "A String",
-        },
-        "macAddress": [ # List of physical interfaces.
-          "A String",
-        ],
-        "mountPoints": [ # Input only. List of mount points to attach the network to.
-          { # Mount point for a network.
-            "defaultGateway": True or False, # Network should be a default gateway.
-            "instance": "A String", # Instance to attach network to.
-            "ipAddress": "A String", # Ip address of the server.
-            "logicalInterface": "A String", # Logical interface to detach from.
-          },
-        ],
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of this `Network`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/networks/{network}`
-        "pod": "A String", # Output only. Pod name.
-        "reservations": [ # List of IP address reservations in this network. When updating this field, an error will be generated if a reservation conflicts with an IP address already allocated to a physical server.
-          { # A reservation of one or more addresses in a network.
-            "endAddress": "A String", # The last address of this reservation block, inclusive. I.e., for cases when reservations are only single addresses, end_address and start_address will be the same. Must be specified as a single IPv4 address, e.g. 10.1.2.2.
-            "note": "A String", # A note about this reservation, intended for human consumption.
-            "startAddress": "A String", # The first address of this reservation block. Must be specified as a single IPv4 address, e.g. 10.1.2.2.
-          },
-        ],
-        "servicesCidr": "A String", # IP range for reserved for services (e.g. NFS).
-        "state": "A String", # The Network state.
-        "type": "A String", # The type of this network.
-        "vlanId": "A String", # The vlan id of the Network.
-        "vrf": { # A network VRF. # The vrf for the Network.
-          "name": "A String", # The name of the VRF.
-          "qosPolicy": { # QOS policy parameters. # The QOS policy applied to this VRF. The value is only meaningful when all the vlan attachments have the same QoS. This field should not be used for new integrations, use vlan attachment level qos instead. The field is left for backward-compatibility.
-            "bandwidthGbps": 3.14, # The bandwidth permitted by the QOS policy, in gbps.
-          },
-          "state": "A String", # The possible state of VRF.
-          "vlanAttachments": [ # The list of VLAN attachments for the VRF.
-            { # VLAN attachment details.
-              "id": "A String", # Immutable. The identifier of the attachment within vrf.
-              "pairingKey": "A String", # Input only. Pairing key.
-              "peerIp": "A String", # The peer IP of the attachment.
-              "peerVlanId": "A String", # The peer vlan ID of the attachment.
-              "qosPolicy": { # QOS policy parameters. # The QOS policy applied to this VLAN attachment. This value should be preferred to using qos at vrf level.
-                "bandwidthGbps": 3.14, # The bandwidth permitted by the QOS policy, in gbps.
-              },
-              "routerIp": "A String", # The router IP of the attachment.
-            },
-          ],
-        },
-      },
-    ],
-    "osImage": "A String", # The OS image currently installed on the server.
-    "pod": "A String", # Immutable. Pod name. Pod is an independent part of infrastructure. Instance can be connected to the assets (networks, volumes) allocated in the same pod only.
-    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the server.
-    "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update a time stamp.
-    "volumes": [ # Input only. List of Volumes to attach to this Instance on creation. This field won't be populated in Get/List responses.
-      { # A storage volume.
-        "autoGrownSizeGib": "A String", # The size, in GiB, that this storage volume has expanded as a result of an auto grow policy. In the absence of auto-grow, the value is 0.
-        "bootVolume": True or False, # Output only. Whether this volume is a boot volume. A boot volume is one which contains a boot LUN.
-        "currentSizeGib": "A String", # The current size of this storage volume, in GiB, including space reserved for snapshots. This size might be different than the requested size if the storage volume has been configured with auto grow or auto shrink.
-        "emergencySizeGib": "A String", # Additional emergency size that was requested for this Volume, in GiB. current_size_gib includes this value.
-        "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which volume will be fully deleted. It is filled only for volumes in COOLOFF state.
-        "id": "A String", # An identifier for the `Volume`, generated by the backend.
-        "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs.
-          "a_key": "A String",
-        },
-        "maxSizeGib": "A String", # Maximum size volume can be expanded to in case of evergency, in GiB.
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of this `Volume`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/volumes/{volume}`
-        "notes": "A String", # Input only. User-specified notes for new Volume. Used to provision Volumes that require manual intervention.
-        "originallyRequestedSizeGib": "A String", # Originally requested size, in GiB.
-        "performanceTier": "A String", # Immutable. Performance tier of the Volume. Default is SHARED.
-        "pod": "A String", # Immutable. Pod name.
-        "protocol": "A String", # Output only. Storage protocol for the Volume.
-        "remainingSpaceGib": "A String", # The space remaining in the storage volume for new LUNs, in GiB, excluding space reserved for snapshots.
-        "requestedSizeGib": "A String", # The requested size of this storage volume, in GiB.
-        "snapshotAutoDeleteBehavior": "A String", # The behavior to use when snapshot reserved space is full.
-        "snapshotEnabled": True or False, # Whether snapshots are enabled.
-        "snapshotReservationDetail": { # Details about snapshot space reservation and usage on the storage volume. # Details about snapshot space reservation and usage on the storage volume.
-          "reservedSpaceGib": "A String", # The space on this storage volume reserved for snapshots, shown in GiB.
-          "reservedSpacePercent": 42, # Percent of the total Volume size reserved for snapshot copies. Enabling snapshots requires reserving 20% or more of the storage volume space for snapshots. Maximum reserved space for snapshots is 40%. Setting this field will effectively set snapshot_enabled to true.
-          "reservedSpaceRemainingGib": "A String", # The amount, in GiB, of available space in this storage volume's reserved snapshot space.
-          "reservedSpaceUsedPercent": 42, # The percent of snapshot space on this storage volume actually being used by the snapshot copies. This value might be higher than 100% if the snapshot copies have overflowed into the data portion of the storage volume.
-        },
-        "snapshotSchedulePolicy": "A String", # The name of the snapshot schedule policy in use for this volume, if any.
-        "state": "A String", # The state of this storage volume.
-        "storageAggregatePool": "A String", # Input only. Name of the storage aggregate pool to allocate the volume in. Can be used only for VOLUME_PERFORMANCE_TIER_ASSIGNED volumes.
-        "storageType": "A String", # The storage type for this volume.
-        "workloadProfile": "A String", # The workload profile for the volume.
-      },
-    ],
-    "workloadProfile": "A String", # The workload profile for the instance.
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The new `name` of the instance. Format: {instancename}
+  "newName": "A String", # Required. The new `name` of the instance. Format: {instancename}
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -1091,24 +953,143 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
-  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
-  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
-    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
-    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
-      {
-        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-      },
-    ],
-    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
-  },
-  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
-  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    { # A server.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create a time stamp.
+  "hyperthreadingEnabled": True or False, # True if you enable hyperthreading for the server, otherwise false. The default value is false.
+  "id": "A String", # Output only. An identifier for the `Instance`, generated by the backend.
+  "interactiveSerialConsoleEnabled": True or False, # Output only. True if the interactive serial console feature is enabled for the instance, false otherwise. The default value is false.
+  "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs.
+    "a_key": "A String",
   },
+  "logicalInterfaces": [ # List of logical interfaces for the instance. The number of logical interfaces will be the same as number of hardware bond/nic on the chosen network template. For the non-multivlan configurations (for eg, existing servers) that use existing default network template (bondaa-bondaa), both the Instance.networks field and the Instance.logical_interfaces fields will be filled to ensure backward compatibility. For the others, only Instance.logical_interfaces will be filled.
+    { # Each logical interface represents a logical abstraction of the underlying physical interface (for eg. bond, nic) of the instance. Each logical interface can effectively map to multiple network-IP pairs and still be mapped to one underlying physical interface.
+      "interfaceIndex": 42, # The index of the logical interface mapping to the index of the hardware bond or nic on the chosen network template. This field is deprecated.
+      "logicalNetworkInterfaces": [ # List of logical network interfaces within a logical interface.
+        { # Each logical network interface is effectively a network and IP pair.
+          "defaultGateway": True or False, # Whether this interface is the default gateway for the instance. Only one interface can be the default gateway for the instance.
+          "id": "A String", # An identifier for the `Network`, generated by the backend.
+          "ipAddress": "A String", # IP address in the network
+          "network": "A String", # Name of the network
+          "networkType": "A String", # Type of network.
+        },
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Interface name. This is of syntax or and forms part of the network template name.
+    },
+  ],
+  "loginInfo": "A String", # Output only. Text field about info for logging in.
+  "luns": [ # Immutable. List of LUNs associated with this server.
+    { # A storage volume logical unit number (LUN).
+      "bootLun": True or False, # Display if this LUN is a boot LUN.
+      "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which LUN will be fully deleted. It is filled only for LUNs in COOL_OFF state.
+      "id": "A String", # An identifier for the LUN, generated by the backend.
+      "multiprotocolType": "A String", # The LUN multiprotocol type ensures the characteristics of the LUN are optimized for each operating system.
+      "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the LUN.
+      "shareable": True or False, # Display if this LUN can be shared between multiple physical servers.
+      "sizeGb": "A String", # The size of this LUN, in gigabytes.
+      "state": "A String", # The state of this storage volume.
+      "storageType": "A String", # The storage type for this LUN.
+      "storageVolume": "A String", # Display the storage volume for this LUN.
+      "wwid": "A String", # The WWID for this LUN.
+    },
+  ],
+  "machineType": "A String", # Immutable. The server type. [Available server types](https://cloud.google.com/bare-metal/docs/bms-planning#server_configurations)
+  "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of this `Instance`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance}`
+  "networkTemplate": "A String", # Instance network template name. For eg, bondaa-bondaa, bondab-nic, etc. Generally, the template name follows the syntax of "bond" or "nic".
+  "networks": [ # Output only. List of networks associated with this server.
+    { # A Network.
+      "cidr": "A String", # The cidr of the Network.
+      "gatewayIp": "A String", # Output only. Gateway ip address.
+      "id": "A String", # An identifier for the `Network`, generated by the backend.
+      "ipAddress": "A String", # IP address configured.
+      "jumboFramesEnabled": True or False, # Whether network uses standard frames or jumbo ones.
+      "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "macAddress": [ # List of physical interfaces.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "mountPoints": [ # Input only. List of mount points to attach the network to.
+        { # Mount point for a network.
+          "defaultGateway": True or False, # Network should be a default gateway.
+          "instance": "A String", # Instance to attach network to.
+          "ipAddress": "A String", # Ip address of the server.
+          "logicalInterface": "A String", # Logical interface to detach from.
+        },
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of this `Network`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/networks/{network}`
+      "pod": "A String", # Output only. Pod name.
+      "reservations": [ # List of IP address reservations in this network. When updating this field, an error will be generated if a reservation conflicts with an IP address already allocated to a physical server.
+        { # A reservation of one or more addresses in a network.
+          "endAddress": "A String", # The last address of this reservation block, inclusive. I.e., for cases when reservations are only single addresses, end_address and start_address will be the same. Must be specified as a single IPv4 address, e.g. 10.1.2.2.
+          "note": "A String", # A note about this reservation, intended for human consumption.
+          "startAddress": "A String", # The first address of this reservation block. Must be specified as a single IPv4 address, e.g. 10.1.2.2.
+        },
+      ],
+      "servicesCidr": "A String", # IP range for reserved for services (e.g. NFS).
+      "state": "A String", # The Network state.
+      "type": "A String", # The type of this network.
+      "vlanId": "A String", # The vlan id of the Network.
+      "vrf": { # A network VRF. # The vrf for the Network.
+        "name": "A String", # The name of the VRF.
+        "qosPolicy": { # QOS policy parameters. # The QOS policy applied to this VRF. The value is only meaningful when all the vlan attachments have the same QoS. This field should not be used for new integrations, use vlan attachment level qos instead. The field is left for backward-compatibility.
+          "bandwidthGbps": 3.14, # The bandwidth permitted by the QOS policy, in gbps.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # The possible state of VRF.
+        "vlanAttachments": [ # The list of VLAN attachments for the VRF.
+          { # VLAN attachment details.
+            "id": "A String", # Immutable. The identifier of the attachment within vrf.
+            "pairingKey": "A String", # Input only. Pairing key.
+            "peerIp": "A String", # The peer IP of the attachment.
+            "peerVlanId": "A String", # The peer vlan ID of the attachment.
+            "qosPolicy": { # QOS policy parameters. # The QOS policy applied to this VLAN attachment. This value should be preferred to using qos at vrf level.
+              "bandwidthGbps": 3.14, # The bandwidth permitted by the QOS policy, in gbps.
+            },
+            "routerIp": "A String", # The router IP of the attachment.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "osImage": "A String", # The OS image currently installed on the server.
+  "pod": "A String", # Immutable. Pod name. Pod is an independent part of infrastructure. Instance can be connected to the assets (networks, volumes) allocated in the same pod only.
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the server.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update a time stamp.
+  "volumes": [ # Input only. List of Volumes to attach to this Instance on creation. This field won't be populated in Get/List responses.
+    { # A storage volume.
+      "autoGrownSizeGib": "A String", # The size, in GiB, that this storage volume has expanded as a result of an auto grow policy. In the absence of auto-grow, the value is 0.
+      "bootVolume": True or False, # Output only. Whether this volume is a boot volume. A boot volume is one which contains a boot LUN.
+      "currentSizeGib": "A String", # The current size of this storage volume, in GiB, including space reserved for snapshots. This size might be different than the requested size if the storage volume has been configured with auto grow or auto shrink.
+      "emergencySizeGib": "A String", # Additional emergency size that was requested for this Volume, in GiB. current_size_gib includes this value.
+      "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which volume will be fully deleted. It is filled only for volumes in COOLOFF state.
+      "id": "A String", # An identifier for the `Volume`, generated by the backend.
+      "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "maxSizeGib": "A String", # Maximum size volume can be expanded to in case of evergency, in GiB.
+      "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of this `Volume`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/volumes/{volume}`
+      "notes": "A String", # Input only. User-specified notes for new Volume. Used to provision Volumes that require manual intervention.
+      "originallyRequestedSizeGib": "A String", # Originally requested size, in GiB.
+      "performanceTier": "A String", # Immutable. Performance tier of the Volume. Default is SHARED.
+      "pod": "A String", # Immutable. Pod name.
+      "protocol": "A String", # Output only. Storage protocol for the Volume.
+      "remainingSpaceGib": "A String", # The space remaining in the storage volume for new LUNs, in GiB, excluding space reserved for snapshots.
+      "requestedSizeGib": "A String", # The requested size of this storage volume, in GiB.
+      "snapshotAutoDeleteBehavior": "A String", # The behavior to use when snapshot reserved space is full.
+      "snapshotEnabled": True or False, # Whether snapshots are enabled.
+      "snapshotReservationDetail": { # Details about snapshot space reservation and usage on the storage volume. # Details about snapshot space reservation and usage on the storage volume.
+        "reservedSpaceGib": "A String", # The space on this storage volume reserved for snapshots, shown in GiB.
+        "reservedSpacePercent": 42, # Percent of the total Volume size reserved for snapshot copies. Enabling snapshots requires reserving 20% or more of the storage volume space for snapshots. Maximum reserved space for snapshots is 40%. Setting this field will effectively set snapshot_enabled to true.
+        "reservedSpaceRemainingGib": "A String", # The amount, in GiB, of available space in this storage volume's reserved snapshot space.
+        "reservedSpaceUsedPercent": 42, # The percent of snapshot space on this storage volume actually being used by the snapshot copies. This value might be higher than 100% if the snapshot copies have overflowed into the data portion of the storage volume.
+      },
+      "snapshotSchedulePolicy": "A String", # The name of the snapshot schedule policy in use for this volume, if any.
+      "state": "A String", # The state of this storage volume.
+      "storageAggregatePool": "A String", # Input only. Name of the storage aggregate pool to allocate the volume in. Can be used only for VOLUME_PERFORMANCE_TIER_ASSIGNED volumes.
+      "storageType": "A String", # The storage type for this volume.
+      "workloadProfile": "A String", # The workload profile for the volume.
+    },
+  ],
+  "workloadProfile": "A String", # The workload profile for the instance.
 }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html index 6465c4702cd..0750dc2ae6f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html @@ -91,21 +91,12 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Get a Job specified by its resource name.

-

- getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.

list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

List all Jobs for a project within a region.

list_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

-

- setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.

-

- testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource. If the resource does not exist, this will return an empty set of permissions, not a `NOT_FOUND` error. Note: This operation is designed to be used for building permission-aware UIs and command-line tools, not for authorization checking. This operation may "fail open" without warning.

Method Details

close() @@ -204,7 +195,7 @@

Method Details

"pubsubTopic": "A String", # The Pub/Sub topic where notifications like the job state changes will be published. This topic exist in the same project as the job and billings will be charged to this project. If not specified, no Pub/Sub messages will be sent. Topic format: `projects/{project}/topics/{topic}`. }, ], - "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied. + "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). Default value is 0. Higher value indicates higher priority. A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied. "status": { # Job status. # Output only. Job status. It is read only for users. "runDuration": "A String", # The duration of time that the Job spent in status RUNNING. "state": "A String", # Job state @@ -284,9 +275,9 @@

Method Details

"environments": { # Deprecated: please use environment(non-plural) instead. "a_key": "A String", }, - "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. The valid size of lifecycle policies are [0, 10]. For each lifecycle policy, when the condition is met, the action in that policy will execute. If there are multiple policies that the task execution result matches, we use the action from the first matched policy. If task execution result does not meet with any of the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. + "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. Currently we only support one lifecycle policy. When the lifecycle policy condition is met, the action in the policy will execute. If task execution result does not meet with the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. { # LifecyclePolicy describes how to deal with task failures based on different conditions. - "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. + "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. When RETRY_TASK is specified, we will retry failed tasks if we notice any exit code match and fail tasks if no match is found. Likewise, when FAIL_TASK is specified, we will fail tasks if we notice any exit code match and retry tasks if no match is found. "actionCondition": { # Conditions for actions to deal with task failures. # Conditions that decide why a task failure is dealt with a specific action. "exitCodes": [ # Exit codes of a task execution. If there are more than 1 exit codes, when task executes with any of the exit code in the list, the condition is met and the action will be executed. 42, @@ -361,7 +352,7 @@

Method Details

} jobId: string, ID used to uniquely identify the Job within its parent scope. This field should contain at most 63 characters and must start with lowercase characters. Only lowercase characters, numbers and '-' are accepted. The '-' character cannot be the first or the last one. A system generated ID will be used if the field is not set. The job.name field in the request will be ignored and the created resource name of the Job will be "{parent}/jobs/{job_id}". - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -453,7 +444,7 @@

Method Details

"pubsubTopic": "A String", # The Pub/Sub topic where notifications like the job state changes will be published. This topic exist in the same project as the job and billings will be charged to this project. If not specified, no Pub/Sub messages will be sent. Topic format: `projects/{project}/topics/{topic}`. }, ], - "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied. + "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). Default value is 0. Higher value indicates higher priority. A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied. "status": { # Job status. # Output only. Job status. It is read only for users. "runDuration": "A String", # The duration of time that the Job spent in status RUNNING. "state": "A String", # Job state @@ -533,9 +524,9 @@

Method Details

"environments": { # Deprecated: please use environment(non-plural) instead. "a_key": "A String", }, - "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. The valid size of lifecycle policies are [0, 10]. For each lifecycle policy, when the condition is met, the action in that policy will execute. If there are multiple policies that the task execution result matches, we use the action from the first matched policy. If task execution result does not meet with any of the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. + "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. Currently we only support one lifecycle policy. When the lifecycle policy condition is met, the action in the policy will execute. If task execution result does not meet with the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. { # LifecyclePolicy describes how to deal with task failures based on different conditions. - "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. + "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. When RETRY_TASK is specified, we will retry failed tasks if we notice any exit code match and fail tasks if no match is found. Likewise, when FAIL_TASK is specified, we will fail tasks if we notice any exit code match and retry tasks if no match is found. "actionCondition": { # Conditions for actions to deal with task failures. # Conditions that decide why a task failure is dealt with a specific action. "exitCodes": [ # Exit codes of a task execution. If there are more than 1 exit codes, when task executes with any of the exit code in the list, the condition is met and the action will be executed. 42, @@ -617,7 +608,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Job name. (required) reason: string, Optional. Reason for this deletion. - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -744,7 +735,7 @@

Method Details

"pubsubTopic": "A String", # The Pub/Sub topic where notifications like the job state changes will be published. This topic exist in the same project as the job and billings will be charged to this project. If not specified, no Pub/Sub messages will be sent. Topic format: `projects/{project}/topics/{topic}`. }, ], - "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied. + "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). Default value is 0. Higher value indicates higher priority. A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied. "status": { # Job status. # Output only. Job status. It is read only for users. "runDuration": "A String", # The duration of time that the Job spent in status RUNNING. "state": "A String", # Job state @@ -824,9 +815,9 @@

Method Details

"environments": { # Deprecated: please use environment(non-plural) instead. "a_key": "A String", }, - "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. The valid size of lifecycle policies are [0, 10]. For each lifecycle policy, when the condition is met, the action in that policy will execute. If there are multiple policies that the task execution result matches, we use the action from the first matched policy. If task execution result does not meet with any of the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. + "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. Currently we only support one lifecycle policy. When the lifecycle policy condition is met, the action in the policy will execute. If task execution result does not meet with the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. { # LifecyclePolicy describes how to deal with task failures based on different conditions. - "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. + "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. When RETRY_TASK is specified, we will retry failed tasks if we notice any exit code match and fail tasks if no match is found. Likewise, when FAIL_TASK is specified, we will fail tasks if we notice any exit code match and retry tasks if no match is found. "actionCondition": { # Conditions for actions to deal with task failures. # Conditions that decide why a task failure is dealt with a specific action. "exitCodes": [ # Exit codes of a task execution. If there are more than 1 exit codes, when task executes with any of the exit code in the list, the condition is met and the action will be executed. 42, @@ -901,54 +892,6 @@

Method Details

}
-
- getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.
-
-Args:
-  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being requested. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
-  options_requestedPolicyVersion: integer, Optional. The maximum policy version that will be used to format the policy. Valid values are 0, 1, and 3. Requests specifying an invalid value will be rejected. Requests for policies with any conditional role bindings must specify version 3. Policies with no conditional role bindings may specify any valid value or leave the field unset. The policy in the response might use the policy version that you specified, or it might use a lower policy version. For example, if you specify version 3, but the policy has no conditional role bindings, the response uses version 1. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { "bindings": [ { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin", "members": [ "user:mike@example.com", "group:admins@example.com", "domain:google.com", "serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com" ] }, { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer", "members": [ "user:eve@example.com" ], "condition": { "title": "expirable access", "description": "Does not grant access after Sep 2020", "expression": "request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z')", } } ], "etag": "BwWWja0YfJA=", "version": 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z') etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
-  "auditConfigs": [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
-    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { "audit_configs": [ { "service": "allServices", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" }, { "log_type": "ADMIN_READ" } ] }, { "service": "sampleservice.googleapis.com", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ" }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE", "exempted_members": [ "user:aliya@example.com" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
-      "auditLogConfigs": [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
-        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" } ] } This enables 'DATA_READ' and 'DATA_WRITE' logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
-          "exemptedMembers": [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
-            "A String",
-          ],
-          "logType": "A String", # The log type that this config enables.
-        },
-      ],
-      "service": "A String", # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
-    },
-  ],
-  "bindings": [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
-    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
-      "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
-        "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
-        "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
-        "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
-        "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
-      },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
-        "A String",
-      ],
-      "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
-    },
-  ],
-  "etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
-  "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
-}
-
-
list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) 
List all Jobs for a project within a region.
@@ -1051,7 +994,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The Pub/Sub topic where notifications like the job state changes will be published. This topic exist in the same project as the job and billings will be charged to this project. If not specified, no Pub/Sub messages will be sent. Topic format: `projects/{project}/topics/{topic}`.
         },
       ],
-      "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied.
+      "priority": "A String", # Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). Default value is 0. Higher value indicates higher priority. A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied.
       "status": { # Job status. # Output only. Job status. It is read only for users.
         "runDuration": "A String", # The duration of time that the Job spent in status RUNNING.
         "state": "A String", # Job state
@@ -1131,9 +1074,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "environments": { # Deprecated: please use environment(non-plural) instead.
               "a_key": "A String",
             },
-            "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. The valid size of lifecycle policies are [0, 10]. For each lifecycle policy, when the condition is met, the action in that policy will execute. If there are multiple policies that the task execution result matches, we use the action from the first matched policy. If task execution result does not meet with any of the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count.
+            "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. Currently we only support one lifecycle policy. When the lifecycle policy condition is met, the action in the policy will execute. If task execution result does not meet with the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count.
               { # LifecyclePolicy describes how to deal with task failures based on different conditions.
-                "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true.
+                "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. When RETRY_TASK is specified, we will retry failed tasks if we notice any exit code match and fail tasks if no match is found. Likewise, when FAIL_TASK is specified, we will fail tasks if we notice any exit code match and retry tasks if no match is found.
                 "actionCondition": { # Conditions for actions to deal with task failures. # Conditions that decide why a task failure is dealt with a specific action.
                   "exitCodes": [ # Exit codes of a task execution. If there are more than 1 exit codes, when task executes with any of the exit code in the list, the condition is met and the action will be executed.
                     42,
@@ -1228,119 +1171,4 @@ 
Method Details
-
- setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.
-
-Args:
-  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being specified. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # Request message for `SetIamPolicy` method.
-  "policy": { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { "bindings": [ { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin", "members": [ "user:mike@example.com", "group:admins@example.com", "domain:google.com", "serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com" ] }, { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer", "members": [ "user:eve@example.com" ], "condition": { "title": "expirable access", "description": "Does not grant access after Sep 2020", "expression": "request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z')", } } ], "etag": "BwWWja0YfJA=", "version": 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z') etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/). # REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the `resource`. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is a valid policy but certain Google Cloud services (such as Projects) might reject them.
-    "auditConfigs": [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
-      { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { "audit_configs": [ { "service": "allServices", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" }, { "log_type": "ADMIN_READ" } ] }, { "service": "sampleservice.googleapis.com", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ" }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE", "exempted_members": [ "user:aliya@example.com" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
-        "auditLogConfigs": [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
-          { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" } ] } This enables 'DATA_READ' and 'DATA_WRITE' logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
-            "exemptedMembers": [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
-              "A String",
-            ],
-            "logType": "A String", # The log type that this config enables.
-          },
-        ],
-        "service": "A String", # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
-      },
-    ],
-    "bindings": [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
-      { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
-        "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
-          "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
-          "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
-          "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
-          "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
-        },
-        "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
-          "A String",
-        ],
-        "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
-      },
-    ],
-    "etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
-    "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
-  },
-  "updateMask": "A String", # OPTIONAL: A FieldMask specifying which fields of the policy to modify. Only the fields in the mask will be modified. If no mask is provided, the following default mask is used: `paths: "bindings, etag"`
-}
-
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { "bindings": [ { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin", "members": [ "user:mike@example.com", "group:admins@example.com", "domain:google.com", "serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com" ] }, { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer", "members": [ "user:eve@example.com" ], "condition": { "title": "expirable access", "description": "Does not grant access after Sep 2020", "expression": "request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z')", } } ], "etag": "BwWWja0YfJA=", "version": 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z') etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
-  "auditConfigs": [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
-    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { "audit_configs": [ { "service": "allServices", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" }, { "log_type": "ADMIN_READ" } ] }, { "service": "sampleservice.googleapis.com", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ" }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE", "exempted_members": [ "user:aliya@example.com" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
-      "auditLogConfigs": [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
-        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" } ] } This enables 'DATA_READ' and 'DATA_WRITE' logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
-          "exemptedMembers": [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
-            "A String",
-          ],
-          "logType": "A String", # The log type that this config enables.
-        },
-      ],
-      "service": "A String", # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
-    },
-  ],
-  "bindings": [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
-    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
-      "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
-        "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
-        "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
-        "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
-        "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
-      },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
-        "A String",
-      ],
-      "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
-    },
-  ],
-  "etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
-  "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
-}
-
- -
- testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource. If the resource does not exist, this will return an empty set of permissions, not a `NOT_FOUND` error. Note: This operation is designed to be used for building permission-aware UIs and command-line tools, not for authorization checking. This operation may "fail open" without warning.
-
-Args:
-  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy detail is being requested. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # Request message for `TestIamPermissions` method.
-  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the `resource`. Permissions with wildcards (such as `*` or `storage.*`) are not allowed. For more information see [IAM Overview](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/overview#permissions).
-    "A String",
-  ],
-}
-
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # Response message for `TestIamPermissions` method.
-  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
-    "A String",
-  ],
-}
-
- \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.state.html b/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.state.html index 0961192281e..bd1f16baacb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.state.html +++ b/docs/dyn/batch_v1.projects.locations.state.html @@ -178,9 +178,9 @@

Method Details

"environments": { # Deprecated: please use environment(non-plural) instead. "a_key": "A String", }, - "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. The valid size of lifecycle policies are [0, 10]. For each lifecycle policy, when the condition is met, the action in that policy will execute. If there are multiple policies that the task execution result matches, we use the action from the first matched policy. If task execution result does not meet with any of the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. + "lifecyclePolicies": [ # Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. Currently we only support one lifecycle policy. When the lifecycle policy condition is met, the action in the policy will execute. If task execution result does not meet with the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count. { # LifecyclePolicy describes how to deal with task failures based on different conditions. - "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. + "action": "A String", # Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. When RETRY_TASK is specified, we will retry failed tasks if we notice any exit code match and fail tasks if no match is found. Likewise, when FAIL_TASK is specified, we will fail tasks if we notice any exit code match and retry tasks if no match is found. "actionCondition": { # Conditions for actions to deal with task failures. # Conditions that decide why a task failure is dealt with a specific action. "exitCodes": [ # Exit codes of a task execution. If there are more than 1 exit codes, when task executes with any of the exit code in the list, the condition is met and the action will be executed. 42, diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.capacityCommitments.html b/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.capacityCommitments.html index 830561b4105..95351f0d436 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.capacityCommitments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.capacityCommitments.html @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@

Method Details

"first": { # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. # First capacity commitment, result of a split. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@

Method Details

"second": { # Capacity commitment is a way to purchase compute capacity for BigQuery jobs (in the form of slots) with some committed period of usage. Annual commitments renew by default. Commitments can be removed after their commitment end time passes. In order to remove annual commitment, its plan needs to be changed to monthly or flex first. A capacity commitment resource exists as a child resource of the admin project. # Second capacity commitment, result of a split. "commitmentEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. "commitmentStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The start of the current commitment period. It is applicable only for ACTIVE capacity commitments. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the capacity commitment. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "failureStatus": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. For FAILED commitment plan, provides the reason of failure. "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html b/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html index b23a89ea540..6f6d3b5d6bb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@

Method Details

}, "concurrency": "A String", # Job concurrency target which sets a soft upper bound on the number of jobs that can run concurrently in this reservation. This is a soft target due to asynchronous nature of the system and various optimizations for small queries. Default value is 0 which means that concurrency target will be automatically computed by the system. NOTE: this field is exposed as `target_job_concurrency` in the Information Schema, DDL and BQ CLI. "creationTime": "A String", # Output only. Creation time of the reservation. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the reservation. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "ignoreIdleSlots": True or False, # If false, any query or pipeline job using this reservation will use idle slots from other reservations within the same admin project. If true, a query or pipeline job using this reservation will execute with the slot capacity specified in the slot_capacity field at most. "multiRegionAuxiliary": True or False, # Applicable only for reservations located within one of the BigQuery multi-regions (US or EU). If set to true, this reservation is placed in the organization's secondary region which is designated for disaster recovery purposes. If false, this reservation is placed in the organization's default region. "name": "A String", # The resource name of the reservation, e.g., `projects/*/locations/*/reservations/team1-prod`. The reservation_id must only contain lower case alphanumeric characters or dashes. It must start with a letter and must not end with a dash. Its maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@

Method Details

}, "concurrency": "A String", # Job concurrency target which sets a soft upper bound on the number of jobs that can run concurrently in this reservation. This is a soft target due to asynchronous nature of the system and various optimizations for small queries. Default value is 0 which means that concurrency target will be automatically computed by the system. NOTE: this field is exposed as `target_job_concurrency` in the Information Schema, DDL and BQ CLI. "creationTime": "A String", # Output only. Creation time of the reservation. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the reservation. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "ignoreIdleSlots": True or False, # If false, any query or pipeline job using this reservation will use idle slots from other reservations within the same admin project. If true, a query or pipeline job using this reservation will execute with the slot capacity specified in the slot_capacity field at most. "multiRegionAuxiliary": True or False, # Applicable only for reservations located within one of the BigQuery multi-regions (US or EU). If set to true, this reservation is placed in the organization's secondary region which is designated for disaster recovery purposes. If false, this reservation is placed in the organization's default region. "name": "A String", # The resource name of the reservation, e.g., `projects/*/locations/*/reservations/team1-prod`. The reservation_id must only contain lower case alphanumeric characters or dashes. It must start with a letter and must not end with a dash. Its maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@

Method Details

}, "concurrency": "A String", # Job concurrency target which sets a soft upper bound on the number of jobs that can run concurrently in this reservation. This is a soft target due to asynchronous nature of the system and various optimizations for small queries. Default value is 0 which means that concurrency target will be automatically computed by the system. NOTE: this field is exposed as `target_job_concurrency` in the Information Schema, DDL and BQ CLI. "creationTime": "A String", # Output only. Creation time of the reservation. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the reservation. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "ignoreIdleSlots": True or False, # If false, any query or pipeline job using this reservation will use idle slots from other reservations within the same admin project. If true, a query or pipeline job using this reservation will execute with the slot capacity specified in the slot_capacity field at most. "multiRegionAuxiliary": True or False, # Applicable only for reservations located within one of the BigQuery multi-regions (US or EU). If set to true, this reservation is placed in the organization's secondary region which is designated for disaster recovery purposes. If false, this reservation is placed in the organization's default region. "name": "A String", # The resource name of the reservation, e.g., `projects/*/locations/*/reservations/team1-prod`. The reservation_id must only contain lower case alphanumeric characters or dashes. It must start with a letter and must not end with a dash. Its maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@

Method Details

}, "concurrency": "A String", # Job concurrency target which sets a soft upper bound on the number of jobs that can run concurrently in this reservation. This is a soft target due to asynchronous nature of the system and various optimizations for small queries. Default value is 0 which means that concurrency target will be automatically computed by the system. NOTE: this field is exposed as `target_job_concurrency` in the Information Schema, DDL and BQ CLI. "creationTime": "A String", # Output only. Creation time of the reservation. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the reservation. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "ignoreIdleSlots": True or False, # If false, any query or pipeline job using this reservation will use idle slots from other reservations within the same admin project. If true, a query or pipeline job using this reservation will execute with the slot capacity specified in the slot_capacity field at most. "multiRegionAuxiliary": True or False, # Applicable only for reservations located within one of the BigQuery multi-regions (US or EU). If set to true, this reservation is placed in the organization's secondary region which is designated for disaster recovery purposes. If false, this reservation is placed in the organization's default region. "name": "A String", # The resource name of the reservation, e.g., `projects/*/locations/*/reservations/team1-prod`. The reservation_id must only contain lower case alphanumeric characters or dashes. It must start with a letter and must not end with a dash. Its maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@

Method Details

}, "concurrency": "A String", # Job concurrency target which sets a soft upper bound on the number of jobs that can run concurrently in this reservation. This is a soft target due to asynchronous nature of the system and various optimizations for small queries. Default value is 0 which means that concurrency target will be automatically computed by the system. NOTE: this field is exposed as `target_job_concurrency` in the Information Schema, DDL and BQ CLI. "creationTime": "A String", # Output only. Creation time of the reservation. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the reservation. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "ignoreIdleSlots": True or False, # If false, any query or pipeline job using this reservation will use idle slots from other reservations within the same admin project. If true, a query or pipeline job using this reservation will execute with the slot capacity specified in the slot_capacity field at most. "multiRegionAuxiliary": True or False, # Applicable only for reservations located within one of the BigQuery multi-regions (US or EU). If set to true, this reservation is placed in the organization's secondary region which is designated for disaster recovery purposes. If false, this reservation is placed in the organization's default region. "name": "A String", # The resource name of the reservation, e.g., `projects/*/locations/*/reservations/team1-prod`. The reservation_id must only contain lower case alphanumeric characters or dashes. It must start with a letter and must not end with a dash. Its maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@

Method Details

}, "concurrency": "A String", # Job concurrency target which sets a soft upper bound on the number of jobs that can run concurrently in this reservation. This is a soft target due to asynchronous nature of the system and various optimizations for small queries. Default value is 0 which means that concurrency target will be automatically computed by the system. NOTE: this field is exposed as `target_job_concurrency` in the Information Schema, DDL and BQ CLI. "creationTime": "A String", # Output only. Creation time of the reservation. - "edition": "A String", # Edition of the reservation. + "edition": "A String", # Do not use. "ignoreIdleSlots": True or False, # If false, any query or pipeline job using this reservation will use idle slots from other reservations within the same admin project. If true, a query or pipeline job using this reservation will execute with the slot capacity specified in the slot_capacity field at most. "multiRegionAuxiliary": True or False, # Applicable only for reservations located within one of the BigQuery multi-regions (US or EU). If set to true, this reservation is placed in the organization's secondary region which is designated for disaster recovery purposes. If false, this reservation is placed in the organization's default region. "name": "A String", # The resource name of the reservation, e.g., `projects/*/locations/*/reservations/team1-prod`. The reservation_id must only contain lower case alphanumeric characters or dashes. It must start with a letter and must not end with a dash. Its maximum length is 64 characters. diff --git a/docs/dyn/businessprofileperformance_v1.locations.html b/docs/dyn/businessprofileperformance_v1.locations.html index 23adae00fea..86c7ec60736 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/businessprofileperformance_v1.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/businessprofileperformance_v1.locations.html @@ -110,6 +110,7 @@

Method Details

WEBSITE_CLICKS - The number of times the business profile website was clicked. BUSINESS_BOOKINGS - The number of bookings received from the business profile. BUSINESS_FOOD_ORDERS - The number of food orders received from the business profile. + BUSINESS_FOOD_MENU_CLICKS - The number of clicks to view or interact with the menu content on the business profile. Multiple clicks by a unique user within a single day are counted as 1. dailyRange_endDate_day: integer, Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant. dailyRange_endDate_month: integer, Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day. dailyRange_endDate_year: integer, Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year. diff --git a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html index e67ded65cb0..d1f6d25dcab 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html +++ b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html @@ -117,6 +117,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. @@ -149,6 +150,7 @@

Method Details

"nextPageToken": "A String", # A token that can be sent as `pageToken` to retrieve the next page of results. If empty, there are no subsequent pages. "spaces": [ # List of spaces in the requested (or first) page. { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. diff --git a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.messages.html b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.messages.html index ea22aad2276..2ff0a3d878b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.messages.html +++ b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.messages.html @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -353,8 +353,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -473,12 +473,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -1084,7 +1084,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -1103,8 +1103,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -1223,12 +1223,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -1300,7 +1300,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -1336,7 +1336,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -1428,6 +1428,7 @@

Method Details

"commandId": "A String", # The id of the slash command invoked. }, "space": { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. # The space the message belongs to. When accessed with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/auth/users), only the name of the Space is populated. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. @@ -1632,7 +1633,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -1685,7 +1686,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -1704,8 +1705,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -1824,12 +1825,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -1901,7 +1902,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -1937,7 +1938,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -2382,7 +2383,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -2435,7 +2436,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -2454,8 +2455,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -2574,12 +2575,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -2651,7 +2652,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -2687,7 +2688,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -2779,6 +2780,7 @@

Method Details

"commandId": "A String", # The id of the slash command invoked. }, "space": { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. # The space the message belongs to. When accessed with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/auth/users), only the name of the Space is populated. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. @@ -3000,7 +3002,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -3053,7 +3055,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -3072,8 +3074,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -3192,12 +3194,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -3269,7 +3271,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -3305,7 +3307,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -3750,7 +3752,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -3803,7 +3805,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -3822,8 +3824,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -3942,12 +3944,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -4019,7 +4021,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -4055,7 +4057,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -4147,6 +4149,7 @@

Method Details

"commandId": "A String", # The id of the slash command invoked. }, "space": { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. # The space the message belongs to. When accessed with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/auth/users), only the name of the Space is populated. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. @@ -4345,7 +4348,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -4398,7 +4401,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -4417,8 +4420,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -4537,12 +4540,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -4614,7 +4617,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -4650,7 +4653,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -5095,7 +5098,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -5148,7 +5151,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -5167,8 +5170,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -5287,12 +5290,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -5364,7 +5367,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -5400,7 +5403,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -5492,6 +5495,7 @@

Method Details

"commandId": "A String", # The id of the slash command invoked. }, "space": { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. # The space the message belongs to. When accessed with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/auth/users), only the name of the Space is populated. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. @@ -5690,7 +5694,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -5743,7 +5747,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -5762,8 +5766,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -5882,12 +5886,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -5959,7 +5963,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -5995,7 +5999,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -6440,7 +6444,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -6493,7 +6497,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -6512,8 +6516,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -6632,12 +6636,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -6709,7 +6713,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -6745,7 +6749,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -6837,6 +6841,7 @@

Method Details

"commandId": "A String", # The id of the slash command invoked. }, "space": { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. # The space the message belongs to. When accessed with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/auth/users), only the name of the Space is populated. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. @@ -7035,7 +7040,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -7088,7 +7093,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -7107,8 +7112,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -7227,12 +7232,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -7304,7 +7309,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -7340,7 +7345,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -7785,7 +7790,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -7838,7 +7843,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -7857,8 +7862,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -7977,12 +7982,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -8054,7 +8059,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -8090,7 +8095,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -8182,6 +8187,7 @@

Method Details

"commandId": "A String", # The id of the slash command invoked. }, "space": { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. # The space the message belongs to. When accessed with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/auth/users), only the name of the Space is populated. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. @@ -8380,7 +8386,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -8433,7 +8439,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -8452,8 +8458,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -8572,12 +8578,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -8649,7 +8655,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -8685,7 +8691,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -9130,7 +9136,7 @@

Method Details

"uncollapsibleWidgetsCount": 42, # The number of uncollapsible widgets which remain visible even when a section is collapsed. For example, when a section contains five widgets and the `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is set to `2`, the first two widgets are always shown and the last three are collapsed by default. The `uncollapsibleWidgetsCount` is taken into account only when `collapsible` is `true`. "widgets": [ # All the widgets in the section. Must contain at least 1 widget. { # Each card is made up of widgets. A widget is a composite object that can represent one of text, images, buttons, and other object types. - "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ "button": { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 } "disabled": true }, "button": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE" "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } }, ] } ``` + "buttonList": { # A list of buttons layed out horizontally. # A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` "buttonList": { "buttons": [ { "text": "Edit", "color": { "red": 0, "green": 0, "blue": 1, "alpha": 1 }, "disabled": true, }, { "icon": { "knownIcon": "INVITE", "altText": "check calendar" }, "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://example.com/calendar" } } } ] } ``` "buttons": [ # An array of buttons. { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". @@ -9183,7 +9189,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, - "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "date_time_picker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` + "dateTimePicker": { # Lets users specify a date, a time, or both a date and a time. Accepts text input from users, but features an interactive date and time selector that helps users enter correctly-formatted dates and times. If users enter a date or time incorrectly, the widget shows an error that prompts users to enter the correct format. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps coming soon. # Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` "dateTimePicker": { "name": "appointment_time", "label": "Book your appointment at:", "type": "DATE_AND_TIME", "valueMsEpoch": "796435200000" } ``` "label": "A String", # The text that prompts users to enter a date, time, or datetime. Specify text that helps the user enter the information your app needs. For example, if users are setting an appointment, then a label like "Appointment date" or "Appointment date and time" might work well. "name": "A String", # The name by which the datetime picker is identified in a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). "onChangeAction": { # An action that describes the behavior when the form is submitted. For example, an Apps Script can be invoked to handle the form. # Triggered when the user clicks **Save** or **Clear** from the datetime picker interface. @@ -9202,8 +9208,8 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # What kind of date and time input the datetime picker supports. "valueMsEpoch": "A String", # The value displayed as the default value before user input or previous user input, represented in milliseconds ([Epoch time](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time)). For `DATE_AND_TIME` type, the full epoch value is used. For `DATE_ONLY` type, only date of the epoch time is used. For `TIME_ONLY` type, only time of the epoch time is used. For example, to represent 3:00 AM, set epoch time to `3 * 60 * 60 * 1000`. }, - "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchWidget": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "ControlType.CHECKBOX" } } ``` - "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "decoratedText": { # A widget that displays text with optional decorations such as a label above or below the text, an icon in front of the text, a selection widget or a button after the text. # Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` "decoratedText": { "icon": { "knownIcon": "EMAIL" }, "topLabel": "Email Address", "text": "sasha@example.com", "bottomLabel": "This is a new Email address!", "switchControl": { "name": "has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha", "selected": false, "controlType": "CHECKBOX" } } ``` + "bottomLabel": "A String", # The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. "button": { # A text, icon, or text + icon button that users can click. To make an image a clickable button, specify an Image (not an ImageComponent) and set an `onClick` action. Currently supported in Chat apps (including [dialogs] (https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs) and [card messages] (https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards)) and Google Workspace Add-ons. # A button that can be clicked to trigger an action. "altText": "A String", # The alternative text used for accessibility. Set descriptive text that lets users know what the button does. For example, if a button opens a hyperlink, you might write: "Opens a new browser tab and navigates to the Google Chat developer documentation at https://developers.google.com/chat". "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # If set, the button is filled with a solid background color and the font color changes to maintain contrast with the background color. For example, setting a blue background will likely result in white text. If unset, the image background is white and the font color is blue. For red, green and blue, the value of each field is a `float` number that can be expressed in either of two ways: as a number between 0 and 255 divided by 255 (153/255) or as a value between 0 and 1 (0.6). 0 represents the absence of a color and 1 or 255/255 represent the full presence of that color on the RGB scale. Optionally set alpha, which sets a level of transparency using this equation: ``` pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) ``` For alpha, a value of 1 corresponds with a solid color, and a value of 0 corresponds with a completely transparent color. For example, the following color represents a half transparent red: ``` "color": { "red": 1, "green": 0, "blue": 0, "alpha": 0.5 } ``` @@ -9322,12 +9328,12 @@

Method Details

"value": "A String", # The value entered by a user, returned as part of a form input event. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). }, "text": "A String", # Required. The primary text. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. - "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details. + "topLabel": "A String", # The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. "wrapText": True or False, # The wrap text setting. If `true`, the text wraps and displays on multiple lines. Otherwise, the text is truncated. Only applies to `text`, not `topLabel` and `bottomLabel`. }, - "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` + "divider": { # Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": {} ``` # Displays a horizontal line divider between widgets. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` "divider": { } ``` }, - "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "numColumns": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4.0 }, "items": [ "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url":"https://www.example.com" } } } ``` + "grid": { # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` # Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` "grid": { "title": "A fine collection of items", "columnCount": 2, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE", "cornerRadius": 4 }, "items": [ { "image": { "imageUri": "https://www.example.com/image.png", "cropStyle": { "type": "SQUARE" }, "borderStyle": { "type": "STROKE" } }, "title": "An item", "textAlignment": "CENTER" } ], "onClick": { "openLink": { "url": "https://www.example.com" } } } ``` "borderStyle": { # Represents the complete border style applied to items in a widget. # The border style to apply to each grid item. "cornerRadius": 42, # The corner radius for the border. "strokeColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to/from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't carry information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value (e.g. sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, BT.2020, etc.). By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most 1e-5. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The colors to use when the type is `BORDER_TYPE_STROKE`. @@ -9399,7 +9405,7 @@

Method Details

}, "title": "A String", # The text that displays in the grid header. }, - "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png" "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` + "image": { # An image that is specified by a URL and can have an `onClick` action. # Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` "image": { "imageUrl": "https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png", "altText": "Chat app avatar" } ``` "altText": "A String", # The alternative text of this image, used for accessibility. "imageUrl": "A String", # The `https` URL that hosts the image. For example: ``` https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png ``` "onClick": { # Represents how to respond when users click an interactive element on a card, such as a button. # When a user clicks on the image, the click triggers this action. @@ -9435,7 +9441,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, - "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "SelectionType.DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` + "selectionInput": { # A widget that creates a UI item with options for users to select. For example, a dropdown menu or check list. Chat apps receive and can process the value of entered text during form input events. For details about working with form inputs, see [Receive form data](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs#receive_form_data_from_dialogs). When you need to collect data from users that matches options you set, use a selection input. To collect abstract data from users, use the text input widget instead. Only supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) coming soon. # Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` "selectionInput": { "name": "size", "label": "Size" "type": "DROPDOWN", "items": [ { "text": "S", "value": "small", "selected": false }, { "text": "M", "value": "medium", "selected": true }, { "text": "L", "value": "large", "selected": false }, { "text": "XL", "value": "extra_large", "selected": false } ] } ``` "items": [ # An array of the selected items. For example, all the selected check boxes. { # A selectable item in a selection input, such as a check box or a switch. "selected": True or False, # When `true`, more than one item is selected. If more than one item is selected for radio buttons and dropdown menus, the first selected item is received and the ones after are ignored. @@ -9527,6 +9533,7 @@

Method Details

"commandId": "A String", # The id of the slash command invoked. }, "space": { # A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app. # The space the message belongs to. When accessed with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/auth/users), only the name of the Space is populated. + "adminInstalled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging. "displayName": "A String", # The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters. "name": "A String", # Resource name of the space. Format: spaces/{space} "singleUserBotDm": True or False, # Optional. Whether the space is a DM between a Chat app and a single human. diff --git a/docs/dyn/chromemanagement_v1.customers.reports.html b/docs/dyn/chromemanagement_v1.customers.reports.html index 3cd2032e323..ebadb7a7582 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/chromemanagement_v1.customers.reports.html +++ b/docs/dyn/chromemanagement_v1.customers.reports.html @@ -101,6 +101,18 @@

Instance Methods

countInstalledApps_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ countPrintJobsByPrinter(customer, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, printerOrgUnitId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Get a summary of printing done by each printer.

+

+ countPrintJobsByPrinter_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ countPrintJobsByUser(customer, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, printerOrgUnitId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Get a summary of printing done by each user.

+

+ countPrintJobsByUser_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

findInstalledAppDevices(customer, appId=None, appType=None, filter=None, orderBy=None, orgUnitId=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Generate report of devices that have a specified app installed.

@@ -337,6 +349,103 @@

Method Details

+
+ countPrintJobsByPrinter(customer, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, printerOrgUnitId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Get a summary of printing done by each printer.
+
+Args:
+  customer: string, Required. Customer ID prefixed with "customers/" or "customers/my_customer" to use the customer associated to the account making the request. (required)
+  filter: string, Query string to filter results, AND-separated fields in EBNF syntax. Note: OR operations are not supported in this filter. Note: Only >= and <= comparators are supported in this filter. Supported filter fields: * completion_time
+  orderBy: string, Field used to order results. If omitted, results will be ordered in ascending order of the 'printer' field. Supported order_by fields: * printer * job_count * device_count * user_count
+  pageSize: integer, Maximum number of results to return. Maximum and default are 100.
+  pageToken: string, Token to specify the page of the response to be returned.
+  printerOrgUnitId: string, The ID of the organizational unit for printers. If specified, only data for printers from the specified organizational unit will be returned. If omitted, data for printers from all organizational units will be returned.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response containing a summary printing report for each printer from the specified organizational unit for the requested time interval.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Pagination token for requesting the next page.
+  "printerReports": [ # List of PrinterReports matching request.
+    { # Report for CountPrintJobsByPrinter, contains statistics on printer usage. Contains the total number of print jobs initiated with this printer, the number of users and the number of devices that have initiated at least one print job with this printer.
+      "deviceCount": "A String", # Number of chrome devices that have been used to send print jobs to the specified printer.
+      "jobCount": "A String", # Number of print jobs sent to the printer.
+      "printer": "A String", # Printer name.
+      "printerId": "A String", # Printer API ID.
+      "printerModel": "A String", # Printer model.
+      "userCount": "A String", # Number of users that have sent print jobs to the printer.
+    },
+  ],
+  "totalSize": "A String", # Total number of printers matching request.
+}
+
+ +
+ countPrintJobsByPrinter_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ countPrintJobsByUser(customer, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, printerOrgUnitId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Get a summary of printing done by each user.
+
+Args:
+  customer: string, Required. Customer ID prefixed with "customers/" or "customers/my_customer" to use the customer associated to the account making the request. (required)
+  filter: string, Query string to filter results, AND-separated fields in EBNF syntax. Note: OR operations are not supported in this filter. Note: Only >= and <= comparators are supported in this filter. Supported filter fields: * completion_time
+  orderBy: string, Field used to order results. If omitted, results will be ordered in ascending order of the 'user_email' field. Supported order_by fields: * user_email * job_count * printer_count * device_count
+  pageSize: integer, Maximum number of results to return. Maximum and default are 100.
+  pageToken: string, Token to specify the page of the response to be returned.
+  printerOrgUnitId: string, The ID of the organizational unit for printers. If specified, only print jobs initiated with printers from the specified organizational unit will be counted. If omitted, all print jobs will be counted.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response containing a summary printing report for each user that has initiated a print job with a printer from the specified organizational unit during the requested time interval.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Pagination token for requesting the next page.
+  "totalSize": "A String", # Total number of users matching request.
+  "userPrintReports": [ # List of UserPrintReports matching request.
+    { # Report for CountPrintJobsByUser, contains printing statistics for a user. Contains the number of printers, the number of devices used to initiate print jobs, and the number of print jobs initiated.
+      "deviceCount": "A String", # Number of chrome devices that have been used to initiate print jobs by the user.
+      "jobCount": "A String", # Number of print jobs initiated by the user.
+      "printerCount": "A String", # Number of printers used by the user.
+      "userEmail": "A String", # The primary e-mail address of the user.
+      "userId": "A String", # The unique Directory API ID of the user.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ countPrintJobsByUser_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+
findInstalledAppDevices(customer, appId=None, appType=None, filter=None, orderBy=None, orgUnitId=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) 
Generate report of devices that have a specified app installed.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta2.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html b/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta2.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html
index a49b7a51b53..841e5c3a1b0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta2.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta2.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ 
Method Details

   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Request message for BufferTask.
+{ # LINT.IfChange Request message for BufferTask.
   "body": { # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged. # Optional. Body of the HTTP request. The body can take any generic value. The value is written to the HttpRequest of the [Task].
     "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
     "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta3.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html b/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta3.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html
index a533838c4c9..30347f15489 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta3.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudtasks_v2beta3.projects.locations.queues.tasks.html
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ 
Method Details

   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Request message for BufferTask.
+{ # LINT.IfChange Request message for BufferTask.
   "body": { # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged. # Optional. Body of the HTTP request. The body can take any generic value. The value is written to the HttpRequest of the [Task].
     "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
     "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html
index c70ab525b29..2b7bc26ac30 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
     "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-    "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+    "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
     "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
       { # Guest OS features.
         "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html
index 8716cf7077b..1d916bb194f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Returns the specified image. Gets a list of available images by making a list() request.

 

   getFromFamily(project, family, x__xgafv=None)

-
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.

+
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.

 

   getIamPolicy(project, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.

@@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -465,10 +465,10 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     getFromFamily(project, family, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.
+  
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.
 
 Args:
-  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  project: string, The image project that the image belongs to. For example, to get a CentOS image, specify centos-cloud as the image project. (required)
   family: string, Name of the image family to search for. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
       "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-      "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+      "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
       "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
         { # Guest OS features.
           "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html
index 5bdbfd9662d..08c4284766c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html
@@ -349,6 +349,11 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the regionInstanceGroups Resource.

 
+

+  regionInstanceTemplates()
+

+
Returns the regionInstanceTemplates Resource.

+
 

   regionInstances()
 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.imageFamilyViews.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.imageFamilyViews.html
index 7d4927b7340..2df772707ae 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.imageFamilyViews.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.imageFamilyViews.html
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
     "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-    "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+    "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
     "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
       { # Guest OS features.
         "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.images.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.images.html
index df034546fcc..e9a3a7fe39c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.images.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.images.html
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Returns the specified image. Gets a list of available images by making a list() request.

 

   getFromFamily(project, family, x__xgafv=None)

-
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.

+
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.

 

   getIamPolicy(project, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.

@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -462,10 +462,10 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     getFromFamily(project, family, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.
+  
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.
 
 Args:
-  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  project: string, The image project that the image belongs to. For example, to get a CentOS image, specify centos-cloud as the image project. (required)
   family: string, Name of the image family to search for. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
       "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-      "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+      "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
       "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
         { # Guest OS features.
           "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -1117,7 +1117,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
index ca069015ae0..50d9ba803ea 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
@@ -74,6 +74,12 @@
 
 
Compute Engine API . instanceTemplates

 
Instance Methods

+

+  aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves the list of all InstanceTemplates resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.

+

+  aggregatedList_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -102,6 +108,352 @@ 
Instance Methods

   testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

 
Method Details

+

+    aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves the list of all InstanceTemplates resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Name of the project scoping this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`.
+  includeAllScopes: boolean, Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Contains a list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": { # A list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList resources.
+    "a_key": { # The name of the scope that contains this set of instance templates.
+      "instanceTemplates": [ # [Output Only] A list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and zone.
+        { # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+          "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+          "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+          "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+          "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+            "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+              "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+              "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+              "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+            },
+            "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+            "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+            },
+            "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+            "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+              { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+                "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+                "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+                "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+                "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+                "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+                  "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                  "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                  "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                  "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                  "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+                },
+                "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+                "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+                "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+                  { # Guest OS features.
+                    "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+                "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+                  "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+                  "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+                  "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+                  "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+                  "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+                  "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options. Guest OS features are applied by merging initializeParams.guestOsFeatures and disks.guestOsFeatures
+                    { # Guest OS features.
+                      "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+                    "a_key": "A String",
+                  },
+                  "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "multiWriter": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the disk can be read/write attached to more than one instance.
+                  "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+                  "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+                  "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput mb per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 1 and 7,124.
+                  "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+                    "a_key": "A String",
+                  },
+                  "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+                  "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+                    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                    "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                    "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                    "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+                  },
+                  "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+                  "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+                    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                    "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                    "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                    "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+                  },
+                },
+                "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+                "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+                "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "locked": True or False, # [Output Only] Whether to indicate the attached disk is locked. The locked disk is not allowed to be detached from the instance, or to be used as the source of the snapshot creation, and the image creation. The instance with at least one locked attached disk is not allow to be used as source of machine image creation, instant snapshot creation, and not allowed to be deleted with --keep-disk parameter set to true for locked disks.
+                "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+                "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+                  "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+                    {
+                      "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                      "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+                    {
+                      "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                      "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+                    {
+                      "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                      "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+                    "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                    "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                  },
+                },
+                "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+                "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+                "userLicenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of user provided licenses. It represents a list of URLs to the license resource. Unlike regular licenses, user provided licenses can be modified after the disk is created.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+            ],
+            "displayDevice": { # A set of Display Device options # Display Device properties to enable support for remote display products like: Teradici, VNC and TeamViewer Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "enableDisplay": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Display enabled.
+            },
+            "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+              { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+                "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+                "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+              },
+            ],
+            "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+            "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+            "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+            "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+              "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+              "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+                { # Metadata
+                  "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+                  "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+                },
+              ],
+              "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+            },
+            "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+            "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+              { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+                "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+                  { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                    "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                    "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                    "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                    "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                    "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                    "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                    "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                    "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                    "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+                  { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+                    "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+                    "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+                "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+                "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+                  { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                    "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                    "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                    "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                    "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                    "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                    "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                    "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                    "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                    "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+                "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+                "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+                "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+                "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+                "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+                "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+                "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+                "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+                "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+              },
+            ],
+            "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+            },
+            "postKeyRevocationActionType": "A String", # PostKeyRevocationActionType of the instance.
+            "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+            "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+              "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+              "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+            "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+            "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+              "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+              "hostErrorTimeoutSeconds": 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+              "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+              "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+              "maintenanceFreezeDurationHours": 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won't be scheduled for maintenance.
+              "maintenanceInterval": "A String", # Specifies the frequency of planned maintenance events. The accepted values are: `PERIODIC`.
+              "maxRunDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the max run duration for the given instance. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the end of the run duration.
+                "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
+                "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
+              },
+              "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+              "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+                { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+                  "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+                  "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+                  "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                },
+              ],
+              "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+              "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+              "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+              "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
+            },
+            "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+              { # A service account.
+                "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+                "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+            ],
+            "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+              "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+              "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+            },
+            "shieldedVmConfig": { # A set of Shielded VM options. # Specifies the Shielded VM options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+              "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled.
+              "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled.
+              "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled.
+            },
+            "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+              "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+              "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+          },
+          "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+          "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+          "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+          "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+            "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+              { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+                "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+                "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+                "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+                "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        },
+      ],
+      "warning": { # [Output Only] An informational warning that replaces the list of instance templates when the list is empty.
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+        "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+          {
+            "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+            "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplateAggregatedList", # Type of resource.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    aggregatedList_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
 

     close()
   
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -480,6 +832,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
   "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
   "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
@@ -871,6 +1224,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
   "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
   "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
@@ -1258,6 +1612,7 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
       },
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
       "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
       "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0b0b0b618c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1200 @@
+
+
+
+
Compute Engine API . regionInstanceTemplates

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  delete(project, region, instanceTemplate, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone.

+

+  get(project, region, instanceTemplate, x__xgafv=None)

+
Returns the specified instance template. Gets a list of available instance templates by making a list() request.

+

+  insert(project, region, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Creates an instance template in the specified project and region using the global instance template whose URL is included in the request.

+

+  list(project, region, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves a list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and region.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    delete(project, region, instanceTemplate, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  instanceTemplate: string, The name of the instance template to delete. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys should match /[a-zA-Z0-9-_]/ and be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than {"instanceLimit": "100/request"}, should be returned as, {"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
+

+    get(project, region, instanceTemplate, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Returns the specified instance template. Gets a list of available instance templates by making a list() request.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  instanceTemplate: string, The name of the instance template. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+    "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+      "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+      "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+      "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+    },
+    "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+    "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+    "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+      { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+        "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+        "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+          "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+          "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+          "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+          "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+          "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+        },
+        "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+        "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+        "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+          { # Guest OS features.
+            "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+          },
+        ],
+        "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+        "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+          "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+          "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+          "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+          "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+          "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options. Guest OS features are applied by merging initializeParams.guestOsFeatures and disks.guestOsFeatures
+            { # Guest OS features.
+              "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+            },
+          ],
+          "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "multiWriter": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the disk can be read/write attached to more than one instance.
+          "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+          "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+          "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput mb per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 1 and 7,124.
+          "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+          "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+        },
+        "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+        "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+        "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "locked": True or False, # [Output Only] Whether to indicate the attached disk is locked. The locked disk is not allowed to be detached from the instance, or to be used as the source of the snapshot creation, and the image creation. The instance with at least one locked attached disk is not allow to be used as source of machine image creation, instant snapshot creation, and not allowed to be deleted with --keep-disk parameter set to true for locked disks.
+        "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+        "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+          "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+            "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+            "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+          },
+        },
+        "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+        "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+        "userLicenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of user provided licenses. It represents a list of URLs to the license resource. Unlike regular licenses, user provided licenses can be modified after the disk is created.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "displayDevice": { # A set of Display Device options # Display Device properties to enable support for remote display products like: Teradici, VNC and TeamViewer Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableDisplay": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Display enabled.
+    },
+    "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+      { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+        "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+        "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+      },
+    ],
+    "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+    "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+    "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+      "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+        { # Metadata
+          "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+          "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+        },
+      ],
+      "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+    },
+    "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+    "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+      { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+        "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+          { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+            "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+            "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+          },
+        ],
+        "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+        "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+        "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+        "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+        "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+        "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+        "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+        "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+        "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+        "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+        "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+        "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+        "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+      },
+    ],
+    "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+    },
+    "postKeyRevocationActionType": "A String", # PostKeyRevocationActionType of the instance.
+    "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+    "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+      "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+      "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+      "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+      "hostErrorTimeoutSeconds": 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+      "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+      "maintenanceFreezeDurationHours": 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won't be scheduled for maintenance.
+      "maintenanceInterval": "A String", # Specifies the frequency of planned maintenance events. The accepted values are: `PERIODIC`.
+      "maxRunDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the max run duration for the given instance. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the end of the run duration.
+        "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
+        "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
+      },
+      "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+      "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+        { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+          "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+          "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+          "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+      "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
+    },
+    "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+      { # A service account.
+        "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+        "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+      "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+      "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+    },
+    "shieldedVmConfig": { # A set of Shielded VM options. # Specifies the Shielded VM options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+      "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled.
+      "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled.
+      "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled.
+    },
+    "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+      "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+  "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+  "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+    "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+      { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+        "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    insert(project, region, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Creates an instance template in the specified project and region using the global instance template whose URL is included in the request.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+    "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+      "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+      "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+      "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+    },
+    "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+    "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+    "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+      { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+        "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+        "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+          "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+          "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+          "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+          "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+          "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+        },
+        "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+        "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+        "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+          { # Guest OS features.
+            "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+          },
+        ],
+        "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+        "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+          "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+          "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+          "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+          "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+          "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options. Guest OS features are applied by merging initializeParams.guestOsFeatures and disks.guestOsFeatures
+            { # Guest OS features.
+              "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+            },
+          ],
+          "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "multiWriter": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the disk can be read/write attached to more than one instance.
+          "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+          "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+          "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput mb per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 1 and 7,124.
+          "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+          "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+        },
+        "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+        "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+        "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "locked": True or False, # [Output Only] Whether to indicate the attached disk is locked. The locked disk is not allowed to be detached from the instance, or to be used as the source of the snapshot creation, and the image creation. The instance with at least one locked attached disk is not allow to be used as source of machine image creation, instant snapshot creation, and not allowed to be deleted with --keep-disk parameter set to true for locked disks.
+        "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+        "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+          "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+            "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+            "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+          },
+        },
+        "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+        "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+        "userLicenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of user provided licenses. It represents a list of URLs to the license resource. Unlike regular licenses, user provided licenses can be modified after the disk is created.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "displayDevice": { # A set of Display Device options # Display Device properties to enable support for remote display products like: Teradici, VNC and TeamViewer Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableDisplay": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Display enabled.
+    },
+    "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+      { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+        "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+        "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+      },
+    ],
+    "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+    "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+    "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+      "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+        { # Metadata
+          "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+          "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+        },
+      ],
+      "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+    },
+    "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+    "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+      { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+        "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+          { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+            "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+            "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+          },
+        ],
+        "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+        "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+        "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+        "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+        "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+        "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+        "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+        "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+        "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+        "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+        "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+        "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+        "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+      },
+    ],
+    "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+    },
+    "postKeyRevocationActionType": "A String", # PostKeyRevocationActionType of the instance.
+    "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+    "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+      "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+      "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+      "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+      "hostErrorTimeoutSeconds": 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+      "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+      "maintenanceFreezeDurationHours": 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won't be scheduled for maintenance.
+      "maintenanceInterval": "A String", # Specifies the frequency of planned maintenance events. The accepted values are: `PERIODIC`.
+      "maxRunDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the max run duration for the given instance. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the end of the run duration.
+        "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
+        "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
+      },
+      "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+      "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+        { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+          "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+          "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+          "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+      "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
+    },
+    "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+      { # A service account.
+        "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+        "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+      "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+      "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+    },
+    "shieldedVmConfig": { # A set of Shielded VM options. # Specifies the Shielded VM options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+      "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled.
+      "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled.
+      "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled.
+    },
+    "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+      "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+  "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+  "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+    "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+      { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+        "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys should match /[a-zA-Z0-9-_]/ and be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than {"instanceLimit": "100/request"}, should be returned as, {"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(project, region, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves a list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and region.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the regions for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A list of instance templates.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # A list of InstanceTemplate resources.
+    { # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+      "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+      "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+      "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+        "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+          "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+          "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+          "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+        },
+        "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+        "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+        },
+        "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+        "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+          { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+            "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+            "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+            "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+            "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+            "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+              "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+              "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+              "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+              "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+              "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+            },
+            "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+            "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+            "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+              { # Guest OS features.
+                "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+              },
+            ],
+            "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+            "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+              "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+              "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+              "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+              "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+              "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+              "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options. Guest OS features are applied by merging initializeParams.guestOsFeatures and disks.guestOsFeatures
+                { # Guest OS features.
+                  "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+                },
+              ],
+              "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "multiWriter": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the disk can be read/write attached to more than one instance.
+              "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+              "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+              "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput mb per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 1 and 7,124.
+              "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+              "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+                "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+              },
+              "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+              "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+                "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+              },
+            },
+            "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+            "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+            "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "locked": True or False, # [Output Only] Whether to indicate the attached disk is locked. The locked disk is not allowed to be detached from the instance, or to be used as the source of the snapshot creation, and the image creation. The instance with at least one locked attached disk is not allow to be used as source of machine image creation, instant snapshot creation, and not allowed to be deleted with --keep-disk parameter set to true for locked disks.
+            "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+            "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+              "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+                {
+                  "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                  "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                },
+              ],
+              "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+                {
+                  "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                  "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                },
+              ],
+              "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+                {
+                  "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                  "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                },
+              ],
+              "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+                "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+              },
+            },
+            "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+            "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+            "userLicenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of user provided licenses. It represents a list of URLs to the license resource. Unlike regular licenses, user provided licenses can be modified after the disk is created.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
+        "displayDevice": { # A set of Display Device options # Display Device properties to enable support for remote display products like: Teradici, VNC and TeamViewer Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "enableDisplay": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Display enabled.
+        },
+        "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+          { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+            "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+            "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+          },
+        ],
+        "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+        "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+        "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+        "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+          "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+          "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+            { # Metadata
+              "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+              "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+            },
+          ],
+          "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+        },
+        "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+        "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+          { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+            "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+              { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+              },
+            ],
+            "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+              { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+                "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+                "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+              },
+            ],
+            "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+            "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+            "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+              { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+              },
+            ],
+            "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+            "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+            "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+            "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+            "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+            "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+            "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+            "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+            "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+            "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+          },
+        ],
+        "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+        },
+        "postKeyRevocationActionType": "A String", # PostKeyRevocationActionType of the instance.
+        "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+        "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+          "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+          "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+        "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+        "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+          "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+          "hostErrorTimeoutSeconds": 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+          "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+          "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+          "maintenanceFreezeDurationHours": 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won't be scheduled for maintenance.
+          "maintenanceInterval": "A String", # Specifies the frequency of planned maintenance events. The accepted values are: `PERIODIC`.
+          "maxRunDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the max run duration for the given instance. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the end of the run duration.
+            "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
+            "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
+          },
+          "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+          "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+            { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+              "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+              "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+              "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+          ],
+          "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+          "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+          "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+          "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
+        },
+        "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+          { # A service account.
+            "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+            "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
+        "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+          "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+          "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+        },
+        "shieldedVmConfig": { # A set of Shielded VM options. # Specifies the Shielded VM options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+          "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled.
+          "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled.
+          "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled.
+        },
+        "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+          "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+          "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      },
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+      "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+      "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+        "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+          { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+            "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+            "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+            "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+            "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplateList", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplatesListResponse for instance template lists.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html
index 6f39834ac62..7b6e0fe3489 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html
@@ -226,6 +226,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -362,6 +374,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -486,6 +510,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -591,6 +627,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -807,6 +855,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -943,6 +1003,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -1067,6 +1139,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -1172,6 +1256,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1590,6 +1686,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "items": [ # A list of UrlMap resources.
     { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
       "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -1726,6 +1834,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
       "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
         { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+          "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
             "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
               "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -1850,6 +1970,18 @@ 
Method Details

           "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
           "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
             { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+              "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+                "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                  { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                    "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                    "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                  },
+                ],
+                "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+              },
               "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
                 "A String",
               ],
@@ -1955,6 +2087,18 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
           "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
             { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+              "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+                "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                  { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                    "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                    "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                  },
+                ],
+                "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+              },
               "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
               "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
                 "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2201,6 +2345,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -2337,6 +2493,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -2461,6 +2629,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -2566,6 +2746,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2901,6 +3093,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -3037,6 +3241,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -3161,6 +3377,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -3266,6 +3494,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3570,6 +3810,18 @@ 
Method Details

 {
   "resource": { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts. # Content of the UrlMap to be validated.
     "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+    "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+      "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+        { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+          "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+          "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+        },
+      ],
+      "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+    },
     "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
       "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
         "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -3706,6 +3958,18 @@ 
Method Details

     "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
     "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
       { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+        "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+          "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+            { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+              "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+              "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+            },
+          ],
+          "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+        },
         "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
           "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
             "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -3830,6 +4094,18 @@ 
Method Details

         "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
         "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
           { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+            "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+              "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                  "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                  "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                },
+              ],
+              "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+            },
             "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -3935,6 +4211,18 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
           { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+            "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+              "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                  "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                  "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                },
+              ],
+              "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+            },
             "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
             "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
               "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html
index 644b2d2f8be..b6025c88daa 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html
@@ -141,6 +141,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "urlMaps": [ # A list of UrlMaps contained in this scope.
         { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
           "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+          "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
               "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -277,6 +289,18 @@ 
Method Details

           "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
           "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
             { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+              "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+                "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                  { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                    "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                    "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                  },
+                ],
+                "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+              },
               "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
                 "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
                   "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -401,6 +425,18 @@ 
Method Details

               "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
               "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
                 { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+                  "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+                    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+                  },
                   "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
                     "A String",
                   ],
@@ -506,6 +542,18 @@ 
Method Details

               ],
               "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
                 { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+                  "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+                    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+                  },
                   "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
                   "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
                     "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -870,6 +918,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -1006,6 +1066,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -1130,6 +1202,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -1235,6 +1319,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1450,6 +1546,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -1586,6 +1694,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -1710,6 +1830,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -1815,6 +1947,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2231,6 +2375,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "items": [ # A list of UrlMap resources.
     { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
       "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -2367,6 +2523,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
       "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
         { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+          "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
             "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
               "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -2491,6 +2659,18 @@ 
Method Details

           "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
           "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
             { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+              "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+                "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                  { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                    "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                    "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                  },
+                ],
+                "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+              },
               "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
                 "A String",
               ],
@@ -2596,6 +2776,18 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
           "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
             { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+              "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+                "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                  { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                    "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                    "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                  },
+                ],
+                "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+              },
               "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
               "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
                 "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2841,6 +3033,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -2977,6 +3181,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -3101,6 +3317,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -3206,6 +3434,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3539,6 +3779,18 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts.
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+    "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+      { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+        "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+        "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+      },
+    ],
+    "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+  },
   "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
     "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
       "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -3675,6 +3927,18 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
     { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+      "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+        "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+          { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+            "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+            "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+          },
+        ],
+        "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+      },
       "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
         "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
           "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -3799,6 +4063,18 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
       "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
         { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
             "A String",
           ],
@@ -3904,6 +4180,18 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
         { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+          "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+            "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+              { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+              },
+            ],
+            "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+          },
           "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
           "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
             "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4210,6 +4498,18 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "resource": { # Represents a URL Map resource. Compute Engine has two URL Map resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/urlMaps) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionUrlMaps) A URL map resource is a component of certain types of cloud load balancers and Traffic Director: * urlMaps are used by external HTTP(S) load balancers and Traffic Director. * regionUrlMaps are used by internal HTTP(S) load balancers. For a list of supported URL map features by the load balancer type, see the Load balancing features: Routing and traffic management table. For a list of supported URL map features for Traffic Director, see the Traffic Director features: Routing and traffic management table. This resource defines mappings from hostnames and URL paths to either a backend service or a backend bucket. To use the global urlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of either EXTERNAL or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. To use the regionUrlMaps resource, the backend service must have a loadBalancingScheme of INTERNAL_MANAGED. For more information, read URL Map Concepts. # Content of the UrlMap to be validated.
     "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+    "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+      "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+        { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+          "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+          "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+        },
+      ],
+      "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+    },
     "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true.
       "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
         "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -4346,6 +4646,18 @@ 
Method Details

     "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
     "pathMatchers": [ # The list of named PathMatchers to use against the URL.
       { # A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.
+        "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+          "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+            { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+              "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+              "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+            },
+          ],
+          "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+        },
         "defaultRouteAction": { # defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction.
           "corsPolicy": { # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. # The specification for allowing client-side cross-origin requests. For more information about the W3C recommendation for cross-origin resource sharing (CORS), see Fetch API Living Standard. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy.
             "allowCredentials": True or False, # In response to a preflight request, setting this to true indicates that the actual request can include user credentials. This field translates to the Access-Control-Allow-Credentials header. Default is false.
@@ -4470,6 +4782,18 @@ 
Method Details

         "name": "A String", # The name to which this PathMatcher is referred by the HostRule.
         "pathRules": [ # The list of path rules. Use this list instead of routeRules when routing based on simple path matching is all that's required. The order by which path rules are specified does not matter. Matches are always done on the longest-path-first basis. For example: a pathRule with a path /a/b/c/* will match before /a/b/* irrespective of the order in which those paths appear in this list. Within a given pathMatcher, only one of pathRules or routeRules must be set.
           { # A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.
+            "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+              "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                  "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                  "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                },
+              ],
+              "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+            },
             "paths": [ # The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -4575,6 +4899,18 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "routeRules": [ # The list of HTTP route rules. Use this list instead of pathRules when advanced route matching and routing actions are desired. routeRules are evaluated in order of priority, from the lowest to highest number. Within a given pathMatcher, you can set only one of pathRules or routeRules.
           { # The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.
+            "customErrorResponsePolicy": { # Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error. # customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing.
+              "errorResponseRules": [ # Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.
+                { # Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.
+                  "matchResponseCodes": [ # Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "overrideResponseCode": 42, # The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.
+                  "path": "A String", # The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters
+                },
+              ],
+              "errorService": "A String", # The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.
+            },
             "description": "A String", # The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.
             "headerAction": { # The request and response header transformations that take effect before the request is passed along to the selected backendService. # Specifies changes to request and response headers that need to take effect for the selected backendService. The headerAction value specified here is applied before the matching pathMatchers[].headerAction and after pathMatchers[].routeRules[].routeAction.weightedBackendService.backendServiceWeightAction[].headerAction HeaderAction is not supported for load balancers that have their loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL. Not supported when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
               "requestHeadersToAdd": [ # Headers to add to a matching request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html
index ce9065aa1d3..51335f52166 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html
@@ -344,6 +344,11 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the regionInstanceGroups Resource.

 
+

+  regionInstanceTemplates()
+

+
Returns the regionInstanceTemplates Resource.

+
 

   regionInstances()
 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.imageFamilyViews.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.imageFamilyViews.html
index 7bbf9621a2b..ef5015667cf 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.imageFamilyViews.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.imageFamilyViews.html
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
     "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-    "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+    "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
     "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
       { # Guest OS features.
         "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.images.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.images.html
index 4288e2fbf0d..ea81120cf46 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.images.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.images.html
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Returns the specified image. Gets a list of available images by making a list() request.

 

   getFromFamily(project, family, x__xgafv=None)

-
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.

+
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.

 

   getIamPolicy(project, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.

@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -440,10 +440,10 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     getFromFamily(project, family, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.
+  
Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.
 
 Args:
-  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  project: string, The image project that the image belongs to. For example, to get a CentOS image, specify centos-cloud as the image project. (required)
   family: string, Name of the image family to search for. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -683,7 +683,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
       "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-      "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+      "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
       "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
         { # Guest OS features.
           "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
@@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Size of the image when restored onto a persistent disk (in GB).
-  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
+  "family": "A String", # The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.
   "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. To see a list of available options, see the guestOSfeatures[].type parameter.
     { # Guest OS features.
       "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html
index 874d85b3259..13eb16b8496 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html
@@ -74,6 +74,12 @@
 
 
Compute Engine API . instanceTemplates

 
Instance Methods

+

+  aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves the list of all InstanceTemplates resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.

+

+  aggregatedList_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -102,6 +108,324 @@ 
Instance Methods

   testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

 
Method Details

+

+    aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves the list of all InstanceTemplates resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Name of the project scoping this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`.
+  includeAllScopes: boolean, Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Contains a list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": { # A list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList resources.
+    "a_key": { # The name of the scope that contains this set of instance templates.
+      "instanceTemplates": [ # [Output Only] A list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and zone.
+        { # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+          "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+          "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+          "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+          "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+            "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+              "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+              "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+              "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+            },
+            "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+            "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+            },
+            "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+            "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+              { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+                "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+                "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+                "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+                "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+                "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+                  "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                  "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                  "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                  "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                  "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+                },
+                "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+                "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+                "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+                  { # Guest OS features.
+                    "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+                "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+                  "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+                  "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+                  "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+                  "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+                  "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+                  "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+                    "a_key": "A String",
+                  },
+                  "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+                  "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+                  "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+                    "a_key": "A String",
+                  },
+                  "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+                  "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+                    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                    "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                    "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                    "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+                  },
+                  "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+                  "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+                    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                    "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                    "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                    "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+                  },
+                },
+                "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+                "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+                "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+                "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+                  "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+                    {
+                      "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                      "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+                    {
+                      "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                      "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+                    {
+                      "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                      "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+                    "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                    "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                  },
+                },
+                "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+                "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+              },
+            ],
+            "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+              { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+                "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+                "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+              },
+            ],
+            "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+            "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+            "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+            "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+              "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+              "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+                { # Metadata
+                  "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+                  "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+                },
+              ],
+              "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+            },
+            "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+            "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+              { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+                "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+                  { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                    "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                    "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                    "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                    "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                    "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                    "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                    "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                    "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                    "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+                  { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+                    "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+                    "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+                "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+                "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+                  { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                    "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                    "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                    "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                    "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                    "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                    "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                    "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                    "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                    "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+                "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+                "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+                "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+                "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+                "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+                "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+                "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+                "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+                "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+              },
+            ],
+            "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+            },
+            "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+            "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+              "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+              "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+            "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+            "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+              "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+              "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+              "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+              "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+              "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+                { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+                  "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+                  "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+                  "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                },
+              ],
+              "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+              "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+              "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+            },
+            "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+              { # A service account.
+                "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+                "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+            ],
+            "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+              "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+              "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+              "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+            },
+            "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+              "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+              "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+          },
+          "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+          "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+          "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+          "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+            "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+              { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+                "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+                "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+                "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+                "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        },
+      ],
+      "warning": { # [Output Only] An informational warning that replaces the list of instance templates when the list is empty.
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+        "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+          {
+            "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+            "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplateAggregatedList", # Type of resource.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    aggregatedList_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
 

     close()
   
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -452,6 +776,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
   "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
   "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
@@ -815,6 +1140,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
   "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
   "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
@@ -1174,6 +1500,7 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
       },
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
       "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
       "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html
index 6f11f5395f1..ab4b0a24aba 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html
@@ -176,6 +176,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   setMinCpuPlatform(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Changes the minimum CPU platform that this instance should use. This method can only be called on a stopped instance. For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.

+

+  setName(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Sets name of an instance.

 

   setScheduling(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Sets an instance's scheduling options. You can only call this method on a stopped instance, that is, a VM instance that is in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. For more information about setting scheduling options for a VM, see Set VM host maintenance policy.

@@ -4225,6 +4228,109 @@ 
Method Details

 }

 

 
+

+    setName(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Sets name of an instance.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  instance: string, The instance name for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "currentName": "A String", # The current name of this resource, used to prevent conflicts. Provide the latest name when making a request to change name.
+  "name": "A String", # The name to be applied to the instance. Needs to be RFC 1035 compliant.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys should match /[a-zA-Z0-9-_]/ and be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than {"instanceLimit": "100/request"}, should be returned as, {"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
 

     setScheduling(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
   
Sets an instance's scheduling options. You can only call this method on a stopped instance, that is, a VM instance that is in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. For more information about setting scheduling options for a VM, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..90689ecdd38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1116 @@
+
+
+
+
Compute Engine API . regionInstanceTemplates

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  delete(project, region, instanceTemplate, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone.

+

+  get(project, region, instanceTemplate, x__xgafv=None)

+
Returns the specified instance template. Gets a list of available instance templates by making a list() request.

+

+  insert(project, region, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Creates an instance template in the specified project and region using the global instance template whose URL is included in the request.

+

+  list(project, region, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves a list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and region.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    delete(project, region, instanceTemplate, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  instanceTemplate: string, The name of the instance template to delete. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys should match /[a-zA-Z0-9-_]/ and be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than {"instanceLimit": "100/request"}, should be returned as, {"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
+

+    get(project, region, instanceTemplate, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Returns the specified instance template. Gets a list of available instance templates by making a list() request.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  instanceTemplate: string, The name of the instance template. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+    "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+      "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+      "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+      "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+    },
+    "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+    "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+    "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+      { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+        "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+        "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+          "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+          "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+          "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+          "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+          "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+        },
+        "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+        "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+        "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+          { # Guest OS features.
+            "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+          },
+        ],
+        "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+        "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+          "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+          "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+          "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+          "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+          "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+          "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+          "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+          "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+        },
+        "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+        "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+        "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+        "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+          "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+            "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+            "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+          },
+        },
+        "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+        "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+      },
+    ],
+    "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+      { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+        "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+        "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+      },
+    ],
+    "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+    "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+    "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+      "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+        { # Metadata
+          "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+          "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+        },
+      ],
+      "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+    },
+    "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+    "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+      { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+        "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+          { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+            "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+            "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+          },
+        ],
+        "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+        "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+        "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+        "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+        "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+        "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+        "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+        "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+        "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+        "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+        "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+        "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+        "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+      },
+    ],
+    "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+    },
+    "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+    "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+      "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+      "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+      "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+      "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+      "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+      "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+      "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+        { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+          "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+          "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+          "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+      "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+    },
+    "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+      { # A service account.
+        "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+        "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+      "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+      "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+    },
+    "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+      "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+  "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+  "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+    "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+      { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+        "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    insert(project, region, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Creates an instance template in the specified project and region using the global instance template whose URL is included in the request.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+    "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+      "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+      "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+      "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+    },
+    "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+    "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+    "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+      { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+        "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+        "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+          "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+          "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+          "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+          "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+          "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+        },
+        "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+        "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+        "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+          { # Guest OS features.
+            "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+          },
+        ],
+        "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+        "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+          "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+          "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+          "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+          "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+          "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+          "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+          "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+          "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+          "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+            "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+            "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+            "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+            "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+            "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+          },
+        },
+        "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+        "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+        "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+        "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+          "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+            {
+              "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+              "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+            },
+          ],
+          "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+            "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+            "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+          },
+        },
+        "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+        "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+      },
+    ],
+    "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+      { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+        "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+        "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+      },
+    ],
+    "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+    "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+    "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+      "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+        { # Metadata
+          "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+          "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+        },
+      ],
+      "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+    },
+    "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+    "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+      { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+        "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+          { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+            "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+            "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+          },
+        ],
+        "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+        "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+        "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+          { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+            "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+            "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+            "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+            "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+            "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+            "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+            "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+            "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+        "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+        "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+        "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+        "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+        "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+        "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+        "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+        "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+        "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+        "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+      },
+    ],
+    "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+    },
+    "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+    "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+      "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+      "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+      "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+      "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+      "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+      "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+      "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+        { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+          "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+          "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+          "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+      "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+    },
+    "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+      { # A service account.
+        "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+        "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+      "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+      "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+      "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+    },
+    "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+      "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+      "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  },
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+  "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+  "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+    "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+      { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+        "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+        "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+        "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+        "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys should match /[a-zA-Z0-9-_]/ and be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than {"instanceLimit": "100/request"}, should be returned as, {"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(project, region, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves a list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and region.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the regions for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A list of instance templates.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # A list of InstanceTemplate resources.
+    { # Represents an Instance Template resource. You can use instance templates to create VM instances and managed instance groups. For more information, read Instance Templates.
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] The creation timestamp for this instance template in RFC3339 text format.
+      "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] A unique identifier for this instance template. The server defines this identifier.
+      "kind": "compute#instanceTemplate", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplate for instance templates.
+      "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "properties": { # The instance properties for this instance template.
+        "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
+          "enableUefiNetworking": True or False, # Whether to enable UEFI networking for instance creation.
+          "threadsPerCore": 42, # The number of threads per physical core. To disable simultaneous multithreading (SMT) set this to 1. If unset, the maximum number of threads supported per core by the underlying processor is assumed.
+          "visibleCoreCount": 42, # The number of physical cores to expose to an instance. Multiply by the number of threads per core to compute the total number of virtual CPUs to expose to the instance. If unset, the number of cores is inferred from the instance's nominal CPU count and the underlying platform's SMT width.
+        },
+        "canIpForward": True or False, # Enables instances created based on these properties to send packets with source IP addresses other than their own and receive packets with destination IP addresses other than their own. If these instances will be used as an IP gateway or it will be set as the next-hop in a Route resource, specify true. If unsure, leave this set to false. See the Enable IP forwarding documentation for more information.
+        "confidentialInstanceConfig": { # A set of Confidential Instance options. # Specifies the Confidential Instance options. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Defines whether the instance should have confidential compute enabled.
+        },
+        "description": "A String", # An optional text description for the instances that are created from these properties.
+        "disks": [ # An array of disks that are associated with the instances that are created from these properties.
+          { # An instance-attached disk resource.
+            "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+            "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+            "boot": True or False, # Indicates that this is a boot disk. The virtual machine will use the first partition of the disk for its root filesystem.
+            "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies a unique device name of your choice that is reflected into the /dev/disk/by-id/google-* tree of a Linux operating system running within the instance. This name can be used to reference the device for mounting, resizing, and so on, from within the instance. If not specified, the server chooses a default device name to apply to this disk, in the form persistent-disk-x, where x is a number assigned by Google Compute Engine. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+            "diskEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts or decrypts a disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. If you are creating a new disk, this field encrypts the new disk using an encryption key that you provide. If you are attaching an existing disk that is already encrypted, this field decrypts the disk using the customer-supplied encryption key. If you encrypt a disk using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key again when you attempt to use this resource at a later time. For example, you must provide the key when you create a snapshot or an image from the disk or when you attach the disk to a virtual machine instance. If you do not provide an encryption key, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later. Instance templates do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot use your own keys to encrypt disks in a managed instance group.
+              "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+              "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+              "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+              "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+              "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+            },
+            "diskSizeGb": "A String", # The size of the disk in GB.
+            "forceAttach": True or False, # [Input Only] Whether to force attach the regional disk even if it's currently attached to another instance. If you try to force attach a zonal disk to an instance, you will receive an error.
+            "guestOsFeatures": [ # A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+              { # Guest OS features.
+                "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+              },
+            ],
+            "index": 42, # [Output Only] A zero-based index to this disk, where 0 is reserved for the boot disk. If you have many disks attached to an instance, each disk would have a unique index number.
+            "initializeParams": { # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This field is persisted and returned for instanceTemplate and not returned in the context of instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both. # [Input Only] Specifies the parameters for a new disk that will be created alongside the new instance. Use initialization parameters to create boot disks or local SSDs attached to the new instance. This property is mutually exclusive with the source property; you can only define one or the other, but not both.
+              "architecture": "A String", # The architecture of the attached disk. Valid values are arm64 or x86_64.
+              "description": "A String", # An optional description. Provide this property when creating the disk.
+              "diskName": "A String", # Specifies the disk name. If not specified, the default is to use the name of the instance. If a disk with the same name already exists in the given region, the existing disk is attached to the new instance and the new disk is not created.
+              "diskSizeGb": "A String", # Specifies the size of the disk in base-2 GB. The size must be at least 10 GB. If you specify a sourceImage, which is required for boot disks, the default size is the size of the sourceImage. If you do not specify a sourceImage, the default disk size is 500 GB.
+              "diskType": "A String", # Specifies the disk type to use to create the instance. If not specified, the default is pd-standard, specified using the full URL. For example: https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/pd-standard For a full list of acceptable values, see Persistent disk types. If you specify this field when creating a VM, you can provide either the full or partial URL. For example, the following values are valid: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /diskTypes/diskType - projects/project/zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType - zones/zone/diskTypes/diskType If you specify this field when creating or updating an instance template or all-instances configuration, specify the type of the disk, not the URL. For example: pd-standard.
+              "labels": { # Labels to apply to this disk. These can be later modified by the disks.setLabels method. This field is only applicable for persistent disks.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "licenses": [ # A list of publicly visible licenses. Reserved for Google's use.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "onUpdateAction": "A String", # Specifies which action to take on instance update with this disk. Default is to use the existing disk.
+              "provisionedIops": "A String", # Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. Values must be between 10,000 and 120,000. For more details, see the Extreme persistent disk documentation.
+              "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the disk. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies applied to this disk for automatic snapshot creations. Specified using the full or partial URL. For instance template, specify only the resource policy name.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "sourceImage": "A String", # The source image to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with one of the public operating system images, specify the image by its family name. For example, specify family/debian-9 to use the latest Debian 9 image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/family/debian-9 Alternatively, use a specific version of a public operating system image: projects/debian-cloud/global/images/debian-9-stretch-vYYYYMMDD To create a disk with a custom image that you created, specify the image name in the following format: global/images/my-custom-image You can also specify a custom image by its image family, which returns the latest version of the image in that family. Replace the image name with family/family-name: global/images/family/my-image-family If the source image is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+              "sourceImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source image. Required if the source image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. InstanceTemplate and InstancePropertiesPatch do not store customer-supplied encryption keys, so you cannot create disks for instances in a managed instance group if the source images are encrypted with your own keys.
+                "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+              },
+              "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot to create this disk. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or initializeParams.sourceImage or disks.source is required except for local SSD. To create a disk with a snapshot that you created, specify the snapshot name in the following format: global/snapshots/my-backup If the source snapshot is deleted later, this field will not be set.
+              "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot.
+                "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key
+                "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+                "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+                "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+                "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+              },
+            },
+            "interface": "A String", # Specifies the disk interface to use for attaching this disk, which is either SCSI or NVME. For most machine types, the default is SCSI. Local SSDs can use either NVME or SCSI. In certain configurations, persistent disks can use NVMe. For more information, see About persistent disks.
+            "kind": "compute#attachedDisk", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#attachedDisk for attached disks.
+            "licenses": [ # [Output Only] Any valid publicly visible licenses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "mode": "A String", # The mode in which to attach this disk, either READ_WRITE or READ_ONLY. If not specified, the default is to attach the disk in READ_WRITE mode.
+            "shieldedInstanceInitialState": { # Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public # [Output Only] shielded vm initial state stored on disk
+              "dbs": [ # The Key Database (db).
+                {
+                  "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                  "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                },
+              ],
+              "dbxs": [ # The forbidden key database (dbx).
+                {
+                  "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                  "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                },
+              ],
+              "keks": [ # The Key Exchange Key (KEK).
+                {
+                  "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                  "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+                },
+              ],
+              "pk": { # The Platform Key (PK).
+                "content": "A String", # The raw content in the secure keys file.
+                "fileType": "A String", # The file type of source file.
+              },
+            },
+            "source": "A String", # Specifies a valid partial or full URL to an existing Persistent Disk resource. When creating a new instance, one of initializeParams.sourceImage or initializeParams.sourceSnapshot or disks.source is required except for local SSD. If desired, you can also attach existing non-root persistent disks using this property. This field is only applicable for persistent disks. Note that for InstanceTemplate, specify the disk name for zonal disk, and the URL for regional disk.
+            "type": "A String", # Specifies the type of the disk, either SCRATCH or PERSISTENT. If not specified, the default is PERSISTENT.
+          },
+        ],
+        "guestAccelerators": [ # A list of guest accelerator cards' type and count to use for instances created from these properties.
+          { # A specification of the type and number of accelerator cards attached to the instance.
+            "acceleratorCount": 42, # The number of the guest accelerator cards exposed to this instance.
+            "acceleratorType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the accelerator type resource to attach to this instance. For example: projects/my-project/zones/us-central1-c/acceleratorTypes/nvidia-tesla-p100 If you are creating an instance template, specify only the accelerator name. See GPUs on Compute Engine for a full list of accelerator types.
+          },
+        ],
+        "keyRevocationActionType": "A String", # KeyRevocationActionType of the instance. Supported options are "STOP" and "NONE". The default value is "NONE" if it is not specified.
+        "labels": { # Labels to apply to instances that are created from these properties.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+        "machineType": "A String", # The machine type to use for instances that are created from these properties.
+        "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs to assign to instances that are created from these properties. These pairs can consist of custom metadata or predefined keys. See Project and instance metadata for more information.
+          "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
+          "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
+            { # Metadata
+              "key": "A String", # Key for the metadata entry. Keys must conform to the following regexp: [a-zA-Z0-9-_]+, and be less than 128 bytes in length. This is reflected as part of a URL in the metadata server. Additionally, to avoid ambiguity, keys must not conflict with any other metadata keys for the project.
+              "value": "A String", # Value for the metadata entry. These are free-form strings, and only have meaning as interpreted by the image running in the instance. The only restriction placed on values is that their size must be less than or equal to 262144 bytes (256 KiB).
+            },
+          ],
+          "kind": "compute#metadata", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#metadata for metadata.
+        },
+        "minCpuPlatform": "A String", # Minimum cpu/platform to be used by instances. The instance may be scheduled on the specified or newer cpu/platform. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: "Intel Haswell" or minCpuPlatform: "Intel Sandy Bridge". For more information, read Specifying a Minimum CPU Platform.
+        "networkInterfaces": [ # An array of network access configurations for this interface.
+          { # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+            "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+              { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+              },
+            ],
+            "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+              { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+                "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+                "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+              },
+            ],
+            "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+            "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+            "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+              { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+                "externalIpv6": "A String", # The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+                "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+                "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+                "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. The default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access.
+                "natIP": "A String", # An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+                "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+                "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be createc for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+                "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+                "type": "ONE_TO_ONE_NAT", # The type of configuration. The default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT.
+              },
+            ],
+            "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+            "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, GCP will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+            "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+            "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+            "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+            "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+            "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+            "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+            "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+            "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface to identify whether the IPv6 feature is enabled or not. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY will be used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+            "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+          },
+        ],
+        "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String",
+        },
+        "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # The private IPv6 google access type for VMs. If not specified, use INHERIT_FROM_SUBNETWORK as default. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+        "reservationAffinity": { # Specifies the reservations that this instance can consume from. # Specifies the reservations that instances can consume from. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "consumeReservationType": "A String", # Specifies the type of reservation from which this instance can consume resources: ANY_RESERVATION (default), SPECIFIC_RESERVATION, or NO_RESERVATION. See Consuming reserved instances for examples.
+          "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of a reservation resource. To target a SPECIFIC_RESERVATION by name, specify googleapis.com/reservation-name as the key and specify the name of your reservation as its value.
+          "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of a reservation resource. This can be either a name to a reservation in the same project or "projects/different-project/reservations/some-reservation-name" to target a shared reservation in the same zone but in a different project.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+        "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+        "resourcePolicies": [ # Resource policies (names, not URLs) applied to instances created from these properties. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
+          "automaticRestart": True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
+          "instanceTerminationAction": "A String", # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
+          "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
+          "minNodeCpus": 42, # The minimum number of virtual CPUs this instance will consume when running on a sole-tenant node.
+          "nodeAffinities": [ # A set of node affinity and anti-affinity configurations. Refer to Configuring node affinity for more information. Overrides reservationAffinity.
+            { # Node Affinity: the configuration of desired nodes onto which this Instance could be scheduled.
+              "key": "A String", # Corresponds to the label key of Node resource.
+              "operator": "A String", # Defines the operation of node selection. Valid operators are IN for affinity and NOT_IN for anti-affinity.
+              "values": [ # Corresponds to the label values of Node resource.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+          ],
+          "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Set VM host maintenance policy.
+          "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+          "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+        },
+        "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
+          { # A service account.
+            "email": "A String", # Email address of the service account.
+            "scopes": [ # The list of scopes to be made available for this service account.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
+        "shieldedInstanceConfig": { # A set of Shielded Instance options. # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
+          "enableIntegrityMonitoring": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has integrity monitoring enabled. Enabled by default.
+          "enableSecureBoot": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has Secure Boot enabled. Disabled by default.
+          "enableVtpm": True or False, # Defines whether the instance has the vTPM enabled. Enabled by default.
+        },
+        "tags": { # A set of instance tags. # A list of tags to apply to the instances that are created from these properties. The tags identify valid sources or targets for network firewalls. The setTags method can modify this list of tags. Each tag within the list must comply with RFC1035.
+          "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the tags' contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update tags. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change tags. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the instance.
+          "items": [ # An array of tags. Each tag must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      },
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.
+      "sourceInstance": "A String", # The source instance used to create the template. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instances/instance - projects/project/zones/zone/instances/instance
+      "sourceInstanceParams": { # A specification of the parameters to use when creating the instance template from a source instance. # The source instance params to use to create this instance template.
+        "diskConfigs": [ # Attached disks configuration. If not provided, defaults are applied: For boot disk and any other R/W disks, the source images for each disk will be used. For read-only disks, they will be attached in read-only mode. Local SSD disks will be created as blank volumes.
+          { # A specification of the desired way to instantiate a disk in the instance template when its created from a source instance.
+            "autoDelete": True or False, # Specifies whether the disk will be auto-deleted when the instance is deleted (but not when the disk is detached from the instance).
+            "customImage": "A String", # The custom source image to be used to restore this disk when instantiating this instance template.
+            "deviceName": "A String", # Specifies the device name of the disk to which the configurations apply to.
+            "instantiateFrom": "A String", # Specifies whether to include the disk and what image to use. Possible values are: - source-image: to use the same image that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - source-image-family: to use the same image family that was used to create the source instance's corresponding disk. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - custom-image: to use a user-provided image url for disk creation. Applicable to the boot disk and additional read-write disks. - attach-read-only: to attach a read-only disk. Applicable to read-only disks. - do-not-include: to exclude a disk from the template. Applicable to additional read-write disks, local SSDs, and read-only disks.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#instanceTemplateList", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceTemplatesListResponse for instance template lists.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
index 50298c2db67..3f8e30024bd 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
@@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-        { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+        { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
           "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
           "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
           "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "A String",
           ],
           "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-            { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+            { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
               "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
               "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
               "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "A String",
     ],
     "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-      { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+      { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
         "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
         "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
         "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "A String",
         ],
         "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-          { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+          { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
             "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
             "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
             "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -2165,7 +2165,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "A String",
         ],
         "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-          { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+          { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
             "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
             "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
             "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -2313,7 +2313,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "A String",
             ],
             "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-              { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+              { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
                 "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
                 "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
                 "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html
index 01d644e8b5c..89ee4d8e49d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html
@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-        { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+        { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
           "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
           "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
           "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "A String",
     ],
     "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-      { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+      { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
         "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
         "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
         "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -821,7 +821,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "A String",
         ],
         "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-          { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+          { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
             "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
             "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
             "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -1311,7 +1311,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "taints": { # Collection of Kubernetes [node taints](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration). # The desired node taints to be applied to all nodes in the node pool. If this field is not present, the taints will not be changed. Otherwise, the existing node taints will be *replaced* with the provided taints.
     "taints": [ # List of node taints.
-      { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+      { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
         "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
         "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
         "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
index 438db0a87d2..e6a6c7786ad 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
@@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-        { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+        { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
           "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
           "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
           "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "A String",
           ],
           "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-            { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+            { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
               "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
               "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
               "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -1547,7 +1547,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "A String",
     ],
     "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-      { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+      { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
         "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
         "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
         "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -1695,7 +1695,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "A String",
         ],
         "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-          { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+          { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
             "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
             "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
             "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -2323,7 +2323,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "A String",
         ],
         "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-          { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+          { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
             "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
             "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
             "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -2471,7 +2471,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "A String",
             ],
             "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-              { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+              { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
                 "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
                 "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
                 "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html
index 39abe7d9e97..6a6cd3d1ce6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-        { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+        { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
           "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
           "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
           "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "A String",
     ],
     "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-      { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+      { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
         "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
         "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
         "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "A String",
         ],
         "taints": [ # List of kubernetes taints to be applied to each node. For more information, including usage and the valid values, see: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration/
-          { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+          { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
             "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
             "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
             "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
@@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "taints": { # Collection of Kubernetes [node taints](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration). # The desired node taints to be applied to all nodes in the node pool. If this field is not present, the taints will not be changed. Otherwise, the existing node taints will be *replaced* with the provided taints.
     "taints": [ # List of node taints.
-      { # Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
+      { # Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.
         "effect": "A String", # Effect for taint.
         "key": "A String", # Key for taint.
         "value": "A String", # Value for taint.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html
index 9c03f989782..ef38346581c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html
@@ -248,9 +248,12 @@ 
Method Details

             "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
           },
           "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-          "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+          "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
           "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
         },
+        "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+          "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+        },
         "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
         "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
           "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
@@ -364,9 +367,12 @@ 
Method Details

             "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
           },
           "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-          "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+          "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
           "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
         },
+        "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+          "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+        },
         "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
         "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
           "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
@@ -500,9 +506,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
     },
     "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
     "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
   },
+  "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+    "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+  },
   "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
   "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
     "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
@@ -594,9 +603,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
     },
     "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
     "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
   },
+  "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+    "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+  },
   "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
   "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
     "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
@@ -686,9 +698,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
     },
     "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
     "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
   },
+  "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+    "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+  },
   "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
   "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
     "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
@@ -836,9 +851,12 @@ 
Method Details

           "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
         },
         "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-        "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+        "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
         "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
       },
+      "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+        "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+      },
       "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
       "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
         "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
@@ -1025,9 +1043,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
     },
     "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
     "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
   },
+  "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+    "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+  },
   "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
   "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
     "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
@@ -1117,9 +1138,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "url": "A String", # Customer service URL.
     },
     "koreanBusinessRegistrationNumber": "A String", # The 10-digit [Korean business registration number](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9037766) separated with dashes in the format: XXX-XX-XXXXX. This field will only be updated if explicitly set.
-    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
+    "phoneNumber": "A String", # The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.
     "phoneVerificationStatus": "A String", # Verification status of the phone number of the business. This status is read only and can be updated only by successful phone verification. Acceptable values are: - "`verified`" - "`unverified`"
   },
+  "conversionSettings": { # Settings for conversion tracking. # Settings for conversion tracking.
+    "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": True or False, # When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).
+  },
   "cssId": "A String", # ID of CSS the account belongs to.
   "googleMyBusinessLink": { # The Business Profile which is linked or in the process of being linked with the Merchant Center account.
     "gmbAccountId": "A String", # The ID of the Business Profile. If this is provided, then `gmbEmail` is ignored. The value of this field should match the `accountId` used by the Business Profile API.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.conversionsources.html b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.conversionsources.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..31ecb16da69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.conversionsources.html
@@ -0,0 +1,442 @@
+
+
+
+
Content API for Shopping . conversionsources

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(merchantId, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Creates a new conversion source.

+

+  delete(merchantId, conversionSourceId, x__xgafv=None)

+
Archives an existing conversion source. It will be recoverable for 30 days. This archiving behavior is not typical in the Content API and unique to this service.

+

+  get(merchantId, conversionSourceId, x__xgafv=None)

+
Fetches a conversion source.

+

+  list(merchantId, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, showDeleted=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves the list of conversion sources the caller has access to.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(merchantId, conversionSourceId, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Updates information of an existing conversion source.

+

+  undelete(merchantId, conversionSourceId, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Re-enables an archived conversion source.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(merchantId, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Creates a new conversion source.
+
+Args:
+  merchantId: string, Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a conversion source owned by a Merchant account. A merchant account can have up to 200 conversion sources.
+  "conversionSourceId": "A String", # Output only. Generated by the Content API upon creation of a new `ConversionSource`. Format: [a-z]{4}:.+ The four characters before the colon represent the type of conversio source. Content after the colon represents the ID of the conversion source within that type. The ID of two different conversion sources might be the same across different types. The following type prefixes are supported: - galk: For GoogleAnalyticsLink sources. - mcdn: For MerchantCenterDestination sources.
+  "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when an archived conversion source becomes permanently deleted and is no longer available to undelete.
+  "googleAnalyticsLink": { # "Google Analytics Link" sources can be used to get conversion data from an existing Google Analytics property into the linked Merchant Center account. # Immutable. Conversion Source of type "Link to Google Analytics Property".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Output only. Attribution settings for the linked Google Analytics property.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "propertyId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. ID of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+    "propertyName": "A String", # Output only. Name of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+  },
+  "merchantCenterDestination": { # "Merchant Center Destination" sources can be used to send conversion events from a website using a Google tag directly to a Merchant Center account where the source is created. # Conversion Source of type "Merchant Center Tag Destination".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Required. Attribution settings being used for the Merchant Center Destination.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Three-letter currency code (ISO 4217). The currency code defines in which currency the conversions sent to this destination will be reported in Merchant Center.
+    "destinationId": "A String", # Output only. Merchant Center Destination ID.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. Merchant-specified display name for the destination. This is the name that identifies the conversion source within the Merchant Center UI. Limited to 64 characters.
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of this conversion source. Can't be edited through the API.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a conversion source owned by a Merchant account. A merchant account can have up to 200 conversion sources.
+  "conversionSourceId": "A String", # Output only. Generated by the Content API upon creation of a new `ConversionSource`. Format: [a-z]{4}:.+ The four characters before the colon represent the type of conversio source. Content after the colon represents the ID of the conversion source within that type. The ID of two different conversion sources might be the same across different types. The following type prefixes are supported: - galk: For GoogleAnalyticsLink sources. - mcdn: For MerchantCenterDestination sources.
+  "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when an archived conversion source becomes permanently deleted and is no longer available to undelete.
+  "googleAnalyticsLink": { # "Google Analytics Link" sources can be used to get conversion data from an existing Google Analytics property into the linked Merchant Center account. # Immutable. Conversion Source of type "Link to Google Analytics Property".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Output only. Attribution settings for the linked Google Analytics property.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "propertyId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. ID of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+    "propertyName": "A String", # Output only. Name of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+  },
+  "merchantCenterDestination": { # "Merchant Center Destination" sources can be used to send conversion events from a website using a Google tag directly to a Merchant Center account where the source is created. # Conversion Source of type "Merchant Center Tag Destination".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Required. Attribution settings being used for the Merchant Center Destination.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Three-letter currency code (ISO 4217). The currency code defines in which currency the conversions sent to this destination will be reported in Merchant Center.
+    "destinationId": "A String", # Output only. Merchant Center Destination ID.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. Merchant-specified display name for the destination. This is the name that identifies the conversion source within the Merchant Center UI. Limited to 64 characters.
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of this conversion source. Can't be edited through the API.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(merchantId, conversionSourceId, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Archives an existing conversion source. It will be recoverable for 30 days. This archiving behavior is not typical in the Content API and unique to this service.
+
+Args:
+  merchantId: string, Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source. (required)
+  conversionSourceId: string, Required. The ID of the conversion source to be deleted. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+

+

+
+

+    get(merchantId, conversionSourceId, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Fetches a conversion source.
+
+Args:
+  merchantId: string, Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source. (required)
+  conversionSourceId: string, Required. The REST ID of the collection. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a conversion source owned by a Merchant account. A merchant account can have up to 200 conversion sources.
+  "conversionSourceId": "A String", # Output only. Generated by the Content API upon creation of a new `ConversionSource`. Format: [a-z]{4}:.+ The four characters before the colon represent the type of conversio source. Content after the colon represents the ID of the conversion source within that type. The ID of two different conversion sources might be the same across different types. The following type prefixes are supported: - galk: For GoogleAnalyticsLink sources. - mcdn: For MerchantCenterDestination sources.
+  "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when an archived conversion source becomes permanently deleted and is no longer available to undelete.
+  "googleAnalyticsLink": { # "Google Analytics Link" sources can be used to get conversion data from an existing Google Analytics property into the linked Merchant Center account. # Immutable. Conversion Source of type "Link to Google Analytics Property".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Output only. Attribution settings for the linked Google Analytics property.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "propertyId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. ID of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+    "propertyName": "A String", # Output only. Name of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+  },
+  "merchantCenterDestination": { # "Merchant Center Destination" sources can be used to send conversion events from a website using a Google tag directly to a Merchant Center account where the source is created. # Conversion Source of type "Merchant Center Tag Destination".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Required. Attribution settings being used for the Merchant Center Destination.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Three-letter currency code (ISO 4217). The currency code defines in which currency the conversions sent to this destination will be reported in Merchant Center.
+    "destinationId": "A String", # Output only. Merchant Center Destination ID.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. Merchant-specified display name for the destination. This is the name that identifies the conversion source within the Merchant Center UI. Limited to 64 characters.
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of this conversion source. Can't be edited through the API.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(merchantId, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, showDeleted=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves the list of conversion sources the caller has access to.
+
+Args:
+  merchantId: string, Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of conversion sources to return in a page. If no `page_size` is specified, `100` is used as the default value. The maximum value is `200`. Values above `200` will be coerced to `200`. Regardless of pagination, at most `200` conversion sources are returned in total.
+  pageToken: string, Page token.
+  showDeleted: boolean, If true, also returns archived conversion sources.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the ListConversionSources method.
+  "conversionSources": [ # List of conversion sources.
+    { # Represents a conversion source owned by a Merchant account. A merchant account can have up to 200 conversion sources.
+      "conversionSourceId": "A String", # Output only. Generated by the Content API upon creation of a new `ConversionSource`. Format: [a-z]{4}:.+ The four characters before the colon represent the type of conversio source. Content after the colon represents the ID of the conversion source within that type. The ID of two different conversion sources might be the same across different types. The following type prefixes are supported: - galk: For GoogleAnalyticsLink sources. - mcdn: For MerchantCenterDestination sources.
+      "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when an archived conversion source becomes permanently deleted and is no longer available to undelete.
+      "googleAnalyticsLink": { # "Google Analytics Link" sources can be used to get conversion data from an existing Google Analytics property into the linked Merchant Center account. # Immutable. Conversion Source of type "Link to Google Analytics Property".
+        "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Output only. Attribution settings for the linked Google Analytics property.
+          "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+          "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+          "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+            { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+              "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+              "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+        "propertyId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. ID of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+        "propertyName": "A String", # Output only. Name of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+      },
+      "merchantCenterDestination": { # "Merchant Center Destination" sources can be used to send conversion events from a website using a Google tag directly to a Merchant Center account where the source is created. # Conversion Source of type "Merchant Center Tag Destination".
+        "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Required. Attribution settings being used for the Merchant Center Destination.
+          "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+          "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+          "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+            { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+              "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+              "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+        "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Three-letter currency code (ISO 4217). The currency code defines in which currency the conversions sent to this destination will be reported in Merchant Center.
+        "destinationId": "A String", # Output only. Merchant Center Destination ID.
+        "displayName": "A String", # Required. Merchant-specified display name for the destination. This is the name that identifies the conversion source within the Merchant Center UI. Limited to 64 characters.
+      },
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of this conversion source. Can't be edited through the API.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Token to be used to fetch the next results page.
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(merchantId, conversionSourceId, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Updates information of an existing conversion source.
+
+Args:
+  merchantId: string, Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source. (required)
+  conversionSourceId: string, Required. The ID of the conversion source to be updated. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a conversion source owned by a Merchant account. A merchant account can have up to 200 conversion sources.
+  "conversionSourceId": "A String", # Output only. Generated by the Content API upon creation of a new `ConversionSource`. Format: [a-z]{4}:.+ The four characters before the colon represent the type of conversio source. Content after the colon represents the ID of the conversion source within that type. The ID of two different conversion sources might be the same across different types. The following type prefixes are supported: - galk: For GoogleAnalyticsLink sources. - mcdn: For MerchantCenterDestination sources.
+  "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when an archived conversion source becomes permanently deleted and is no longer available to undelete.
+  "googleAnalyticsLink": { # "Google Analytics Link" sources can be used to get conversion data from an existing Google Analytics property into the linked Merchant Center account. # Immutable. Conversion Source of type "Link to Google Analytics Property".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Output only. Attribution settings for the linked Google Analytics property.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "propertyId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. ID of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+    "propertyName": "A String", # Output only. Name of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+  },
+  "merchantCenterDestination": { # "Merchant Center Destination" sources can be used to send conversion events from a website using a Google tag directly to a Merchant Center account where the source is created. # Conversion Source of type "Merchant Center Tag Destination".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Required. Attribution settings being used for the Merchant Center Destination.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Three-letter currency code (ISO 4217). The currency code defines in which currency the conversions sent to this destination will be reported in Merchant Center.
+    "destinationId": "A String", # Output only. Merchant Center Destination ID.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. Merchant-specified display name for the destination. This is the name that identifies the conversion source within the Merchant Center UI. Limited to 64 characters.
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of this conversion source. Can't be edited through the API.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. List of fields being updated.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a conversion source owned by a Merchant account. A merchant account can have up to 200 conversion sources.
+  "conversionSourceId": "A String", # Output only. Generated by the Content API upon creation of a new `ConversionSource`. Format: [a-z]{4}:.+ The four characters before the colon represent the type of conversio source. Content after the colon represents the ID of the conversion source within that type. The ID of two different conversion sources might be the same across different types. The following type prefixes are supported: - galk: For GoogleAnalyticsLink sources. - mcdn: For MerchantCenterDestination sources.
+  "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when an archived conversion source becomes permanently deleted and is no longer available to undelete.
+  "googleAnalyticsLink": { # "Google Analytics Link" sources can be used to get conversion data from an existing Google Analytics property into the linked Merchant Center account. # Immutable. Conversion Source of type "Link to Google Analytics Property".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Output only. Attribution settings for the linked Google Analytics property.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "propertyId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. ID of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+    "propertyName": "A String", # Output only. Name of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.
+  },
+  "merchantCenterDestination": { # "Merchant Center Destination" sources can be used to send conversion events from a website using a Google tag directly to a Merchant Center account where the source is created. # Conversion Source of type "Merchant Center Tag Destination".
+    "attributionSettings": { # Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data. # Required. Attribution settings being used for the Merchant Center Destination.
+      "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": 42, # Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.
+      "attributionModel": "A String", # Required. Attribution model.
+      "conversionType": [ # Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard "purchase" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.
+        { # Message representing a types of conversion events
+          "includeInReporting": True or False, # Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+    "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Three-letter currency code (ISO 4217). The currency code defines in which currency the conversions sent to this destination will be reported in Merchant Center.
+    "destinationId": "A String", # Output only. Merchant Center Destination ID.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. Merchant-specified display name for the destination. This is the name that identifies the conversion source within the Merchant Center UI. Limited to 64 characters.
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of this conversion source. Can't be edited through the API.
+}

+

+
+

+    undelete(merchantId, conversionSourceId, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Re-enables an archived conversion source.
+
+Args:
+  merchantId: string, Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source. (required)
+  conversionSourceId: string, Required. The ID of the conversion source to be undeleted. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for the UndeleteConversionSource method.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.html b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.html
index 7cc5d3ff25b..50287554ede 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.html
@@ -104,6 +104,11 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the collectionstatuses Resource.

 
+

+  conversionsources()
+

+
Returns the conversionsources Resource.

+
 

   csses()
 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.products.html b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.products.html
index 37e0e90f281..9c3fd618199 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.products.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.products.html
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
         "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
         "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-        "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+        "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
         "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
         "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
         "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
         "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
         "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-        "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+        "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
         "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
         "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
         "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
@@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
   "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
   "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
   "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
   "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
   "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
@@ -891,7 +891,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
   "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
   "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
   "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
   "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
   "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
@@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
   "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
   "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
   "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
   "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
   "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
@@ -1349,7 +1349,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
       "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
       "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-      "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+      "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
       "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
       "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
       "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
@@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
   "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
   "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
   "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
   "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
   "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
@@ -1813,7 +1813,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
   "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
   "gtin": "A String", # Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) of the item.
-  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.
+  "id": "A String", # The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.
   "identifierExists": True or False, # False when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Required according to the Unique Product Identifier Rules for all target countries except for Canada.
   "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
   "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html b/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html
index c92d29106a7..526abbc7b96 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html
@@ -259,7 +259,41 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
         "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-          "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
+          "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
+            "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
+              "values": [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for 'exclude_from_indexes'.
+                # Object with schema name: Value
+              ],
+            },
+            "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
+            "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
+            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
+            "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+              "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+              "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+            },
+            "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value.
+            "keyValue": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
+              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
+                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "meaning": 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
+            "nullValue": "A String", # A null value.
+            "stringValue": "A String", # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
+            "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
+          },
         },
       },
       "update": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # The entity to update. The entity must already exist. Must have a complete key path.
@@ -278,7 +312,41 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
         "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-          "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
+          "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
+            "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
+              "values": [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for 'exclude_from_indexes'.
+                # Object with schema name: Value
+              ],
+            },
+            "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
+            "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
+            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
+            "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+              "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+              "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+            },
+            "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value.
+            "keyValue": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
+              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
+                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "meaning": 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
+            "nullValue": "A String", # A null value.
+            "stringValue": "A String", # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
+            "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
+          },
         },
       },
       "updateTime": "A String", # The update time of the entity that this mutation is being applied to. If this does not match the current update time on the server, the mutation conflicts.
@@ -298,7 +366,41 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
         "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-          "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
+          "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
+            "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
+              "values": [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for 'exclude_from_indexes'.
+                # Object with schema name: Value
+              ],
+            },
+            "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
+            "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
+            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
+            "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+              "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+              "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+            },
+            "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value.
+            "keyValue": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
+              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
+                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "meaning": 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
+            "nullValue": "A String", # A null value.
+            "stringValue": "A String", # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
+            "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
+          },
         },
       },
     },
@@ -543,7 +645,41 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
         "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-          "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
+          "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
+            "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
+              "values": [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for 'exclude_from_indexes'.
+                # Object with schema name: Value
+              ],
+            },
+            "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
+            "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
+            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
+            "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+              "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+              "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+            },
+            "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value.
+            "keyValue": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
+              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
+                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "meaning": 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
+            "nullValue": "A String", # A null value.
+            "stringValue": "A String", # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
+            "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
+          },
         },
       },
       "updateTime": "A String", # The time at which the entity was last changed. This field is set for `FULL` entity results. If this entity is missing, this field will not be set.
@@ -570,7 +706,41 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
         "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-          "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
+          "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
+            "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
+              "values": [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for 'exclude_from_indexes'.
+                # Object with schema name: Value
+              ],
+            },
+            "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
+            "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
+            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
+            "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+              "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+              "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+            },
+            "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value.
+            "keyValue": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
+              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
+                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "meaning": 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
+            "nullValue": "A String", # A null value.
+            "stringValue": "A String", # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
+            "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
+          },
         },
       },
       "updateTime": "A String", # The time at which the entity was last changed. This field is set for `FULL` entity results. If this entity is missing, this field will not be set.
@@ -696,25 +866,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
             "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
             "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-            "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-              "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-                "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                  "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                  "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                  "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-                },
-                "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                  { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                    "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                    "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                    "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  },
-                ],
-              },
-              "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-                "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-              },
-            },
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
             "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
             "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
               "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -782,25 +934,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
           "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-          "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-              "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-            },
-          },
+          "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
           "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -840,25 +974,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
           "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-          "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-              "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-            },
-          },
+          "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
           "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -930,25 +1046,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
             "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
             "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-            "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-              "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-                "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                  "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                  "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                  "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-                },
-                "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                  { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                    "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                    "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                    "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  },
-                ],
-              },
-              "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-                "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-              },
-            },
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
             "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
             "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
               "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -1017,25 +1115,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
             "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
             "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-            "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-              "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-                "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                  "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                  "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                  "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-                },
-                "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                  { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                    "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                    "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                    "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  },
-                ],
-              },
-              "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-                "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-              },
-            },
+            "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
             "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
             "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
               "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -1117,25 +1197,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
           "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-          "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-              "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-            },
-          },
+          "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
           "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -1175,25 +1237,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
           "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-          "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-              "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-            },
-          },
+          "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
           "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -1256,25 +1300,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
           "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-          "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-              "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-            },
-          },
+          "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
           "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -1373,7 +1399,41 @@ 
Method Details

             ],
           },
           "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-            "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
+            "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
+              "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
+                "values": [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for 'exclude_from_indexes'.
+                  # Object with schema name: Value
+                ],
+              },
+              "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
+              "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
+              "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
+              "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+              "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
+              "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+              },
+              "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value.
+              "keyValue": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
+                "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                  "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
+                  "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                  "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+                },
+                "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                  { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                    "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                    "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                    "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
+                  },
+                ],
+              },
+              "meaning": 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
+              "nullValue": "A String", # A null value.
+              "stringValue": "A String", # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
+              "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
+            },
           },
         },
         "updateTime": "A String", # The time at which the entity was last changed. This field is set for `FULL` entity results. If this entity is missing, this field will not be set.
@@ -1414,25 +1474,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "blobValue": "A String", # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value.
           "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value.
-          "entityValue": { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            "key": { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key's partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity's key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity's kind is its key path's last element's kind, or null if it has no key.
-              "partitionId": { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `""`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                "databaseId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the database to which the entities belong.
-                "namespaceId": "A String", # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                "projectId": "A String", # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              "path": [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element's _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity's ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  "id": "A String", # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  "kind": "A String", # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                  "name": "A String", # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `""`. Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. Legacy values that are not valid UTF-8 are encoded as `__bytes__` where `` is the base-64 encoding of the bytes.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            "properties": { # The entity's properties. The map's keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `""`.
-              "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value
-            },
-          },
+          "entityValue": # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
           "excludeFromIndexes": True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
diff --git a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html
index 834926a07a4..45cc1845adc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html
@@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
         "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
       },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
         "A String",
       ],
       "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
@@ -851,7 +851,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
         "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
       },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
         "A String",
       ],
       "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
@@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
           "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
         },
-        "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
           "A String",
         ],
         "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
@@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
         "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
       },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
         "A String",
       ],
       "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html
index 61266922495..c31a81b8eed 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html
@@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
         "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
       },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
         "A String",
       ],
       "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
@@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
         "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
       },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
         "A String",
       ],
       "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
@@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
           "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
         },
-        "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
           "A String",
         ],
         "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
@@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
         "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
       },
-      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.
         "A String",
       ],
       "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index d0984b388e7..48a552043ef 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
       { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
         "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
         "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
           "A String",
         ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html
index 7e0944b732e..b5fc98bb2ff 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
           { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
             "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-            "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+            "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
             "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
     { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
       "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
       "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
         "A String",
       ],
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
     { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
       "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
       "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
         "A String",
       ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index 4219528c2b1..909e5015a99 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
       { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
         "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
         "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
           "A String",
         ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html
index a54360f9d82..6187d356992 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.userEvents.html
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
           { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
             "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-            "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+            "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
             "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
     { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
       "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
       "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
         "A String",
       ],
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "documents": [ # List of Documents associated with this user event. This field is optional except for the following event types: * `view-item` * `add-to-cart` * `purchase` * `media-play` * `media-complete` In a `search` event, this field represents the documents returned to the end user on the current page (the end user may have not finished browsing the whole page yet). When a new page is returned to the end user, after pagination/filtering/ordering even for the same query, a new `search` event with different UserEvent.documents is desired.
     { # Detailed document information associated with a user event.
       "id": "A String", # Required. The Document resource ID.
-      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/
+      "name": "A String", # Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\_store\_id}/branches/{branch\_id}/documents/{document\_id}
       "promotionIds": [ # The promotion IDs associated with this Document. Currently, this field is restricted to at most one ID.
         "A String",
       ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.advertisers.lineItems.html b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.advertisers.lineItems.html
index b0cb71fb2cd..ed536bb43bc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.advertisers.lineItems.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.advertisers.lineItems.html
@@ -1212,9 +1212,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1330,9 +1330,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1489,9 +1489,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1615,9 +1615,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1746,9 +1746,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
       },
       "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-      "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+      "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
         "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-        "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+        "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
       },
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
       "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1884,9 +1884,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -2003,9 +2003,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html
index 77aa0c63449..d2a049d96f4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html
@@ -931,9 +931,9 @@ 
Method Details

       "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
     },
     "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-    "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+    "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
       "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-      "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+      "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
     },
     "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
     "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1154,9 +1154,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1337,9 +1337,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1588,9 +1588,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1779,9 +1779,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -1975,9 +1975,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
       },
       "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-      "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+      "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
         "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-        "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+        "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
       },
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
       "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -2178,9 +2178,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
@@ -2362,9 +2362,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "markupType": "A String", # Required. The markup type of the partner revenue model.
   },
   "reservationType": "A String", # Output only. The reservation type of the line item.
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.
   "warningMessages": [ # Output only. The warning messages generated by the line item. These warnings do not block saving the line item, but some may block the line item from running.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.youtubeAdGroups.html b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.youtubeAdGroups.html
index 1da2b1fdf5c..da4806d0afe 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.youtubeAdGroups.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.youtubeAdGroups.html
@@ -488,9 +488,9 @@ 
Method Details

     ],
     "productMatchType": "A String", # How products are selected by the product feed.
   },
-  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](https://support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the ad group. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the ad group.
+  "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](https://support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the ad group. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the ad group.
     "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+    "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
   },
   "youtubeAdIds": [ # The IDs of the youtube_ad_group_ad resources associated with the ad group.
     "A String",
@@ -546,9 +546,9 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "productMatchType": "A String", # How products are selected by the product feed.
       },
-      "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022. # The [targeting expansion](https://support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the ad group. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the ad group.
+      "targetingExpansion": { # Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. # The [targeting expansion](https://support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the ad group. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the ad group.
         "excludeFirstPartyAudience": True or False, # Required. Whether to exclude first-party audiences from use in targeting expansion or optimized targeting. Similar audiences of the excluded first-party lists will not be excluded. Only applicable when a first-party audience is positively targeted (directly or included in a combined audience), otherwise this selection will be ignored.
-        "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.
+        "targetingExpansionLevel": "A String", # Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.
       },
       "youtubeAdIds": [ # The IDs of the youtube_ad_group_ad resources associated with the ad group.
         "A String",
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html
index 6443cc6171f..c662312cbf7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html
@@ -129,6 +129,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
       "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
       "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+      "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
       "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
       "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
       "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -156,6 +157,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
       "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
       "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+      "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
     },
     "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
   },
@@ -600,6 +602,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
       "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
       "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+      "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
       "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
       "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
       "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -628,6 +631,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
       "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
       "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+      "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
       "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
     },
     "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
@@ -700,6 +704,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
           "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
           "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+          "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
           "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
           "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
           "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -727,6 +732,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
           "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
           "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+          "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
         },
         "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
       },
@@ -1171,6 +1177,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
           "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
           "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+          "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
           "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
           "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
           "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -1199,6 +1206,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
           "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
           "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+          "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
           "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
         },
         "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.drives.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.drives.html
index 6cfe95aed94..987750757e5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.drives.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.drives.html
@@ -143,6 +143,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -170,6 +171,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }

@@ -199,6 +201,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -226,6 +229,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }

@@ -254,6 +258,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -281,6 +286,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }
@@ -303,6 +309,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -330,6 +337,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }

@@ -364,6 +372,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
         "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
         "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+        "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
         "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
         "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
         "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -391,6 +400,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
         "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
         "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+        "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
       },
       "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
     },
@@ -438,6 +448,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -465,6 +476,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }

@@ -493,6 +505,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -520,6 +533,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }
@@ -543,6 +557,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -570,6 +585,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }

diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.teamdrives.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.teamdrives.html
index 92c2827323a..c9dc676cad1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.teamdrives.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.teamdrives.html
@@ -133,6 +133,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
     "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -161,6 +162,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
     "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
@@ -188,6 +190,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
     "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -216,6 +219,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
     "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
@@ -237,6 +241,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
     "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -265,6 +270,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
     "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
@@ -298,6 +304,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
         "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
         "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+        "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
         "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
         "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
         "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -326,6 +333,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
         "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
         "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+        "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
         "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
       },
       "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
@@ -371,6 +379,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
     "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -399,6 +408,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
     "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
@@ -421,6 +431,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
     "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
     "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -449,6 +460,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
     "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.insert request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
index ef7b4cf8124..da73af64027 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
@@ -155,6 +155,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
           "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
           "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+          "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
           "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
           "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
           "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -182,6 +183,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
           "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
           "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+          "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
         },
         "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
       },
@@ -511,6 +513,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive.
           "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
           "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
+          "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.
           "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.
           "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.
           "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive.
@@ -539,6 +542,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions.
           "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive.
           "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.
+          "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
           "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.
         },
         "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html
index 594a346e290..2198ad8d410 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html
@@ -130,6 +130,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -157,6 +158,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }
@@ -179,6 +181,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive.
     "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.
+    "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.
     "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.
     "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive.
     "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive.
@@ -206,6 +209,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive.
     "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive.
     "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.
+    "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.
   },
   "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile.
 }
@@ -247,6 +251,7 @@

Method Details

"canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive. "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive. "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive. @@ -274,6 +279,7 @@

Method Details

"copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. } @@ -303,6 +309,7 @@

Method Details

"canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive. "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive. "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive. @@ -330,6 +337,7 @@

Method Details

"copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. } @@ -364,6 +372,7 @@

Method Details

"canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive. "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive. "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive. @@ -391,6 +400,7 @@

Method Details

"copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. }, @@ -438,6 +448,7 @@

Method Details

"canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive. "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive. "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive. @@ -465,6 +476,7 @@

Method Details

"copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. } @@ -493,6 +505,7 @@

Method Details

"canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive. "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive. "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive. @@ -520,6 +533,7 @@

Method Details

"copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. } @@ -543,6 +557,7 @@

Method Details

"canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this shared drive. "canChangeDriveMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive. "canCopy": True or False, # Whether the current user can copy files in this shared drive. "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can delete children from folders in this shared drive. @@ -570,6 +585,7 @@

Method Details

"copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this shared drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this shared drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible driveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.drives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html index b3e3f875791..f67d3aff7be 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html +++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html @@ -122,6 +122,7 @@

Method Details

"canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive. @@ -150,6 +151,7 @@

Method Details

"adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions. "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. @@ -171,6 +173,7 @@

Method Details

"canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive. @@ -199,6 +202,7 @@

Method Details

"adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions. "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. @@ -237,6 +241,7 @@

Method Details

"canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive. @@ -265,6 +270,7 @@

Method Details

"adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions. "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. @@ -300,6 +306,7 @@

Method Details

"canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive. @@ -328,6 +335,7 @@

Method Details

"adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions. "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. @@ -371,6 +379,7 @@

Method Details

"canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive. @@ -399,6 +408,7 @@

Method Details

"adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions. "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. @@ -421,6 +431,7 @@

Method Details

"canAddChildren": True or False, # Whether the current user can add children to folders in this Team Drive. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the copyRequiresWriterPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeDomainUsersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive. "canChangeTeamMembersOnlyRestriction": True or False, # Whether the current user can change the teamMembersOnly restriction of this Team Drive. "canComment": True or False, # Whether the current user can comment on files in this Team Drive. @@ -449,6 +460,7 @@

Method Details

"adminManagedRestrictions": True or False, # Whether administrative privileges on this Team Drive are required to modify restrictions. "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download files inside this Team Drive, should be disabled for readers and commenters. When this restriction is set to true, it will override the similarly named field to true for any file inside this Team Drive. "domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. }, "themeId": "A String", # The ID of the theme from which the background image and color will be set. The set of possible teamDriveThemes can be retrieved from a drive.about.get response. When not specified on a drive.teamdrives.create request, a random theme is chosen from which the background image and color are set. This is a write-only field; it can only be set on requests that don't set colorRgb or backgroundImageFile. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.documents.html b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.documents.html index 59b6a8ec429..13d8dcccb0d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.documents.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.documents.html @@ -184,11 +184,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -243,16 +239,31 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -272,11 +283,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -296,11 +303,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -321,7 +324,26 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -332,11 +354,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -368,16 +386,31 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -397,11 +430,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -421,11 +450,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -446,7 +471,26 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -480,11 +524,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The result of applying a write. "transformResults": [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -572,16 +612,31 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -601,11 +656,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -625,11 +676,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -650,7 +697,26 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -661,11 +727,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -697,16 +759,31 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -726,11 +803,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -750,11 +823,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -775,7 +844,26 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -799,11 +887,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The result of applying a write. "transformResults": [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -843,11 +927,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -885,11 +965,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -955,11 +1031,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1012,11 +1084,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1117,11 +1185,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1201,11 +1265,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1253,11 +1313,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1291,11 +1347,7 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1348,11 +1400,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1439,11 +1487,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1491,11 +1535,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1529,11 +1569,7 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1578,11 +1614,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1634,11 +1666,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1678,11 +1706,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1765,11 +1789,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1817,11 +1837,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1855,11 +1871,7 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1904,11 +1916,7 @@

Method Details

"result": { # The result of a single bucket from a Firestore aggregation query. The keys of `aggregate_fields` are the same for all results in an aggregation query, unlike document queries which can have different fields present for each result. # A single aggregation result. Not present when reporting partial progress. "aggregateFields": { # The result of the aggregation functions, ex: `COUNT(*) AS total_docs`. The key is the alias assigned to the aggregation function on input and the size of this map equals the number of aggregation functions in the query. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1957,11 +1965,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2009,11 +2013,7 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2047,11 +2047,7 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2095,11 +2091,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2157,16 +2149,31 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2186,11 +2193,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2210,11 +2213,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2235,7 +2234,26 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -2246,11 +2264,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2282,16 +2296,31 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2311,11 +2340,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2335,11 +2360,7 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2360,7 +2381,26 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value + { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. + "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. + "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. + "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. + "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. + "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. + }, + "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. + "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. + "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. + "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value + }, + }, + "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. + "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. + "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. + "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. + }, ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -2386,11 +2426,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The result of applying a write. "transformResults": [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "values": [ # Values in the array. - # Object with schema name: Value - ], - }, + "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html index 6ff76771383..b595ddaa386 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html @@ -184,7 +184,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -239,31 +243,16 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -283,7 +272,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -303,7 +296,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -324,26 +321,7 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -354,7 +332,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -386,31 +368,16 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -430,7 +397,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -450,7 +421,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -471,26 +446,7 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -524,7 +480,11 @@

Method Details

{ # The result of applying a write. "transformResults": [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -612,31 +572,16 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -656,7 +601,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -676,7 +625,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -697,26 +650,7 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -727,7 +661,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -759,31 +697,16 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -803,7 +726,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -823,7 +750,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -844,26 +775,7 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -887,7 +799,11 @@

Method Details

{ # The result of applying a write. "transformResults": [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -927,7 +843,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -965,7 +885,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1031,7 +955,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1084,7 +1012,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1185,7 +1117,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1265,7 +1201,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1313,7 +1253,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1347,7 +1291,11 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1400,7 +1348,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1487,7 +1439,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1535,7 +1491,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1569,7 +1529,11 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1614,7 +1578,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1666,7 +1634,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1706,7 +1678,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1789,7 +1765,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1837,7 +1817,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1871,7 +1855,11 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1916,7 +1904,11 @@

Method Details

"result": { # The result of a single bucket from a Firestore aggregation query. The keys of `aggregate_fields` are the same for all results in an aggregation query, unlike document queries which can have different fields present for each result. # A single aggregation result. Not present when reporting partial progress. "aggregateFields": { # The result of the aggregation functions, ex: `COUNT(*) AS total_docs`. The key is the alias assigned to the aggregation function on input and the size of this map equals the number of aggregation functions in the query. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -1965,7 +1957,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2013,7 +2009,11 @@

Method Details

"before": True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query. "values": [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2047,7 +2047,11 @@

Method Details

}, "op": "A String", # The operator to filter by. "value": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2091,7 +2095,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2149,31 +2157,16 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2193,7 +2186,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2213,7 +2210,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2234,26 +2235,7 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -2264,7 +2246,11 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query. "fields": { # The document's fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `"foo" : { map_value: { "x&y" : { string_value: "hello" }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&y` `` represents `x&y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``. "a_key": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2296,31 +2282,16 @@

Method Details

{ # A transformation of a field of the document. "appendMissingElements": { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "fieldPath": "A String", # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference. "increment": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field's current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2340,7 +2311,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "maximum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2360,7 +2335,11 @@

Method Details

"timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. }, "minimum": { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. @@ -2381,26 +2360,7 @@

Method Details

}, "removeAllFromArray": { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value. "values": [ # Values in the array. - { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. - "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. - "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. - "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. - "geoPointValue": { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth. - "latitude": 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0]. - "longitude": 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0]. - }, - "integerValue": "A String", # An integer value. - "mapValue": { # A map value. # A map value. - "fields": { # The map's fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. - "a_key": # Object with schema name: Value - }, - }, - "nullValue": "A String", # A null value. - "referenceValue": "A String", # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`. - "stringValue": "A String", # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries. - "timestampValue": "A String", # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down. - }, + # Object with schema name: Value ], }, "setToServerValue": "A String", # Sets the field to the given server value. @@ -2426,7 +2386,11 @@

Method Details

{ # The result of applying a write. "transformResults": [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order. { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. - "arrayValue": # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "arrayValue": { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array. + "values": [ # Values in the array. + # Object with schema name: Value + ], + }, "booleanValue": True or False, # A boolean value. "bytesValue": "A String", # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries. "doubleValue": 3.14, # A double value. diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html index 181cfe65fe1..aa1ee2cac24 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html @@ -97,6 +97,9 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets the configuration of the specified FHIR store.

+

+ getFHIRStoreMetrics(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets metrics associated with the FHIR store.

getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.

@@ -670,6 +673,32 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ getFHIRStoreMetrics(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Gets metrics associated with the FHIR store.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # List of metrics for a given FHIR store.
+  "metrics": [ # List of FhirStoreMetric by resource type.
+    { # Count of resources and total storage size by type for a given FHIR store.
+      "count": "A String", # The total count of FHIR resources in the store of this resource type.
+      "resourceType": "A String", # The FHIR resource type this metric applies to.
+      "structuredStorageSizeBytes": "A String", # The total amount of structured storage used by FHIR resources of this resource type in the store.
+    },
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for, in the format `projects/{project_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
+}
+
+
getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None) 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
index 497f45105bd..661c924ca47 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
@@ -100,6 +100,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   get(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the configuration of the specified FHIR store.

+

+  getFHIRStoreMetrics(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Gets metrics associated with the FHIR store.

 

   getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.

@@ -1319,6 +1322,32 @@ 
Method Details

 }
+
+ getFHIRStoreMetrics(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Gets metrics associated with the FHIR store.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # List of metrics for a given FHIR store.
+  "metrics": [ # List of FhirStoreMetric by resource type.
+    { # Count of resources and total storage size by type for a given FHIR store.
+      "count": "A String", # The total count of FHIR resources in the store of this resource type.
+      "resourceType": "A String", # The FHIR resource type this metric applies to.
+      "structuredStorageSizeBytes": "A String", # The total amount of structured storage used by FHIR resources of this resource type in the store.
+    },
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for, in the format `projects/{project_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
+}
+
+
getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None) 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.html b/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.html
index 421dfbbc710..eea74c80e1f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.html
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "displayName": "A String", # A user-specified display name of the pool in Google Cloud Console. Cannot exceed 32 characters.
   "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the pool. Format: `locations/{location}/workforcePools/{workforce_pool_id}`
   "parent": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the parent. Format: `organizations/{org-id}`.
-  "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the SessionNotOnOrAfter claim in the SAML assertion.
+  "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the `SessionNotOnOrAfter` claim in the SAML assertion.
   "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pool.
 }
 
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "displayName": "A String", # A user-specified display name of the pool in Google Cloud Console. Cannot exceed 32 characters.
   "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the pool. Format: `locations/{location}/workforcePools/{workforce_pool_id}`
   "parent": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the parent. Format: `organizations/{org-id}`.
-  "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the SessionNotOnOrAfter claim in the SAML assertion.
+  "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the `SessionNotOnOrAfter` claim in the SAML assertion.
   "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pool.
 }
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@

Method Details

"displayName": "A String", # A user-specified display name of the pool in Google Cloud Console. Cannot exceed 32 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the pool. Format: `locations/{location}/workforcePools/{workforce_pool_id}` "parent": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the parent. Format: `organizations/{org-id}`. - "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the SessionNotOnOrAfter claim in the SAML assertion. + "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the `SessionNotOnOrAfter` claim in the SAML assertion. "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pool. }, ], @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@

Method Details

"displayName": "A String", # A user-specified display name of the pool in Google Cloud Console. Cannot exceed 32 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the pool. Format: `locations/{location}/workforcePools/{workforce_pool_id}` "parent": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the parent. Format: `organizations/{org-id}`. - "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the SessionNotOnOrAfter claim in the SAML assertion. + "sessionDuration": "A String", # Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the `SessionNotOnOrAfter` claim in the SAML assertion. "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pool. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/identitytoolkit_v1.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/identitytoolkit_v1.accounts.html index 2d0e0911e54..b5484588648 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/identitytoolkit_v1.accounts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/identitytoolkit_v1.accounts.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@

Instance Methods

Signs in or signs up a user with a out-of-band code from an email link. If a user does not exist with the given email address, a user record will be created. If the sign-in succeeds, an Identity Platform ID and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project.

signInWithGameCenter(body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Signs in or signs up a user with iOS Game Center credentials. If the sign-in succeeds, a new Identity Platform ID token and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. The bundle ID is required in the request header as `x-ios-bundle-identifier`. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project.

+

Signs in or signs up a user with iOS Game Center credentials. If the sign-in succeeds, a new Identity Platform ID token and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. The bundle ID is required in the request header as `x-ios-bundle-identifier`. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project. Apple has [deprecated the `playerID` field](https://developer.apple.com/documentation/gamekit/gkplayer/1521127-playerid/). The Apple platform Firebase SDK will use `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` from version 10.5.0 and onwards. Upgrading to SDK version 10.5.0 or later updates existing integrations that use `playerID` to instead use `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID`. When making calls to `signInWithGameCenter`, you must include `playerID` along with the new fields `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` to successfully identify all existing users. Upgrading existing Game Center sign in integrations to SDK version 10.5.0 or later is irreversible.

signInWithIdp(body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Signs in or signs up a user using credentials from an Identity Provider (IdP). This is done by manually providing an IdP credential, or by providing the authorization response obtained via the authorization request from CreateAuthUri. If the sign-in succeeds, a new Identity Platform ID token and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. A new Identity Platform user account will be created if the user has not previously signed in to the IdP with the same account. In addition, when the "One account per email address" setting is enabled, there should not be an existing Identity Platform user account with the same email address for a new user account to be created. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project.

@@ -537,7 +537,7 @@

Method Details

signInWithGameCenter(body=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Signs in or signs up a user with iOS Game Center credentials. If the sign-in succeeds, a new Identity Platform ID token and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. The bundle ID is required in the request header as `x-ios-bundle-identifier`. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project.
+  
Signs in or signs up a user with iOS Game Center credentials. If the sign-in succeeds, a new Identity Platform ID token and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. The bundle ID is required in the request header as `x-ios-bundle-identifier`. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project. Apple has [deprecated the `playerID` field](https://developer.apple.com/documentation/gamekit/gkplayer/1521127-playerid/). The Apple platform Firebase SDK will use `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` from version 10.5.0 and onwards. Upgrading to SDK version 10.5.0 or later updates existing integrations that use `playerID` to instead use `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID`. When making calls to `signInWithGameCenter`, you must include `playerID` along with the new fields `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` to successfully identify all existing users. Upgrading existing Game Center sign in integrations to SDK version 10.5.0 or later is irreversible.
 
 Args:
   body: object, The request body.
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "displayName": "A String", # The user's Game Center display name.
   "gamePlayerId": "A String", # The user's Game Center game player ID. A unique identifier for a player of the game. https://developer.apple.com/documentation/gamekit/gkplayer/3113960-gameplayerid
   "idToken": "A String", # A valid ID token for an Identity Platform account. If present, this request will link the Game Center player ID to the account represented by this ID token.
-  "playerId": "A String", # Required. The user's Game Center player ID.
+  "playerId": "A String", # Required. The user's Game Center player ID. Deprecated by Apple. Pass `playerID` along with `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` to initiate the migration of a user's Game Center player ID to `gamePlayerID`.
   "publicKeyUrl": "A String", # Required. The URL to fetch the Apple public key in order to verify the given signature is signed by Apple.
   "salt": "A String", # Required. A random string used to generate the given signature.
   "signature": "A String", # Required. The verification signature data generated by Apple.
@@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "idToken": "A String", # An Identity Platform ID token for the authenticated user.
   "isNewUser": True or False, # Whether the logged in user was created by this request.
   "localId": "A String", # The ID of the authenticated user. Always present in the response.
-  "playerId": "A String", # The user's Game Center player ID.
+  "playerId": "A String", # The user's Game Center player ID. Pass `playerID` along with `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` to initiate the migration of a user's Game Center player ID to `gamePlayerID`.
   "refreshToken": "A String", # An Identity Platform refresh token for the authenticated user.
   "teamPlayerId": "A String", # The user's Game Center team player ID. A unique identifier for a player of all the games that you distribute using your developer account. https://developer.apple.com/documentation/gamekit/gkplayer/3174857-teamplayerid
 }

diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html
index 83ee57ce708..237be42136b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html
@@ -85,6 +85,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   create(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Creates a log bucket that can be used to store log entries. After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

+  createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

 

   delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.

@@ -99,10 +102,13 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Retrieves the next page of results.

 

   patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+
Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

 

   undelete(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Undeletes a log bucket. A bucket that has been deleted can be undeleted within the grace period of 7 days.

+

+  updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

 
Method Details

 

     close()
@@ -119,6 +125,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -154,6 +161,44 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
+  "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+    "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
+    "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings.
+    "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets.
+  "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket.
+  "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data.
+    { # Configuration for an indexed field.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update.
+      "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index.
+    },
+  ],
+  "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
+  "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed.
+  "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz)
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+ +
+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -177,6 +222,35 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  bucketId: string, Required. A client-assigned identifier such as "my-bucket". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
 }
@@ -213,6 +287,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -258,6 +333,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The response from ListBuckets. "buckets": [ # A list of buckets. { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -303,7 +379,7 @@

Method Details

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+  
Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
@@ -311,6 +387,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -346,6 +423,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -396,4 +474,70 @@ 
Method Details

 }
+
+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
+  "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+    "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
+    "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings.
+    "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets.
+  "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket.
+  "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data.
+    { # Configuration for an indexed field.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update.
+      "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index.
+    },
+  ],
+  "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
+  "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed.
+  "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz)
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html index 6e403f6d835..0bcddfcc6af 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html @@ -85,6 +85,9 @@

Instance Methods

create(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Creates a log bucket that can be used to store log entries. After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.

@@ -99,10 +102,13 @@

Instance Methods

Retrieves the next page of results.

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

undelete(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Undeletes a log bucket. A bucket that has been deleted can be undeleted within the grace period of 7 days.

+

+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

Method Details

close() @@ -119,6 +125,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -154,6 +161,44 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. + "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings. + "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets. + "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket. + "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data. + { # Configuration for an indexed field. + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update. + "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status + "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index. + }, + ], + "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state. + "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed. + "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz) + "A String", + ], + "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used. + "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket. +} +
+ +
+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -177,6 +222,35 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  bucketId: string, Required. A client-assigned identifier such as "my-bucket". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
 }
@@ -213,6 +287,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -258,6 +333,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The response from ListBuckets. "buckets": [ # A list of buckets. { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -303,7 +379,7 @@

Method Details

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+  
Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
@@ -311,6 +387,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -346,6 +423,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -396,4 +474,70 @@ 
Method Details

 }
+
+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
+  "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+    "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
+    "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings.
+    "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets.
+  "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket.
+  "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data.
+    { # Configuration for an indexed field.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update.
+      "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index.
+    },
+  ],
+  "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
+  "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed.
+  "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz)
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html index 0629db0ef0c..a73aaa8e143 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html @@ -85,6 +85,9 @@

Instance Methods

create(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Creates a log bucket that can be used to store log entries. After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.

@@ -99,10 +102,13 @@

Instance Methods

Retrieves the next page of results.

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

undelete(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Undeletes a log bucket. A bucket that has been deleted can be undeleted within the grace period of 7 days.

+

+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

Method Details

close() @@ -119,6 +125,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -154,6 +161,44 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. + "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings. + "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets. + "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket. + "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data. + { # Configuration for an indexed field. + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update. + "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status + "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index. + }, + ], + "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state. + "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed. + "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz) + "A String", + ], + "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used. + "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket. +} +
+ +
+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -177,6 +222,35 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  bucketId: string, Required. A client-assigned identifier such as "my-bucket". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
 }
@@ -213,6 +287,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -258,6 +333,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The response from ListBuckets. "buckets": [ # A list of buckets. { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -303,7 +379,7 @@

Method Details

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+  
Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
@@ -311,6 +387,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -346,6 +423,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -396,4 +474,70 @@ 
Method Details

 }
+
+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
+  "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+    "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
+    "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings.
+    "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets.
+  "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket.
+  "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data.
+    { # Configuration for an indexed field.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update.
+      "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index.
+    },
+  ],
+  "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
+  "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed.
+  "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz)
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html index 2dd00d4d8c9..f1c986579cc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html @@ -85,6 +85,9 @@

Instance Methods

create(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Creates a log bucket that can be used to store log entries. After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.

@@ -99,10 +102,13 @@

Instance Methods

Retrieves the next page of results.

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

undelete(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Undeletes a log bucket. A bucket that has been deleted can be undeleted within the grace period of 7 days.

+

+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

Method Details

close() @@ -119,6 +125,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -154,6 +161,44 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. + "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings. + "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets. + "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket. + "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data. + { # Configuration for an indexed field. + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update. + "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status + "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index. + }, + ], + "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state. + "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed. + "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz) + "A String", + ], + "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used. + "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket. +} +
+ +
+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -177,6 +222,35 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  bucketId: string, Required. A client-assigned identifier such as "my-bucket". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
 }
@@ -213,6 +287,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -258,6 +333,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The response from ListBuckets. "buckets": [ # A list of buckets. { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -303,7 +379,7 @@

Method Details

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+  
Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
@@ -311,6 +387,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -346,6 +423,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -396,4 +474,70 @@ 
Method Details

 }
+
+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
+  "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+    "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
+    "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings.
+    "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets.
+  "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket.
+  "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data.
+    { # Configuration for an indexed field.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update.
+      "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index.
+    },
+  ],
+  "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
+  "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed.
+  "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz)
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html index 1ad52d17a3a..d298fadb602 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html @@ -85,6 +85,9 @@

Instance Methods

create(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Creates a log bucket that can be used to store log entries. After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.

@@ -99,10 +102,13 @@

Instance Methods

Retrieves the next page of results.

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

+

Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

undelete(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Undeletes a log bucket. A bucket that has been deleted can be undeleted within the grace period of 7 days.

+

+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.

Method Details

close() @@ -119,6 +125,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -154,6 +161,44 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. + "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings. + "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets. + "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket. + "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data. + { # Configuration for an indexed field. + "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update. + "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status + "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index. + }, + ], + "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state. + "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty. + "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed. + "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz) + "A String", + ], + "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used. + "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket. +} +
+ +
+ createAsync(parent, body=None, bucketId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -177,6 +222,35 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  bucketId: string, Required. A client-assigned identifier such as "my-bucket". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
 }
@@ -213,6 +287,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -258,6 +333,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The response from ListBuckets. "buckets": [ # A list of buckets. { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored. + "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled. "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion. @@ -303,7 +379,7 @@

Method Details

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+  
Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
@@ -311,6 +387,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -346,6 +423,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
   "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
     "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
@@ -396,4 +474,70 @@ 
Method Details

 }
+
+ updateAsync(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.
+  "analyticsEnabled": True or False, # Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.
+  "cmekSettings": { # Describes the customer-managed encryption key (CMEK) settings associated with a project, folder, organization, billing account, or flexible resource.Note: CMEK for the Log Router can currently only be configured for Google Cloud organizations. Once configured, it applies to all projects and folders in the Google Cloud organization.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information. # The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key"To enable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to a valid kms_key_name for which the associated service account has the required cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter roles assigned for the key.The Cloud KMS key used by the Log Router can be updated by changing the kms_key_name to a new valid key name or disabled by setting the key name to an empty string. Encryption operations that are in progress will be completed with the key that was in use when they started. Decryption operations will be completed using the key that was used at the time of encryption unless access to that key has been revoked.To disable CMEK for the Log Router, set this field to an empty string.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+    "kmsKeyVersionName": "A String", # The CryptoKeyVersion resource name for the configured Cloud KMS key.KMS key name format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION]/keyRings/[KEYRING]/cryptoKeys/[KEY]/cryptoKeyVersions/[VERSION]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/keyRings/my-ring/cryptoKeys/my-key/cryptoKeyVersions/1"This is a read-only field used to convey the specific configured CryptoKeyVersion of kms_key that has been configured. It will be populated in cases where the CMEK settings are bound to a single key version.If this field is populated, the kms_key is tied to a specific CryptoKeyVersion.
+    "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the CMEK settings.
+    "serviceAccountId": "A String", # Output only. The service account that will be used by the Log Router to access your Cloud KMS key.Before enabling CMEK for Log Router, you must first assign the cloudkms.cryptoKeyEncrypterDecrypter role to the service account that the Log Router will use to access your Cloud KMS key. Use GetCmekSettings to obtain the service account ID.See Enabling CMEK for Log Router (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/managed-encryption) for more information.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the bucket. This is not set for any of the default buckets.
+  "description": "A String", # Describes this bucket.
+  "indexConfigs": [ # A list of indexed fields and related configuration data.
+    { # Configuration for an indexed field.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the index was last modified.This is used to return the timestamp, and will be ignored if supplied during update.
+      "fieldPath": "A String", # Required. The LogEntry field path to index.Note that some paths are automatically indexed, and other paths are not eligible for indexing. See indexing documentation( https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#indexed-fields) for details.For example: jsonPayload.request.status
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of data in this index.
+    },
+  ],
+  "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
+  "locked": True or False, # Whether the bucket is locked.The retention period on a locked bucket cannot be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the bucket.For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucketFor a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)For the location of global it is unspecified where log entries are actually stored.After a bucket has been created, the location cannot be changed.
+  "restrictedFields": [ # Log entry field paths that are denied access in this bucket.The following fields and their children are eligible: textPayload, jsonPayload, protoPayload, httpRequest, labels, sourceLocation.Restricting a repeated field will restrict all values. Adding a parent will block all child fields. (e.g. foo.bar will block foo.bar.baz)
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "retentionDays": 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is false, it means the operation is still in progress. If true, the operation is completed, and either error or response is available.
+  "error": { # The Status type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by gRPC (https://github.com/grpc). Each Status message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details.You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the API Design Guide (https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the name should be a resource name ending with operations/{unique_id}.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as Delete, the response is google.protobuf.Empty. If the original method is standard Get/Create/Update, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type XxxResponse, where Xxx is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is TakeSnapshot(), the inferred response type is TakeSnapshotResponse.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.uptimeCheckConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.uptimeCheckConfigs.html index 7de77993ef4..1ec878e6afe 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.uptimeCheckConfigs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.uptimeCheckConfigs.html @@ -136,6 +136,7 @@

Method Details

}, "body": "A String", # The request body associated with the HTTP POST request. If content_type is URL_ENCODED, the body passed in must be URL-encoded. Users can provide a Content-Length header via the headers field or the API will do so. If the request_method is GET and body is not empty, the API will return an error. The maximum byte size is 1 megabyte.Note: If client libraries aren't used (which performs the conversion automatically) base64 encode your body data since the field is of bytes type. "contentType": "A String", # The content type header to use for the check. The following configurations result in errors: 1. Content type is specified in both the headers field and the content_type field. 2. Request method is GET and content_type is not TYPE_UNSPECIFIED 3. Request method is POST and content_type is TYPE_UNSPECIFIED. 4. Request method is POST and a "Content-Type" header is provided via headers field. The content_type field should be used instead. + "customContentType": "A String", # A user provided content type header to use for the check. The invalid configurations outlined in the content_type field apply to custom_content_type, as well as the following: 1. content_type is URL_ENCODED and custom_content_type is set. 2. content_type is USER_PROVIDED and custom_content_type is not set. "headers": { # The list of headers to send as part of the Uptime check request. If two headers have the same key and different values, they should be entered as a single header, with the value being a comma-separated list of all the desired values as described at https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616.txt (page 31). Entering two separate headers with the same key in a Create call will cause the first to be overwritten by the second. The maximum number of headers allowed is 100. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -221,6 +222,7 @@

Method Details

}, "body": "A String", # The request body associated with the HTTP POST request. If content_type is URL_ENCODED, the body passed in must be URL-encoded. Users can provide a Content-Length header via the headers field or the API will do so. If the request_method is GET and body is not empty, the API will return an error. The maximum byte size is 1 megabyte.Note: If client libraries aren't used (which performs the conversion automatically) base64 encode your body data since the field is of bytes type. "contentType": "A String", # The content type header to use for the check. The following configurations result in errors: 1. Content type is specified in both the headers field and the content_type field. 2. Request method is GET and content_type is not TYPE_UNSPECIFIED 3. Request method is POST and content_type is TYPE_UNSPECIFIED. 4. Request method is POST and a "Content-Type" header is provided via headers field. The content_type field should be used instead. + "customContentType": "A String", # A user provided content type header to use for the check. The invalid configurations outlined in the content_type field apply to custom_content_type, as well as the following: 1. content_type is URL_ENCODED and custom_content_type is set. 2. content_type is USER_PROVIDED and custom_content_type is not set. "headers": { # The list of headers to send as part of the Uptime check request. If two headers have the same key and different values, they should be entered as a single header, with the value being a comma-separated list of all the desired values as described at https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616.txt (page 31). Entering two separate headers with the same key in a Create call will cause the first to be overwritten by the second. The maximum number of headers allowed is 100. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -331,6 +333,7 @@

Method Details

}, "body": "A String", # The request body associated with the HTTP POST request. If content_type is URL_ENCODED, the body passed in must be URL-encoded. Users can provide a Content-Length header via the headers field or the API will do so. If the request_method is GET and body is not empty, the API will return an error. The maximum byte size is 1 megabyte.Note: If client libraries aren't used (which performs the conversion automatically) base64 encode your body data since the field is of bytes type. "contentType": "A String", # The content type header to use for the check. The following configurations result in errors: 1. Content type is specified in both the headers field and the content_type field. 2. Request method is GET and content_type is not TYPE_UNSPECIFIED 3. Request method is POST and content_type is TYPE_UNSPECIFIED. 4. Request method is POST and a "Content-Type" header is provided via headers field. The content_type field should be used instead. + "customContentType": "A String", # A user provided content type header to use for the check. The invalid configurations outlined in the content_type field apply to custom_content_type, as well as the following: 1. content_type is URL_ENCODED and custom_content_type is set. 2. content_type is USER_PROVIDED and custom_content_type is not set. "headers": { # The list of headers to send as part of the Uptime check request. If two headers have the same key and different values, they should be entered as a single header, with the value being a comma-separated list of all the desired values as described at https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616.txt (page 31). Entering two separate headers with the same key in a Create call will cause the first to be overwritten by the second. The maximum number of headers allowed is 100. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -430,6 +433,7 @@

Method Details

}, "body": "A String", # The request body associated with the HTTP POST request. If content_type is URL_ENCODED, the body passed in must be URL-encoded. Users can provide a Content-Length header via the headers field or the API will do so. If the request_method is GET and body is not empty, the API will return an error. The maximum byte size is 1 megabyte.Note: If client libraries aren't used (which performs the conversion automatically) base64 encode your body data since the field is of bytes type. "contentType": "A String", # The content type header to use for the check. The following configurations result in errors: 1. Content type is specified in both the headers field and the content_type field. 2. Request method is GET and content_type is not TYPE_UNSPECIFIED 3. Request method is POST and content_type is TYPE_UNSPECIFIED. 4. Request method is POST and a "Content-Type" header is provided via headers field. The content_type field should be used instead. + "customContentType": "A String", # A user provided content type header to use for the check. The invalid configurations outlined in the content_type field apply to custom_content_type, as well as the following: 1. content_type is URL_ENCODED and custom_content_type is set. 2. content_type is USER_PROVIDED and custom_content_type is not set. "headers": { # The list of headers to send as part of the Uptime check request. If two headers have the same key and different values, they should be entered as a single header, with the value being a comma-separated list of all the desired values as described at https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616.txt (page 31). Entering two separate headers with the same key in a Create call will cause the first to be overwritten by the second. The maximum number of headers allowed is 100. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -533,6 +537,7 @@

Method Details

}, "body": "A String", # The request body associated with the HTTP POST request. If content_type is URL_ENCODED, the body passed in must be URL-encoded. Users can provide a Content-Length header via the headers field or the API will do so. If the request_method is GET and body is not empty, the API will return an error. The maximum byte size is 1 megabyte.Note: If client libraries aren't used (which performs the conversion automatically) base64 encode your body data since the field is of bytes type. "contentType": "A String", # The content type header to use for the check. The following configurations result in errors: 1. Content type is specified in both the headers field and the content_type field. 2. Request method is GET and content_type is not TYPE_UNSPECIFIED 3. Request method is POST and content_type is TYPE_UNSPECIFIED. 4. Request method is POST and a "Content-Type" header is provided via headers field. The content_type field should be used instead. + "customContentType": "A String", # A user provided content type header to use for the check. The invalid configurations outlined in the content_type field apply to custom_content_type, as well as the following: 1. content_type is URL_ENCODED and custom_content_type is set. 2. content_type is USER_PROVIDED and custom_content_type is not set. "headers": { # The list of headers to send as part of the Uptime check request. If two headers have the same key and different values, they should be entered as a single header, with the value being a comma-separated list of all the desired values as described at https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616.txt (page 31). Entering two separate headers with the same key in a Create call will cause the first to be overwritten by the second. The maximum number of headers allowed is 100. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -619,6 +624,7 @@

Method Details

}, "body": "A String", # The request body associated with the HTTP POST request. If content_type is URL_ENCODED, the body passed in must be URL-encoded. Users can provide a Content-Length header via the headers field or the API will do so. If the request_method is GET and body is not empty, the API will return an error. The maximum byte size is 1 megabyte.Note: If client libraries aren't used (which performs the conversion automatically) base64 encode your body data since the field is of bytes type. "contentType": "A String", # The content type header to use for the check. The following configurations result in errors: 1. Content type is specified in both the headers field and the content_type field. 2. Request method is GET and content_type is not TYPE_UNSPECIFIED 3. Request method is POST and content_type is TYPE_UNSPECIFIED. 4. Request method is POST and a "Content-Type" header is provided via headers field. The content_type field should be used instead. + "customContentType": "A String", # A user provided content type header to use for the check. The invalid configurations outlined in the content_type field apply to custom_content_type, as well as the following: 1. content_type is URL_ENCODED and custom_content_type is set. 2. content_type is USER_PROVIDED and custom_content_type is not set. "headers": { # The list of headers to send as part of the Uptime check request. If two headers have the same key and different values, they should be entered as a single header, with the value being a comma-separated list of all the desired values as described at https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616.txt (page 31). Entering two separate headers with the same key in a Create call will cause the first to be overwritten by the second. The maximum number of headers allowed is 100. "a_key": "A String", }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html index 586aae8ba42..910f74092be 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@

Method Details

parent: string, Required. The parent resource's name. (required) filter: string, An expression that filters the results listed in the response. orderBy: string, Sort the results by a certain order. - pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. + pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results per page to return. pageToken: string, The page token. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.spokes.html b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.spokes.html index d529cc6f63e..c9dd0fcf58b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.spokes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1.projects.locations.spokes.html @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@

Method Details

parent: string, Required. The parent resource. (required) filter: string, An expression that filters the results listed in the response. orderBy: string, Sort the results by a certain order. - pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. + pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return per page. pageToken: string, The page token. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html index 683676dd4f4..f7dc3766ca9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.global_.hubs.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

} hubId: string, Optional. Unique id for the Hub to create. - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Required. The name of the Hub to delete. (required) - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Time when the Hub was updated. } - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). updateMask: string, Optional. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Hub resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.spokes.html b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.spokes.html index 0b284fd2572..aee24f0d144 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.spokes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkconnectivity_v1alpha1.projects.locations.spokes.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # The time when the Spoke was updated. } - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). spokeId: string, Optional. Unique id for the Spoke to create. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Required. The name of the Spoke to delete. (required) - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # The time when the Spoke was updated. } - requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). updateMask: string, Optional. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Spoke resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.addressGroups.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.addressGroups.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..410691d7a48 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.addressGroups.html @@ -0,0 +1,524 @@ + + + +

Network Security API . organizations . locations . addressGroups

+

Instance Methods

+

+ addItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Adds items to an address group.

+

+ cloneItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Clones items from one address group to another.

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, addressGroupId=None, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new address group in a given project and location.

+

+ delete(name, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes an address group.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets details of a single address group.

+

+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists address groups in a given project and location.

+

+ listReferences(addressGroup, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists references of an address group.

+

+ listReferences_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates parameters of an address group.

+

+ removeItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Removes items from an address group.

+

Method Details

+
+ addItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Adds items to an address group.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to add items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request used by the AddAddressGroupItems method.
+  "items": [ # Required. List of items to add.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ cloneItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Clones items from one address group to another.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request used by the CloneAddressGroupItems method.
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "sourceAddressGroup": "A String", # Required. Source address group to clone items from.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ close() + 
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, addressGroupId=None, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a new address group in a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the AddressGroup. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+  "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+  "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+}
+
+  addressGroupId: string, Required. Short name of the AddressGroup resource to be created. This value should be 1-63 characters long, containing only letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores, and should not start with a number. E.g. "authz_policy".
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Deletes an address group.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to delete. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Gets details of a single address group.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to get. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+  "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+  "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Lists address groups in a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The project and location from which the AddressGroups should be listed, specified in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Maximum number of AddressGroups to return per call.
+  pageToken: string, The value returned by the last `ListAddressGroupsResponse` Indicates that this is a continuation of a prior `ListAddressGroups` call, and that the system should return the next page of data.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response returned by the ListAddressGroups method.
+  "addressGroups": [ # List of AddressGroups resources.
+    { # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+      "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+      "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If there might be more results than those appearing in this response, then `next_page_token` is included. To get the next set of results, call this method again using the value of `next_page_token` as `page_token`.
+}
+
+ +
+ listReferences(addressGroup, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Lists references of an address group.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of references to return. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default. Server may return fewer items than requested. A caller should only rely on response's next_page_token to determine if there are more AddressGroupUsers left to be queried.
+  pageToken: string, The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response of the ListAddressGroupReferences method.
+  "addressGroupReferences": [ # A list of references that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # The Reference of AddressGroup.
+      "firewallPolicy": "A String", # FirewallPolicy that is using the Address Group.
+      "rulePriority": 42, # Rule priority of the FirewallPolicy that is using the Address Group.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If there might be more results than those appearing in this response, then `next_page_token` is included. To get the next set of results, call this method again using the value of `next_page_token` as `page_token`.
+}
+
+ +
+ listReferences_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ list_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates parameters of an address group.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+  "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+  "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Optional. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the AddressGroup resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ removeItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Removes items from an address group.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to remove items from. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request used by the RemoveAddressGroupItems method.
+  "items": [ # Required. List of items to remove.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html index 7eb3f073e8b..104fc8b6394 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html @@ -74,6 +74,11 @@

Network Security API . organizations . locations

Instance Methods

+

+ addressGroups() +

+

Returns the addressGroups Resource.

+

operations()

diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.addressGroups.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.addressGroups.html index b1010078c47..dd9f6329adf 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.addressGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.addressGroups.html @@ -74,12 +74,45 @@

Network Security API . projects . locations . addressGroups

Instance Methods

+

+ addItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Adds items to an address group.

+

+ cloneItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Clones items from one address group to another.

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, addressGroupId=None, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new address group in a given project and location.

+

+ delete(name, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes a single address group.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets details of a single address group.

getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.

+

+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists address groups in a given project and location.

+

+ listReferences(addressGroup, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists references of an address group.

+

+ listReferences_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates the parameters of a single address group.

+

+ removeItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Removes items from an address group.

setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.

@@ -87,11 +120,222 @@

Instance Methods

testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource. If the resource does not exist, this will return an empty set of permissions, not a `NOT_FOUND` error. Note: This operation is designed to be used for building permission-aware UIs and command-line tools, not for authorization checking. This operation may "fail open" without warning.

Method Details

+
+ addItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Adds items to an address group.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to add items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request used by the AddAddressGroupItems method.
+  "items": [ # Required. List of items to add.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ cloneItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Clones items from one address group to another.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request used by the CloneAddressGroupItems method.
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "sourceAddressGroup": "A String", # Required. Source address group to clone items from.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+
close() 
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ create(parent, addressGroupId=None, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a new address group in a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the AddressGroup. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+  "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+  "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+}
+
+  addressGroupId: string, Required. Short name of the AddressGroup resource to be created. This value should be 1-63 characters long, containing only letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores, and should not start with a number. E.g. "authz_policy".
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Deletes a single address group.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to delete. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Gets details of a single address group.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to get. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+  "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+  "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+}
+
+
getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None) 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.
@@ -140,6 +384,200 @@ 
Method Details

 }
+
+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Lists address groups in a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The project and location from which the AddressGroups should be listed, specified in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Maximum number of AddressGroups to return per call.
+  pageToken: string, The value returned by the last `ListAddressGroupsResponse` Indicates that this is a continuation of a prior `ListAddressGroups` call, and that the system should return the next page of data.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response returned by the ListAddressGroups method.
+  "addressGroups": [ # List of AddressGroups resources.
+    { # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+      "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+      "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If there might be more results than those appearing in this response, then `next_page_token` is included. To get the next set of results, call this method again using the value of `next_page_token` as `page_token`.
+}
+
+ +
+ listReferences(addressGroup, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Lists references of an address group.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of references to return. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default. Server may return fewer items than requested. A caller should only rely on response's next_page_token to determine if there are more AddressGroupUsers left to be queried.
+  pageToken: string, The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response of the ListAddressGroupReferences method.
+  "addressGroupReferences": [ # A list of references that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # The Reference of AddressGroup.
+      "firewallPolicy": "A String", # FirewallPolicy that is using the Address Group.
+      "rulePriority": 42, # Rule priority of the FirewallPolicy that is using the Address Group.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If there might be more results than those appearing in this response, then `next_page_token` is included. To get the next set of results, call this method again using the value of `next_page_token` as `page_token`.
+}
+
+ +
+ listReferences_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ list_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates the parameters of a single address group.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.
+  "capacity": 42, # Required. Capacity of the Address Group
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. Free-text description of the resource.
+  "items": [ # Optional. List of items.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are "IPv4" or "IPV6".
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Optional. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the AddressGroup resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ removeItems(addressGroup, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Removes items from an address group.
+
+Args:
+  addressGroup: string, Required. A name of the AddressGroup to remove items from. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request used by the RemoveAddressGroupItems method.
+  "items": [ # Required. List of items to remove.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+
setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) 
Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1.projects.locations.gateways.html b/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1.projects.locations.gateways.html
index 4fd04ffb321..12258954221 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1.projects.locations.gateways.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1.projects.locations.gateways.html
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
     42,
   ],
-  "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+  "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
   "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
   "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
   "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
     42,
   ],
-  "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+  "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
   "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
   "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
   "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
         42,
       ],
-      "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+      "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
       "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
       "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
       "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
     42,
   ],
-  "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+  "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
   "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
   "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
   "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1beta1.projects.locations.gateways.html b/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1beta1.projects.locations.gateways.html
index 7459e2a5dcc..21eb6ea831f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1beta1.projects.locations.gateways.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/networkservices_v1beta1.projects.locations.gateways.html
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
     42,
   ],
-  "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+  "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
   "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
   "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
   "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
     42,
   ],
-  "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+  "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
   "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
   "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
   "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
         42,
       ],
-      "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+      "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
       "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
       "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
       "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "ports": [ # Required. One or more port numbers (1-65535), on which the Gateway will receive traffic. The proxy binds to the specified ports. Gateways of type 'SECURE_WEB_GATEWAY' are limited to 1 port. Gateways of type 'OPEN_MESH' listen on 0.0.0.0 and support multiple ports.
     42,
   ],
-  "scope": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
+  "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.
   "selfLink": "A String", # Output only. Server-defined URL of this resource
   "serverTlsPolicy": "A String", # Optional. A fully-qualified ServerTLSPolicy URL reference. Specifies how TLS traffic is terminated. If empty, TLS termination is disabled.
   "type": "A String", # Immutable. The type of the customer managed gateway. This field is required. If unspecified, an error is returned.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html b/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html
index 12de3b369b9..b469faa5529 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html
@@ -697,6 +697,20 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "vulnerability": { # An occurrence of a severity vulnerability on a resource. # Describes a security vulnerability.
         "cvssScore": 3.14, # Output only. The CVSS score of this vulnerability. CVSS score is on a scale of 0 - 10 where 0 indicates low severity and 10 indicates high severity.
+        "cvssV2": { # Common Vulnerability Scoring System. For details, see https://www.first.org/cvss/specification-document This is a message we will try to use for storing various versions of CVSS rather than making a separate proto for storing a specific version. # The cvss v2 score for the vulnerability.
+          "attackComplexity": "A String",
+          "attackVector": "A String", # Base Metrics Represents the intrinsic characteristics of a vulnerability that are constant over time and across user environments.
+          "authentication": "A String",
+          "availabilityImpact": "A String",
+          "baseScore": 3.14, # The base score is a function of the base metric scores.
+          "confidentialityImpact": "A String",
+          "exploitabilityScore": 3.14,
+          "impactScore": 3.14,
+          "integrityImpact": "A String",
+          "privilegesRequired": "A String",
+          "scope": "A String",
+          "userInteraction": "A String",
+        },
         "cvssVersion": "A String", # Output only. CVSS version used to populate cvss_score and severity.
         "cvssv3": { # Common Vulnerability Scoring System. For details, see https://www.first.org/cvss/specification-document This is a message we will try to use for storing various versions of CVSS rather than making a separate proto for storing a specific version. # The cvss v3 score for the vulnerability.
           "attackComplexity": "A String",
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1beta1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html b/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1beta1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html
index 82590150175..7616dfc82bc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1beta1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/ondemandscanning_v1beta1.projects.locations.scans.vulnerabilities.html
@@ -697,6 +697,20 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "vulnerability": { # An occurrence of a severity vulnerability on a resource. # Describes a security vulnerability.
         "cvssScore": 3.14, # Output only. The CVSS score of this vulnerability. CVSS score is on a scale of 0 - 10 where 0 indicates low severity and 10 indicates high severity.
+        "cvssV2": { # Common Vulnerability Scoring System. For details, see https://www.first.org/cvss/specification-document This is a message we will try to use for storing various versions of CVSS rather than making a separate proto for storing a specific version. # The cvss v2 score for the vulnerability.
+          "attackComplexity": "A String",
+          "attackVector": "A String", # Base Metrics Represents the intrinsic characteristics of a vulnerability that are constant over time and across user environments.
+          "authentication": "A String",
+          "availabilityImpact": "A String",
+          "baseScore": 3.14, # The base score is a function of the base metric scores.
+          "confidentialityImpact": "A String",
+          "exploitabilityScore": 3.14,
+          "impactScore": 3.14,
+          "integrityImpact": "A String",
+          "privilegesRequired": "A String",
+          "scope": "A String",
+          "userInteraction": "A String",
+        },
         "cvssVersion": "A String", # Output only. CVSS version used to populate cvss_score and severity.
         "cvssv3": { # Common Vulnerability Scoring System. For details, see https://www.first.org/cvss/specification-document This is a message we will try to use for storing various versions of CVSS rather than making a separate proto for storing a specific version. # The cvss v3 score for the vulnerability.
           "attackComplexity": "A String",
diff --git a/docs/dyn/paymentsresellersubscription_v1.partners.subscriptions.html b/docs/dyn/paymentsresellersubscription_v1.partners.subscriptions.html
index dda7510ba11..426e99bc9a4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/paymentsresellersubscription_v1.partners.subscriptions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/paymentsresellersubscription_v1.partners.subscriptions.html
@@ -132,6 +132,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
     "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
       { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+        "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+          "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+          "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+        },
         "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
         "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
         "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
@@ -255,6 +259,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
   "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
     { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+      "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+        "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+        "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+      },
       "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
       "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
       "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
@@ -371,6 +379,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
   "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
     { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+      "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+        "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+        "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+      },
       "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
       "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
       "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
@@ -500,6 +512,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
     "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
       { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+        "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+          "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+          "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+        },
         "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
         "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
         "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
@@ -658,6 +674,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
   "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
     { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+      "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+        "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+        "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+      },
       "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
       "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
       "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
@@ -775,6 +795,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
   "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
     { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+      "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+        "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+        "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+      },
       "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
       "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
       "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
@@ -891,6 +915,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
   "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
     { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+      "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+        "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+        "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+      },
       "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
       "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
       "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
@@ -1020,6 +1048,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "freeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End of the free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
     "lineItems": [ # Required. The line items of the subscription.
       { # Individual line item definition of a subscription.
+        "amount": { # Describes the amount unit including the currency code. # Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.
+          "amountMicros": "A String", # Required. Amount in micros (1_000_000 micros = 1 currency unit)
+          "currencyCode": "A String", # Required. Currency codes in accordance with [ISO-4217 Currency Codes] (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217). For example, USD.
+        },
         "description": "A String", # Output only. Description of this line item.
         "lineItemFreeTrialEndTime": "A String", # Output only. It is set only if the line item has its own free trial applied. End time of the line item free trial period, in ISO 8061 format. For example, "2019-08-31T17:28:54.564Z". It will be set the same as createTime if no free trial promotion is specified.
         "lineItemPromotionSpecs": [ # Optional. The promotions applied on the line item. It can be: - a free trial promotion, which overrides the subscription-level free trial promotion. - an introductory pricing promotion. When used as input in Create or Provision API, specify its resource name only.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.certificateRevocationLists.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.certificateRevocationLists.html
index b2fdb20666d..b80d117b67d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.certificateRevocationLists.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.certificateRevocationLists.html
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which this CertificateRevocationList was updated.
 }
 
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   updateMask: string, Required. A list of fields to be updated in this request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html
index 1e16e488d73..7cba27e23d0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Request message for CertificateAuthorityService.ActivateCertificateAuthority.
   "pemCaCertificate": "A String", # Required. The signed CA certificate issued from FetchCertificateAuthorityCsrResponse.pem_csr.
-  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   "subordinateConfig": { # Describes a subordinate CA's issuers. This is either a resource name to a known issuing CertificateAuthority, or a PEM issuer certificate chain. # Required. Must include information about the issuer of 'pem_ca_certificate', and any further issuers until the self-signed CA.
     "certificateAuthority": "A String", # Required. This can refer to a CertificateAuthority that was used to create a subordinate CertificateAuthority. This field is used for information and usability purposes only. The resource name is in the format `projects/*/locations/*/caPools/*/certificateAuthorities/*`.
     "pemIssuerChain": { # This message describes a subordinate CA's issuer certificate chain. This wrapper exists for compatibility reasons. # Required. Contains the PEM certificate chain for the issuers of this CertificateAuthority, but not pem certificate for this CA itself.
@@ -297,6 +297,33 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
         },
+        "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+          "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+          "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
         "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
           { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
             "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -396,6 +423,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -436,7 +490,7 @@ 
Method Details

 }
 
   certificateAuthorityId: string, Required. It must be unique within a location and match the regular expression `[a-zA-Z0-9_-]{1,63}`
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -473,7 +527,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Args:
   name: string, Required. The resource name for this CertificateAuthority in the format `projects/*/locations/*/caPools/*/certificateAuthorities/*`. (required)
   ignoreActiveCertificates: boolean, Optional. This field allows the CA to be deleted even if the CA has active certs. Active certs include both unrevoked and unexpired certs.
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   skipGracePeriod: boolean, Optional. If this flag is set, the Certificate Authority will be deleted as soon as possible without a 30-day grace period where undeletion would have been allowed. If you proceed, there will be no way to recover this CA.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -514,7 +568,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for CertificateAuthorityService.DisableCertificateAuthority.
-  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -556,7 +610,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for CertificateAuthorityService.EnableCertificateAuthority.
-  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -737,6 +791,33 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
         },
+        "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+          "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+          "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
         "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
           { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
             "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -836,6 +917,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1012,6 +1120,33 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
             },
+            "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+              "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+              "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
               { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
                 "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1111,6 +1246,33 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
           },
+          "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+            "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+            "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
             { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
               "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1296,6 +1458,33 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
         },
+        "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+          "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+          "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
         "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
           { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
             "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1395,6 +1584,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1434,7 +1650,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which this CertificateAuthority was last updated.
 }
 
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   updateMask: string, Required. A list of fields to be updated in this request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -1475,7 +1691,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for CertificateAuthorityService.UndeleteCertificateAuthority.
-  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html
index 551e61a46ff..6cf808f0d30 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html
@@ -219,6 +219,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -318,6 +345,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -468,6 +522,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -567,6 +648,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -720,6 +828,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -819,6 +954,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -978,6 +1140,33 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
           },
+          "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+            "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+            "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
             { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
               "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1077,6 +1266,33 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
           },
+          "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+            "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+            "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
             { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
               "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1245,6 +1461,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1344,6 +1587,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1373,7 +1643,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which this Certificate was updated.
 }
 
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   updateMask: string, Required. A list of fields to be updated in this request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -1492,6 +1762,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1591,6 +1888,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1632,7 +1956,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Request message for CertificateAuthorityService.RevokeCertificate.
   "reason": "A String", # Required. The RevocationReason for revoking this certificate.
-  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -1752,6 +2076,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -1851,6 +2202,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html
index 1d81ad1a2cc..558cd5a40af 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html
@@ -196,6 +196,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -240,7 +267,7 @@ 
Method Details

 }
 
   caPoolId: string, Required. It must be unique within a location and match the regular expression `[a-zA-Z0-9_-]{1,63}`
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -276,7 +303,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The resource name for this CaPool in the format `projects/*/locations/*/caPools/*`. (required)
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -316,7 +343,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for CertificateAuthorityService.FetchCaCerts.
-  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  "requestId": "A String", # Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -416,6 +443,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -592,6 +646,33 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
           },
+          "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+            "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+            "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
             { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
               "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -729,6 +810,33 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+        "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+        "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
       "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
         { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
           "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -772,7 +880,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "tier": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The Tier of this CaPool.
 }
 
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   updateMask: string, Required. A list of fields to be updated in this request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.certificateTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.certificateTemplates.html
index 9cd30fb1934..923338d251f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.certificateTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.certificateTemplates.html
@@ -195,6 +195,33 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
     },
+    "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+      "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+      "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
     "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
       { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
         "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -207,7 +234,7 @@ 
Method Details

 }
 
   certificateTemplateId: string, Required. It must be unique within a location and match the regular expression `[a-zA-Z0-9_-]{1,63}`
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -243,7 +270,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The resource name for this CertificateTemplate in the format `projects/*/locations/*/certificateTemplates/*`. (required)
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -363,6 +390,33 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
     },
+    "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+      "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+      "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
     "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
       { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
         "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -519,6 +573,33 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
         },
+        "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+          "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+          "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
         "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
           { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
             "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -636,6 +717,33 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
     },
+    "nameConstraints": { # Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10 # Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension.
+      "critical": True or False, # Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.
+      "excludedDnsNames": [ # Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedIpRanges": [ # Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "excludedUris": [ # Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedDnsNames": [ # Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedEmailAddresses": [ # Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedIpRanges": [ # Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "permittedUris": [ # Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
     "policyIds": [ # Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.
       { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.
         "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
@@ -647,7 +755,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which this CertificateTemplate was updated.
 }
 
-  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
   updateMask: string, Required. A list of fields to be updated in this request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.assessments.html b/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.assessments.html
index 227548fd357..e62bca83ee3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.assessments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.assessments.html
@@ -99,11 +99,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "reasons": [ # Optional. Optional reasons for the annotation that will be assigned to the Event.
     "A String",
   ],
-  "transactionEvent": { # Describes an event in the lifecycle of a payment transaction. # Optional. If the Assessment is part of a Payment Transaction, provide details on Payment Lifecycle Events that occur in the Transaction.
+  "transactionEvent": { # Describes an event in the lifecycle of a payment transaction. # Optional. If the assessment is part of a payment transaction, provide details on payment lifecycle events that occur in the transaction.
     "eventTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp when this transaction event occurred; otherwise assumed to be the time of the API call.
     "eventType": "A String", # Optional. The type of this transaction event.
-    "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason or standardized code which corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. E.g. a CHARGEBACK Event with code 4553.
-    "value": 3.14, # Optional. The value that corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. E.g. A refund event where $5.00 was refunded. Currency is obtained from the original transaction data.
+    "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason or standardized code that corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. For example, a CHARGEBACK event with code 6005.
+    "value": 3.14, # Optional. The value that corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. For example, a refund event where $5.00 was refunded. Currency is obtained from the original transaction data.
   },
 }
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html
index e8157b05e47..c32e2f174ba 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html
@@ -132,6 +132,9 @@ 
Method Details

   "alternativeLocationId": "A String", # Optional. If specified, at least one node will be provisioned in this zone in addition to the zone specified in location_id. Only applicable to standard tier. If provided, it must be a different zone from the one provided in [location_id]. Additional nodes beyond the first 2 will be placed in zones selected by the service.
   "authEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether OSS Redis AUTH is enabled for the instance. If set to "true" AUTH is enabled on the instance. Default value is "false" meaning AUTH is disabled.
   "authorizedNetwork": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Google Compute Engine [network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. If left unspecified, the `default` network will be used.
+  "availableMaintenanceVersions": [ # Optional. The available maintenance versions that an instance could update to.
+    "A String",
+  ],
   "connectMode": "A String", # Optional. The network connect mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, the connect mode defaults to DIRECT_PEERING.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the instance was created.
   "currentLocationId": "A String", # Output only. The current zone where the Redis primary node is located. In basic tier, this will always be the same as [location_id]. In standard tier, this can be the zone of any node in the instance.
@@ -165,6 +168,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "scheduleDeadlineTime": "A String", # Output only. The deadline that the maintenance schedule start time can not go beyond, including reschedule.
     "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The start time of any upcoming scheduled maintenance for this instance.
   },
+  "maintenanceVersion": "A String", # Optional. The self service update maintenance version. The version is date based such as "20210712_00_00".
   "memorySizeGb": 42, # Required. Redis memory size in GiB.
   "name": "A String", # Required. Unique name of the resource in this scope including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/instances/{instance_id}` Note: Redis instances are managed and addressed at regional level so location_id here refers to a GCP region; however, users may choose which specific zone (or collection of zones for cross-zone instances) an instance should be provisioned in. Refer to location_id and alternative_location_id fields for more details.
   "nodes": [ # Output only. Info per node.
@@ -380,6 +384,9 @@ 
Method Details

   "alternativeLocationId": "A String", # Optional. If specified, at least one node will be provisioned in this zone in addition to the zone specified in location_id. Only applicable to standard tier. If provided, it must be a different zone from the one provided in [location_id]. Additional nodes beyond the first 2 will be placed in zones selected by the service.
   "authEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether OSS Redis AUTH is enabled for the instance. If set to "true" AUTH is enabled on the instance. Default value is "false" meaning AUTH is disabled.
   "authorizedNetwork": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Google Compute Engine [network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. If left unspecified, the `default` network will be used.
+  "availableMaintenanceVersions": [ # Optional. The available maintenance versions that an instance could update to.
+    "A String",
+  ],
   "connectMode": "A String", # Optional. The network connect mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, the connect mode defaults to DIRECT_PEERING.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the instance was created.
   "currentLocationId": "A String", # Output only. The current zone where the Redis primary node is located. In basic tier, this will always be the same as [location_id]. In standard tier, this can be the zone of any node in the instance.
@@ -413,6 +420,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "scheduleDeadlineTime": "A String", # Output only. The deadline that the maintenance schedule start time can not go beyond, including reschedule.
     "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The start time of any upcoming scheduled maintenance for this instance.
   },
+  "maintenanceVersion": "A String", # Optional. The self service update maintenance version. The version is date based such as "20210712_00_00".
   "memorySizeGb": 42, # Required. Redis memory size in GiB.
   "name": "A String", # Required. Unique name of the resource in this scope including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/instances/{instance_id}` Note: Redis instances are managed and addressed at regional level so location_id here refers to a GCP region; however, users may choose which specific zone (or collection of zones for cross-zone instances) an instance should be provisioned in. Refer to location_id and alternative_location_id fields for more details.
   "nodes": [ # Output only. Info per node.
@@ -545,6 +553,9 @@ 
Method Details

       "alternativeLocationId": "A String", # Optional. If specified, at least one node will be provisioned in this zone in addition to the zone specified in location_id. Only applicable to standard tier. If provided, it must be a different zone from the one provided in [location_id]. Additional nodes beyond the first 2 will be placed in zones selected by the service.
       "authEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether OSS Redis AUTH is enabled for the instance. If set to "true" AUTH is enabled on the instance. Default value is "false" meaning AUTH is disabled.
       "authorizedNetwork": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Google Compute Engine [network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. If left unspecified, the `default` network will be used.
+      "availableMaintenanceVersions": [ # Optional. The available maintenance versions that an instance could update to.
+        "A String",
+      ],
       "connectMode": "A String", # Optional. The network connect mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, the connect mode defaults to DIRECT_PEERING.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the instance was created.
       "currentLocationId": "A String", # Output only. The current zone where the Redis primary node is located. In basic tier, this will always be the same as [location_id]. In standard tier, this can be the zone of any node in the instance.
@@ -578,6 +589,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "scheduleDeadlineTime": "A String", # Output only. The deadline that the maintenance schedule start time can not go beyond, including reschedule.
         "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The start time of any upcoming scheduled maintenance for this instance.
       },
+      "maintenanceVersion": "A String", # Optional. The self service update maintenance version. The version is date based such as "20210712_00_00".
       "memorySizeGb": 42, # Required. Redis memory size in GiB.
       "name": "A String", # Required. Unique name of the resource in this scope including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/instances/{instance_id}` Note: Redis instances are managed and addressed at regional level so location_id here refers to a GCP region; however, users may choose which specific zone (or collection of zones for cross-zone instances) an instance should be provisioned in. Refer to location_id and alternative_location_id fields for more details.
       "nodes": [ # Output only. Info per node.
@@ -656,6 +668,9 @@ 
Method Details

   "alternativeLocationId": "A String", # Optional. If specified, at least one node will be provisioned in this zone in addition to the zone specified in location_id. Only applicable to standard tier. If provided, it must be a different zone from the one provided in [location_id]. Additional nodes beyond the first 2 will be placed in zones selected by the service.
   "authEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether OSS Redis AUTH is enabled for the instance. If set to "true" AUTH is enabled on the instance. Default value is "false" meaning AUTH is disabled.
   "authorizedNetwork": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Google Compute Engine [network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. If left unspecified, the `default` network will be used.
+  "availableMaintenanceVersions": [ # Optional. The available maintenance versions that an instance could update to.
+    "A String",
+  ],
   "connectMode": "A String", # Optional. The network connect mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, the connect mode defaults to DIRECT_PEERING.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the instance was created.
   "currentLocationId": "A String", # Output only. The current zone where the Redis primary node is located. In basic tier, this will always be the same as [location_id]. In standard tier, this can be the zone of any node in the instance.
@@ -689,6 +704,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "scheduleDeadlineTime": "A String", # Output only. The deadline that the maintenance schedule start time can not go beyond, including reschedule.
     "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The start time of any upcoming scheduled maintenance for this instance.
   },
+  "maintenanceVersion": "A String", # Optional. The self service update maintenance version. The version is date based such as "20210712_00_00".
   "memorySizeGb": 42, # Required. Redis memory size in GiB.
   "name": "A String", # Required. Unique name of the resource in this scope including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/instances/{instance_id}` Note: Redis instances are managed and addressed at regional level so location_id here refers to a GCP region; however, users may choose which specific zone (or collection of zones for cross-zone instances) an instance should be provisioned in. Refer to location_id and alternative_location_id fields for more details.
   "nodes": [ # Output only. Info per node.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html
index 68abcc7fb3b..17c6309d628 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -226,12 +226,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -262,12 +262,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
@@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
               "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
               },
               "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -410,12 +410,12 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 ],
                 "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
               "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             },
@@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
               "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
               },
               "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -446,12 +446,12 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 ],
                 "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
               "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html
index ba0a6a41d8a..9c4e553cdf3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
         "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
         },
         "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -158,12 +158,12 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
           "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
         "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
       },
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
         "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
         },
         "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -194,12 +194,12 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
           "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
         "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
       },
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -348,12 +348,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
@@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -384,12 +384,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html
index bfd843d8d5d..af09bc73c93 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -214,12 +214,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -250,12 +250,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
@@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -483,12 +483,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -519,12 +519,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
@@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
                 "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
                 "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                  "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                  "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                   "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
                 },
                 "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -738,12 +738,12 @@ 
Method Details

                     },
                   ],
                   "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 },
                 "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
                 "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
                 "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 },
                 "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               },
@@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
                 "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
                 "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                  "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                  "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                   "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
                 },
                 "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -774,12 +774,12 @@ 
Method Details

                     },
                   ],
                   "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 },
                 "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
                 "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
                 "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                  "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 },
                 "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               },
@@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -952,12 +952,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
@@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -988,12 +988,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html
index 84737c2f1d7..424137adc7d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -203,12 +203,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -239,12 +239,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
@@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -489,12 +489,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
@@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -525,12 +525,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
@@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
               "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
               },
               "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -762,12 +762,12 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 ],
                 "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
               "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             },
@@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
               "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
                 "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
               },
               "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -798,12 +798,12 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 ],
                 "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
               "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
               "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+                "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               },
               "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             },
@@ -981,7 +981,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -992,12 +992,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
@@ -1017,7 +1017,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
           "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
           },
           "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -1028,12 +1028,12 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             ],
             "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
           "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+            "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           },
           "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html
index e6051550804..588ec5f27ca 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
         "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
         },
         "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -197,12 +197,12 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
           "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
         "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
       },
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
         "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
           "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
         },
         "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -233,12 +233,12 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
           "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
         "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
         "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+          "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
         },
         "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
       },
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "livenessProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Periodic probe of container liveness. Container will be restarted if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -377,12 +377,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "startupProbe": { # Probe describes a health check to be performed against a container to determine whether it is alive or ready to receive traffic. # Startup probe of application within the container. All other probes are disabled if a startup probe is provided, until it succeeds. Container will not be added to service endpoints if the probe fails. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "failureThreshold": 42, # Minimum consecutive failures for the probe to be considered failed after having succeeded. Defaults to 3. Minimum value is 1.
             "grpc": { # GRPCAction describes an action involving a GRPC port. # GRPC specifies an action involving a gRPC port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
               "service": "A String", # Service is the name of the service to place in the gRPC HealthCheckRequest (see https://github.com/grpc/grpc/blob/master/doc/health-checking.md). If this is not specified, the default behavior is defined by gRPC.
             },
             "httpGet": { # HTTPGetAction describes an action based on HTTP Get requests. # HTTPGet specifies the http request to perform. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
@@ -413,12 +413,12 @@ 
Method Details

                 },
               ],
               "path": "A String", # Path to access on the HTTP server. Defaults to '/'.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "initialDelaySeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after the container has started before the probe is initiated. Defaults to 0 seconds. Minimum value is 0. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
             "periodSeconds": 42, # How often (in seconds) to perform the probe. Default to 10 seconds. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value for liveness probe is 3600. Maximum value for startup probe is 240. Must be greater or equal than timeout_seconds.
             "tcpSocket": { # TCPSocketAction describes an action based on opening a socket # TCPSocket specifies an action involving a TCP port. Exactly one of httpGet, tcpSocket, or grpc must be specified.
-              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.
+              "port": 42, # Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.
             },
             "timeoutSeconds": 42, # Number of seconds after which the probe times out. Defaults to 1 second. Minimum value is 1. Maximum value is 3600. Must be smaller than period_seconds. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/workloads/pods/pod-lifecycle#container-probes
           },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html
index f983dd3342b..1a1c4f74621 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html
@@ -481,9 +481,6 @@ 
Method Details

       "A String",
     ],
   },
-  "esfMigrationServerOverride": { # Esf migration server override during chemist check v2 migration # Esf migration server override during check v2 migration. This is temporary and Chemist internal only.
-    "overrideMode": "A String", # Esf migration override mode
-  },
   "operationId": "A String", # The same operation_id value used in the CheckRequest. Used for logging and diagnostics purposes.
   "quotaInfo": { # Contains the quota information for a quota check response. # Quota information for the check request associated with this response.
     "limitExceeded": [ # Quota Metrics that have exceeded quota limits. For QuotaGroup-based quota, this is QuotaGroup.name For QuotaLimit-based quota, this is QuotaLimit.name See: google.api.Quota Deprecated: Use quota_metrics to get per quota group limit exceeded status.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html
index ee06df47066..158d9750c2f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html
@@ -211,9 +211,6 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Response message for the Check method.
-  "esfMigrationServerOverride": { # Esf migration server override during chemist check v2 migration # Esf migration server override during check v2 migration. This is temporary and Chemist internal only.
-    "overrideMode": "A String", # Esf migration override mode
-  },
   "headers": { # Returns a set of request contexts generated from the `CheckRequest`.
     "a_key": "A String",
   },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html
index cb028ee7300..2282c43161a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html
@@ -777,7 +777,1014 @@ 
Method Details

           "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
           "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
           "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-          "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
+          "notesPage": { # A page in a presentation. # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
+            "layoutProperties": { # The properties of Page are only relevant for pages with page_type LAYOUT. # Layout specific properties. Only set if page_type = LAYOUT.
+              "displayName": "A String", # The human-readable name of the layout.
+              "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this layout is based on.
+              "name": "A String", # The name of the layout.
+            },
+            "masterProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type MASTER. # Master specific properties. Only set if page_type = MASTER.
+              "displayName": "A String", # The human-readable name of the master.
+            },
+            "notesProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type NOTES. # Notes specific properties. Only set if page_type = NOTES.
+              "speakerNotesObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the shape on this notes page that contains the speaker notes for the corresponding slide. The actual shape may not always exist on the notes page. Inserting text using this object ID will automatically create the shape. In this case, the actual shape may have different object ID. The `GetPresentation` or `GetPage` action will always return the latest object ID.
+            },
+            "objectId": "A String", # The object ID for this page. Object IDs used by Page and PageElement share the same namespace.
+            "pageElements": [ # The page elements rendered on the page.
+              { # A visual element rendered on a page.
+                "description": "A String", # The description of the page element. Combined with title to display alt text. The field is not supported for Group elements.
+                "elementGroup": { # A PageElement kind representing a joined collection of PageElements. # A collection of page elements joined as a single unit.
+                  "children": [ # The collection of elements in the group. The minimum size of a group is 2.
+                    # Object with schema name: PageElement
+                  ],
+                },
+                "image": { # A PageElement kind representing an image. # An image page element.
+                  "contentUrl": "A String", # An URL to an image with a default lifetime of 30 minutes. This URL is tagged with the account of the requester. Anyone with the URL effectively accesses the image as the original requester. Access to the image may be lost if the presentation's sharing settings change.
+                  "imageProperties": { # The properties of the Image. # The properties of the image.
+                    "brightness": 3.14, # The brightness effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                    "contrast": 3.14, # The contrast effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                    "cropProperties": { # The crop properties of an object enclosed in a container. For example, an Image. The crop properties is represented by the offsets of four edges which define a crop rectangle. The offsets are measured in percentage from the corresponding edges of the object's original bounding rectangle towards inside, relative to the object's original dimensions. - If the offset is in the interval (0, 1), the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned inside of the object's original bounding rectangle. - If the offset is negative or greater than 1, the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned outside of the object's original bounding rectangle. - If the left edge of the crop rectangle is on the right side of its right edge, the object will be flipped horizontally. - If the top edge of the crop rectangle is below its bottom edge, the object will be flipped vertically. - If all offsets and rotation angle is 0, the object is not cropped. After cropping, the content in the crop rectangle will be stretched to fit its container. # The crop properties of the image. If not set, the image is not cropped. This property is read-only.
+                      "angle": 3.14, # The rotation angle of the crop window around its center, in radians. Rotation angle is applied after the offset.
+                      "bottomOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the bottom edge of the crop rectangle that is located above the original bounding rectangle bottom edge, relative to the object's original height.
+                      "leftOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the left edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the right of the original bounding rectangle left edge, relative to the object's original width.
+                      "rightOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the right edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the left of the original bounding rectangle right edge, relative to the object's original width.
+                      "topOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the top edge of the crop rectangle that is located below the original bounding rectangle top edge, relative to the object's original height.
+                    },
+                    "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the image. If unset, there is no link.
+                      "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                      "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                      "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                      "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                    },
+                    "outline": { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the image. If not set, the image has no outline.
+                      "dashStyle": "A String", # The dash style of the outline.
+                      "outlineFill": { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                        "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                          "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                          "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                            "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                      "propertyState": "A String", # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      "weight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "recolor": { # A recolor effect applied on an image. # The recolor effect of the image. If not set, the image is not recolored. This property is read-only.
+                      "name": "A String", # The name of the recolor effect. The name is determined from the `recolor_stops` by matching the gradient against the colors in the page's current color scheme. This property is read-only.
+                      "recolorStops": [ # The recolor effect is represented by a gradient, which is a list of color stops. The colors in the gradient will replace the corresponding colors at the same position in the color palette and apply to the image. This property is read-only.
+                        { # A color and position in a gradient band.
+                          "alpha": 3.14, # The alpha value of this color in the gradient band. Defaults to 1.0, fully opaque.
+                          "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color of the gradient stop.
+                            "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                          "position": 3.14, # The relative position of the color stop in the gradient band measured in percentage. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0].
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                    "shadow": { # The shadow properties of a page element. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The shadow of the image. If not set, the image has no shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      "alignment": "A String", # The alignment point of the shadow, that sets the origin for translate, scale and skew of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      "alpha": 3.14, # The alpha of the shadow's color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      "blurRadius": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The radius of the shadow blur. The larger the radius, the more diffuse the shadow becomes.
+                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                      "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The shadow color value.
+                        "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                          "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                        },
+                        "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                      },
+                      "propertyState": "A String", # The shadow property state. Updating the shadow on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no shadow on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other shadow fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      "rotateWithShape": True or False, # Whether the shadow should rotate with the shape. This property is read-only.
+                      "transform": { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x', y') according to: x' x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x' = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y' = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # Transform that encodes the translate, scale, and skew of the shadow, relative to the alignment position.
+                        "scaleX": 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                        "scaleY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                        "shearX": 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                        "shearY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                        "translateX": 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                        "translateY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for translate elements.
+                      },
+                      "type": "A String", # The type of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                    "transparency": 3.14, # The transparency effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect and 1 means completely transparent. This property is read-only.
+                  },
+                  "placeholder": { # The placeholder information that uniquely identifies a placeholder shape. # Placeholders are page elements that inherit from corresponding placeholders on layouts and masters. If set, the image is a placeholder image and any inherited properties can be resolved by looking at the parent placeholder identified by the Placeholder.parent_object_id field.
+                    "index": 42, # The index of the placeholder. If the same placeholder types are present in the same page, they would have different index values.
+                    "parentObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of this shape's parent placeholder. If unset, the parent placeholder shape does not exist, so the shape does not inherit properties from any other shape.
+                    "type": "A String", # The type of the placeholder.
+                  },
+                  "sourceUrl": "A String", # The source URL is the URL used to insert the image. The source URL can be empty.
+                },
+                "line": { # A PageElement kind representing a non-connector line, straight connector, curved connector, or bent connector. # A line page element.
+                  "lineCategory": "A String", # The category of the line. It matches the `category` specified in CreateLineRequest, and can be updated with UpdateLineCategoryRequest.
+                  "lineProperties": { # The properties of the Line. When unset, these fields default to values that match the appearance of new lines created in the Slides editor. # The properties of the line.
+                    "dashStyle": "A String", # The dash style of the line.
+                    "endArrow": "A String", # The style of the arrow at the end of the line.
+                    "endConnection": { # The properties for one end of a Line connection. # The connection at the end of the line. If unset, there is no connection. Only lines with a Type indicating it is a "connector" can have an `end_connection`.
+                      "connectedObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the connected page element. Some page elements, such as groups, tables, and lines do not have connection sites and therefore cannot be connected to a connector line.
+                      "connectionSiteIndex": 42, # The index of the connection site on the connected page element. In most cases, it corresponds to the predefined connection site index from the ECMA-376 standard. More information on those connection sites can be found in the description of the "cnx" attribute in section 20.1.9.9 and Annex H. "Predefined DrawingML Shape and Text Geometries" of "Office Open XML File Formats-Fundamentals and Markup Language Reference", part 1 of [ECMA-376 5th edition] (http://www.ecma-international.org/publications/standards/Ecma-376.htm). The position of each connection site can also be viewed from Slides editor.
+                    },
+                    "lineFill": { # The fill of the line. # The fill of the line. The default line fill matches the defaults for new lines created in the Slides editor.
+                      "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                        "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                        "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                          "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                            "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          },
+                          "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the line. If unset, there is no link.
+                      "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                      "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                      "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                      "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                    },
+                    "startArrow": "A String", # The style of the arrow at the beginning of the line.
+                    "startConnection": { # The properties for one end of a Line connection. # The connection at the beginning of the line. If unset, there is no connection. Only lines with a Type indicating it is a "connector" can have a `start_connection`.
+                      "connectedObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the connected page element. Some page elements, such as groups, tables, and lines do not have connection sites and therefore cannot be connected to a connector line.
+                      "connectionSiteIndex": 42, # The index of the connection site on the connected page element. In most cases, it corresponds to the predefined connection site index from the ECMA-376 standard. More information on those connection sites can be found in the description of the "cnx" attribute in section 20.1.9.9 and Annex H. "Predefined DrawingML Shape and Text Geometries" of "Office Open XML File Formats-Fundamentals and Markup Language Reference", part 1 of [ECMA-376 5th edition] (http://www.ecma-international.org/publications/standards/Ecma-376.htm). The position of each connection site can also be viewed from Slides editor.
+                    },
+                    "weight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the line.
+                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "lineType": "A String", # The type of the line.
+                },
+                "objectId": "A String", # The object ID for this page element. Object IDs used by google.apps.slides.v1.Page and google.apps.slides.v1.PageElement share the same namespace.
+                "shape": { # A PageElement kind representing a generic shape that does not have a more specific classification. # A generic shape.
+                  "placeholder": { # The placeholder information that uniquely identifies a placeholder shape. # Placeholders are page elements that inherit from corresponding placeholders on layouts and masters. If set, the shape is a placeholder shape and any inherited properties can be resolved by looking at the parent placeholder identified by the Placeholder.parent_object_id field.
+                    "index": 42, # The index of the placeholder. If the same placeholder types are present in the same page, they would have different index values.
+                    "parentObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of this shape's parent placeholder. If unset, the parent placeholder shape does not exist, so the shape does not inherit properties from any other shape.
+                    "type": "A String", # The type of the placeholder.
+                  },
+                  "shapeProperties": { # The properties of a Shape. If the shape is a placeholder shape as determined by the placeholder field, then these properties may be inherited from a parent placeholder shape. Determining the rendered value of the property depends on the corresponding property_state field value. Any text autofit settings on the shape are automatically deactivated by requests that can impact how text fits in the shape. # The properties of the shape.
+                    "autofit": { # The autofit properties of a Shape. # The autofit properties of the shape. This property is only set for shapes that allow text.
+                      "autofitType": "A String", # The autofit type of the shape. If the autofit type is AUTOFIT_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED, the autofit type is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. The field is automatically set to NONE if a request is made that might affect text fitting within its bounding text box. In this case the font_scale is applied to the font_size and the line_spacing_reduction is applied to the line_spacing. Both properties are also reset to default values.
+                      "fontScale": 3.14, # The font scale applied to the shape. For shapes with autofit_type NONE or SHAPE_AUTOFIT, this value is the default value of 1. For TEXT_AUTOFIT, this value multiplied by the font_size gives the font size that is rendered in the editor. This property is read-only.
+                      "lineSpacingReduction": 3.14, # The line spacing reduction applied to the shape. For shapes with autofit_type NONE or SHAPE_AUTOFIT, this value is the default value of 0. For TEXT_AUTOFIT, this value subtracted from the line_spacing gives the line spacing that is rendered in the editor. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                    "contentAlignment": "A String", # The alignment of the content in the shape. If unspecified, the alignment is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, the default alignment matches the alignment for new shapes created in the Slides editor.
+                    "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the shape. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent placeholders.
+                      "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                      "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                      "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                      "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                    },
+                    "outline": { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the shape. If unset, the outline is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, then the default outline depends on the shape type, matching the defaults for new shapes created in the Slides editor.
+                      "dashStyle": "A String", # The dash style of the outline.
+                      "outlineFill": { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                        "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                          "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                          "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                            "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                      "propertyState": "A String", # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      "weight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "shadow": { # The shadow properties of a page element. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The shadow properties of the shape. If unset, the shadow is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, then the default shadow matches the defaults for new shapes created in the Slides editor. This property is read-only.
+                      "alignment": "A String", # The alignment point of the shadow, that sets the origin for translate, scale and skew of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      "alpha": 3.14, # The alpha of the shadow's color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      "blurRadius": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The radius of the shadow blur. The larger the radius, the more diffuse the shadow becomes.
+                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                      "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The shadow color value.
+                        "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                          "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                        },
+                        "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                      },
+                      "propertyState": "A String", # The shadow property state. Updating the shadow on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no shadow on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other shadow fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      "rotateWithShape": True or False, # Whether the shadow should rotate with the shape. This property is read-only.
+                      "transform": { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x', y') according to: x' x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x' = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y' = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # Transform that encodes the translate, scale, and skew of the shadow, relative to the alignment position.
+                        "scaleX": 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                        "scaleY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                        "shearX": 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                        "shearY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                        "translateX": 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                        "translateY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for translate elements.
+                      },
+                      "type": "A String", # The type of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                    "shapeBackgroundFill": { # The shape background fill. # The background fill of the shape. If unset, the background fill is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, then the default background fill depends on the shape type, matching the defaults for new shapes created in the Slides editor.
+                      "propertyState": "A String", # The background fill property state. Updating the fill on a shape will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no fill on a shape, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other fill fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                        "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                        "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                          "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                            "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          },
+                          "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "shapeType": "A String", # The type of the shape.
+                  "text": { # The general text content. The text must reside in a compatible shape (e.g. text box or rectangle) or a table cell in a page. # The text content of the shape.
+                    "lists": { # The bulleted lists contained in this text, keyed by list ID.
+                      "a_key": { # A List describes the look and feel of bullets belonging to paragraphs associated with a list. A paragraph that is part of a list has an implicit reference to that list's ID.
+                        "listId": "A String", # The ID of the list.
+                        "nestingLevel": { # A map of nesting levels to the properties of bullets at the associated level. A list has at most nine levels of nesting, so the possible values for the keys of this map are 0 through 8, inclusive.
+                          "a_key": { # Contains properties describing the look and feel of a list bullet at a given level of nesting.
+                            "bulletStyle": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The style of a bullet at this level of nesting.
+                              "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                              "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                              "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                              "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                              },
+                              "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                              "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                              },
+                              "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                              "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                              "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                              "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                              },
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "textElements": [ # The text contents broken down into its component parts, including styling information. This property is read-only.
+                      { # A TextElement describes the content of a range of indices in the text content of a Shape or TableCell.
+                        "autoText": { # A TextElement kind that represents auto text. # A TextElement representing a spot in the text that is dynamically replaced with content that can change over time.
+                          "content": "A String", # The rendered content of this auto text, if available.
+                          "style": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this auto text.
+                            "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                            "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                            "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                            "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                            "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                              "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                              "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                              "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                              "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                            },
+                            "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                            "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                            "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                            "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                              "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                              "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                            },
+                          },
+                          "type": "A String", # The type of this auto text.
+                        },
+                        "endIndex": 42, # The zero-based end index of this text element, exclusive, in Unicode code units.
+                        "paragraphMarker": { # A TextElement kind that represents the beginning of a new paragraph. # A marker representing the beginning of a new paragraph. The `start_index` and `end_index` of this TextElement represent the range of the paragraph. Other TextElements with an index range contained inside this paragraph's range are considered to be part of this paragraph. The range of indices of two separate paragraphs will never overlap.
+                          "bullet": { # Describes the bullet of a paragraph. # The bullet for this paragraph. If not present, the paragraph does not belong to a list.
+                            "bulletStyle": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The paragraph specific text style applied to this bullet.
+                              "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                              "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                              "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                              "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                              },
+                              "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                              "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                              },
+                              "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                              "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                              "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                              "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "glyph": "A String", # The rendered bullet glyph for this paragraph.
+                            "listId": "A String", # The ID of the list this paragraph belongs to.
+                            "nestingLevel": 42, # The nesting level of this paragraph in the list.
+                          },
+                          "style": { # Styles that apply to a whole paragraph. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these paragraph styles may be inherited from the parent. Which paragraph styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A paragraph not in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A paragraph in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited paragraph styles are represented as unset fields in this message. # The paragraph's style
+                            "alignment": "A String", # The text alignment for this paragraph.
+                            "direction": "A String", # The text direction of this paragraph. If unset, the value defaults to LEFT_TO_RIGHT since text direction is not inherited.
+                            "indentEnd": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the end of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            "indentFirstLine": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of indentation for the start of the first line of the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            "indentStart": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the start of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            "lineSpacing": 3.14, # The amount of space between lines, as a percentage of normal, where normal is represented as 100.0. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                            "spaceAbove": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space above the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            "spaceBelow": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space below the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            "spacingMode": "A String", # The spacing mode for the paragraph.
+                          },
+                        },
+                        "startIndex": 42, # The zero-based start index of this text element, in Unicode code units.
+                        "textRun": { # A TextElement kind that represents a run of text that all has the same styling. # A TextElement representing a run of text where all of the characters in the run have the same TextStyle. The `start_index` and `end_index` of TextRuns will always be fully contained in the index range of a single `paragraph_marker` TextElement. In other words, a TextRun will never span multiple paragraphs.
+                          "content": "A String", # The text of this run.
+                          "style": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this run.
+                            "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                            "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                            "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                            "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                            "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                              "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                              "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                              "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                              "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                            },
+                            "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                            "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                            "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                            "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                              "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                              "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                    ],
+                  },
+                },
+                "sheetsChart": { # A PageElement kind representing a linked chart embedded from Google Sheets. # A linked chart embedded from Google Sheets. Unlinked charts are represented as images.
+                  "chartId": 42, # The ID of the specific chart in the Google Sheets spreadsheet that is embedded.
+                  "contentUrl": "A String", # The URL of an image of the embedded chart, with a default lifetime of 30 minutes. This URL is tagged with the account of the requester. Anyone with the URL effectively accesses the image as the original requester. Access to the image may be lost if the presentation's sharing settings change.
+                  "sheetsChartProperties": { # The properties of the SheetsChart. # The properties of the Sheets chart.
+                    "chartImageProperties": { # The properties of the Image. # The properties of the embedded chart image.
+                      "brightness": 3.14, # The brightness effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                      "contrast": 3.14, # The contrast effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                      "cropProperties": { # The crop properties of an object enclosed in a container. For example, an Image. The crop properties is represented by the offsets of four edges which define a crop rectangle. The offsets are measured in percentage from the corresponding edges of the object's original bounding rectangle towards inside, relative to the object's original dimensions. - If the offset is in the interval (0, 1), the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned inside of the object's original bounding rectangle. - If the offset is negative or greater than 1, the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned outside of the object's original bounding rectangle. - If the left edge of the crop rectangle is on the right side of its right edge, the object will be flipped horizontally. - If the top edge of the crop rectangle is below its bottom edge, the object will be flipped vertically. - If all offsets and rotation angle is 0, the object is not cropped. After cropping, the content in the crop rectangle will be stretched to fit its container. # The crop properties of the image. If not set, the image is not cropped. This property is read-only.
+                        "angle": 3.14, # The rotation angle of the crop window around its center, in radians. Rotation angle is applied after the offset.
+                        "bottomOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the bottom edge of the crop rectangle that is located above the original bounding rectangle bottom edge, relative to the object's original height.
+                        "leftOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the left edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the right of the original bounding rectangle left edge, relative to the object's original width.
+                        "rightOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the right edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the left of the original bounding rectangle right edge, relative to the object's original width.
+                        "topOffset": 3.14, # The offset specifies the top edge of the crop rectangle that is located below the original bounding rectangle top edge, relative to the object's original height.
+                      },
+                      "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the image. If unset, there is no link.
+                        "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                        "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                        "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                        "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                      },
+                      "outline": { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the image. If not set, the image has no outline.
+                        "dashStyle": "A String", # The dash style of the outline.
+                        "outlineFill": { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                          "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                            "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                            "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                              "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              },
+                              "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                        "propertyState": "A String", # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                        "weight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                          "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                          "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                        },
+                      },
+                      "recolor": { # A recolor effect applied on an image. # The recolor effect of the image. If not set, the image is not recolored. This property is read-only.
+                        "name": "A String", # The name of the recolor effect. The name is determined from the `recolor_stops` by matching the gradient against the colors in the page's current color scheme. This property is read-only.
+                        "recolorStops": [ # The recolor effect is represented by a gradient, which is a list of color stops. The colors in the gradient will replace the corresponding colors at the same position in the color palette and apply to the image. This property is read-only.
+                          { # A color and position in a gradient band.
+                            "alpha": 3.14, # The alpha value of this color in the gradient band. Defaults to 1.0, fully opaque.
+                            "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color of the gradient stop.
+                              "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              },
+                              "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                            },
+                            "position": 3.14, # The relative position of the color stop in the gradient band measured in percentage. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0].
+                          },
+                        ],
+                      },
+                      "shadow": { # The shadow properties of a page element. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The shadow of the image. If not set, the image has no shadow. This property is read-only.
+                        "alignment": "A String", # The alignment point of the shadow, that sets the origin for translate, scale and skew of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                        "alpha": 3.14, # The alpha of the shadow's color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                        "blurRadius": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The radius of the shadow blur. The larger the radius, the more diffuse the shadow becomes.
+                          "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                          "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                        },
+                        "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The shadow color value.
+                          "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                            "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          },
+                          "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                        },
+                        "propertyState": "A String", # The shadow property state. Updating the shadow on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no shadow on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other shadow fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                        "rotateWithShape": True or False, # Whether the shadow should rotate with the shape. This property is read-only.
+                        "transform": { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x', y') according to: x' x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x' = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y' = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # Transform that encodes the translate, scale, and skew of the shadow, relative to the alignment position.
+                          "scaleX": 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                          "scaleY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                          "shearX": 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                          "shearY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                          "translateX": 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                          "translateY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                          "unit": "A String", # The units for translate elements.
+                        },
+                        "type": "A String", # The type of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      },
+                      "transparency": 3.14, # The transparency effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect and 1 means completely transparent. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "spreadsheetId": "A String", # The ID of the Google Sheets spreadsheet that contains the source chart.
+                },
+                "size": { # A width and height. # The size of the page element.
+                  "height": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
+                    "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                    "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                  },
+                  "width": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The width of the object.
+                    "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                    "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                  },
+                },
+                "table": { # A PageElement kind representing a table. # A table page element.
+                  "columns": 42, # Number of columns in the table.
+                  "horizontalBorderRows": [ # Properties of horizontal cell borders. A table's horizontal cell borders are represented as a grid. The grid has one more row than the number of rows in the table and the same number of columns as the table. For example, if the table is 3 x 3, its horizontal borders will be represented as a grid with 4 rows and 3 columns.
+                    { # Contents of each border row in a table.
+                      "tableBorderCells": [ # Properties of each border cell. When a border's adjacent table cells are merged, it is not included in the response.
+                        { # The properties of each border cell.
+                          "location": { # A location of a single table cell within a table. # The location of the border within the border table.
+                            "columnIndex": 42, # The 0-based column index.
+                            "rowIndex": 42, # The 0-based row index.
+                          },
+                          "tableBorderProperties": { # The border styling properties of the TableBorderCell. # The border properties.
+                            "dashStyle": "A String", # The dash style of the border.
+                            "tableBorderFill": { # The fill of the border. # The fill of the table border.
+                              "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid fill.
+                                "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                                "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                                  "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "weight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the border.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "rows": 42, # Number of rows in the table.
+                  "tableColumns": [ # Properties of each column.
+                    { # Properties of each column in a table.
+                      "columnWidth": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # Width of a column.
+                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "tableRows": [ # Properties and contents of each row. Cells that span multiple rows are contained in only one of these rows and have a row_span greater than 1.
+                    { # Properties and contents of each row in a table.
+                      "rowHeight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # Height of a row.
+                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                      "tableCells": [ # Properties and contents of each cell. Cells that span multiple columns are represented only once with a column_span greater than 1. As a result, the length of this collection does not always match the number of columns of the entire table.
+                        { # Properties and contents of each table cell.
+                          "columnSpan": 42, # Column span of the cell.
+                          "location": { # A location of a single table cell within a table. # The location of the cell within the table.
+                            "columnIndex": 42, # The 0-based column index.
+                            "rowIndex": 42, # The 0-based row index.
+                          },
+                          "rowSpan": 42, # Row span of the cell.
+                          "tableCellProperties": { # The properties of the TableCell. # The properties of the table cell.
+                            "contentAlignment": "A String", # The alignment of the content in the table cell. The default alignment matches the alignment for newly created table cells in the Slides editor.
+                            "tableCellBackgroundFill": { # The table cell background fill. # The background fill of the table cell. The default fill matches the fill for newly created table cells in the Slides editor.
+                              "propertyState": "A String", # The background fill property state. Updating the fill on a table cell will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no fill on a table cell, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other fill fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                              "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                                "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                                "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                                  "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                          },
+                          "text": { # The general text content. The text must reside in a compatible shape (e.g. text box or rectangle) or a table cell in a page. # The text content of the cell.
+                            "lists": { # The bulleted lists contained in this text, keyed by list ID.
+                              "a_key": { # A List describes the look and feel of bullets belonging to paragraphs associated with a list. A paragraph that is part of a list has an implicit reference to that list's ID.
+                                "listId": "A String", # The ID of the list.
+                                "nestingLevel": { # A map of nesting levels to the properties of bullets at the associated level. A list has at most nine levels of nesting, so the possible values for the keys of this map are 0 through 8, inclusive.
+                                  "a_key": { # Contains properties describing the look and feel of a list bullet at a given level of nesting.
+                                    "bulletStyle": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The style of a bullet at this level of nesting.
+                                      "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                      "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                      "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                      "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                      },
+                                      "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                      "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                        "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                        "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                        "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                        "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                      },
+                                      "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                      "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                      "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                      "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                        "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                        "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                  },
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "textElements": [ # The text contents broken down into its component parts, including styling information. This property is read-only.
+                              { # A TextElement describes the content of a range of indices in the text content of a Shape or TableCell.
+                                "autoText": { # A TextElement kind that represents auto text. # A TextElement representing a spot in the text that is dynamically replaced with content that can change over time.
+                                  "content": "A String", # The rendered content of this auto text, if available.
+                                  "style": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this auto text.
+                                    "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                    "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                    "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                    "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                    "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                      "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                      "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                      "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                      "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                    },
+                                    "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                    "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                    "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                    "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                      "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                      "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                                    },
+                                  },
+                                  "type": "A String", # The type of this auto text.
+                                },
+                                "endIndex": 42, # The zero-based end index of this text element, exclusive, in Unicode code units.
+                                "paragraphMarker": { # A TextElement kind that represents the beginning of a new paragraph. # A marker representing the beginning of a new paragraph. The `start_index` and `end_index` of this TextElement represent the range of the paragraph. Other TextElements with an index range contained inside this paragraph's range are considered to be part of this paragraph. The range of indices of two separate paragraphs will never overlap.
+                                  "bullet": { # Describes the bullet of a paragraph. # The bullet for this paragraph. If not present, the paragraph does not belong to a list.
+                                    "bulletStyle": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The paragraph specific text style applied to this bullet.
+                                      "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                      "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                      "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                      "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                      },
+                                      "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                      "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                        "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                        "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                        "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                        "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                      },
+                                      "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                      "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                      "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                      "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                        "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                        "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    "glyph": "A String", # The rendered bullet glyph for this paragraph.
+                                    "listId": "A String", # The ID of the list this paragraph belongs to.
+                                    "nestingLevel": 42, # The nesting level of this paragraph in the list.
+                                  },
+                                  "style": { # Styles that apply to a whole paragraph. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these paragraph styles may be inherited from the parent. Which paragraph styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A paragraph not in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A paragraph in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited paragraph styles are represented as unset fields in this message. # The paragraph's style
+                                    "alignment": "A String", # The text alignment for this paragraph.
+                                    "direction": "A String", # The text direction of this paragraph. If unset, the value defaults to LEFT_TO_RIGHT since text direction is not inherited.
+                                    "indentEnd": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the end of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    "indentFirstLine": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of indentation for the start of the first line of the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    "indentStart": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the start of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    "lineSpacing": 3.14, # The amount of space between lines, as a percentage of normal, where normal is represented as 100.0. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                    "spaceAbove": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space above the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    "spaceBelow": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space below the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    "spacingMode": "A String", # The spacing mode for the paragraph.
+                                  },
+                                },
+                                "startIndex": 42, # The zero-based start index of this text element, in Unicode code units.
+                                "textRun": { # A TextElement kind that represents a run of text that all has the same styling. # A TextElement representing a run of text where all of the characters in the run have the same TextStyle. The `start_index` and `end_index` of TextRuns will always be fully contained in the index range of a single `paragraph_marker` TextElement. In other words, a TextRun will never span multiple paragraphs.
+                                  "content": "A String", # The text of this run.
+                                  "style": { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this run.
+                                    "backgroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    "baselineOffset": "A String", # The text's vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                    "bold": True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                    "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                    "fontSize": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text's font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    "foregroundColor": { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      "opaqueColor": { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    "italic": True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                    "link": { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `"ABC\n123"`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                      "pageObjectId": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                      "relativeLink": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                      "slideIndex": 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                      "url": "A String", # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                    },
+                                    "smallCaps": True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                    "strikethrough": True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                    "underline": True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                    "weightedFontFamily": { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `"*"`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` ("normal"). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                      "fontFamily": "A String", # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                      "weight": 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` ("normal").
+                                    },
+                                  },
+                                },
+                              },
+                            ],
+                          },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "tableRowProperties": { # Properties of each row in a table. # Properties of the row.
+                        "minRowHeight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # Minimum height of the row. The row will be rendered in the Slides editor at a height equal to or greater than this value in order to show all the text in the row's cell(s).
+                          "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                          "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "verticalBorderRows": [ # Properties of vertical cell borders. A table's vertical cell borders are represented as a grid. The grid has the same number of rows as the table and one more column than the number of columns in the table. For example, if the table is 3 x 3, its vertical borders will be represented as a grid with 3 rows and 4 columns.
+                    { # Contents of each border row in a table.
+                      "tableBorderCells": [ # Properties of each border cell. When a border's adjacent table cells are merged, it is not included in the response.
+                        { # The properties of each border cell.
+                          "location": { # A location of a single table cell within a table. # The location of the border within the border table.
+                            "columnIndex": 42, # The 0-based column index.
+                            "rowIndex": 42, # The 0-based row index.
+                          },
+                          "tableBorderProperties": { # The border styling properties of the TableBorderCell. # The border properties.
+                            "dashStyle": "A String", # The dash style of the border.
+                            "tableBorderFill": { # The fill of the border. # The fill of the table border.
+                              "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid fill.
+                                "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                                "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                                  "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                            "weight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the border.
+                              "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  ],
+                },
+                "title": "A String", # The title of the page element. Combined with description to display alt text. The field is not supported for Group elements.
+                "transform": { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x', y') according to: x' x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x' = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y' = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # The transform of the page element. The visual appearance of the page element is determined by its absolute transform. To compute the absolute transform, preconcatenate a page element's transform with the transforms of all of its parent groups. If the page element is not in a group, its absolute transform is the same as the value in this field. The initial transform for the newly created Group is always the identity transform.
+                  "scaleX": 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                  "scaleY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                  "shearX": 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                  "shearY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                  "translateX": 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                  "translateY": 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                  "unit": "A String", # The units for translate elements.
+                },
+                "video": { # A PageElement kind representing a video. # A video page element.
+                  "id": "A String", # The video source's unique identifier for this video.
+                  "source": "A String", # The video source.
+                  "url": "A String", # An URL to a video. The URL is valid as long as the source video exists and sharing settings do not change.
+                  "videoProperties": { # The properties of the Video. # The properties of the video.
+                    "autoPlay": True or False, # Whether to enable video autoplay when the page is displayed in present mode. Defaults to false.
+                    "end": 42, # The time at which to end playback, measured in seconds from the beginning of the video. If set, the end time should be after the start time. If not set or if you set this to a value that exceeds the video's length, the video will be played until its end.
+                    "mute": True or False, # Whether to mute the audio during video playback. Defaults to false.
+                    "outline": { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the video. The default outline matches the defaults for new videos created in the Slides editor.
+                      "dashStyle": "A String", # The dash style of the outline.
+                      "outlineFill": { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                        "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                          "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                          "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                            "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                      "propertyState": "A String", # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      "weight": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                        "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "start": 42, # The time at which to start playback, measured in seconds from the beginning of the video. If set, the start time should be before the end time. If you set this to a value that exceeds the video's length in seconds, the video will be played from the last second. If not set, the video will be played from the beginning.
+                  },
+                },
+                "wordArt": { # A PageElement kind representing word art. # A word art page element.
+                  "renderedText": "A String", # The text rendered as word art.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "pageProperties": { # The properties of the Page. The page will inherit properties from the parent page. Depending on the page type the hierarchy is defined in either SlideProperties or LayoutProperties. # The properties of the page.
+              "colorScheme": { # The palette of predefined colors for a page. # The color scheme of the page. If unset, the color scheme is inherited from a parent page. If the page has no parent, the color scheme uses a default Slides color scheme, matching the defaults in the Slides editor. Only the concrete colors of the first 12 ThemeColorTypes are editable. In addition, only the color scheme on `Master` pages can be updated. To update the field, a color scheme containing mappings from all the first 12 ThemeColorTypes to their concrete colors must be provided. Colors for the remaining ThemeColorTypes will be ignored.
+                "colors": [ # The ThemeColorType and corresponding concrete color pairs.
+                  { # A pair mapping a theme color type to the concrete color it represents.
+                    "color": { # An RGB color. # The concrete color corresponding to the theme color type above.
+                      "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                    },
+                    "type": "A String", # The type of the theme color.
+                  },
+                ],
+              },
+              "pageBackgroundFill": { # The page background fill. # The background fill of the page. If unset, the background fill is inherited from a parent page if it exists. If the page has no parent, then the background fill defaults to the corresponding fill in the Slides editor.
+                "propertyState": "A String", # The background fill property state. Updating the fill on a page will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no fill on a page, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other fill fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                "solidFill": { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                  "color": { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                    "rgbColor": { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                      "blue": 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      "green": 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      "red": 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                    },
+                    "themeColor": "A String", # An opaque theme color.
+                  },
+                },
+                "stretchedPictureFill": { # The stretched picture fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified picture. The picture is stretched to fit its container. # Stretched picture fill.
+                  "contentUrl": "A String", # Reading the content_url: An URL to a picture with a default lifetime of 30 minutes. This URL is tagged with the account of the requester. Anyone with the URL effectively accesses the picture as the original requester. Access to the picture may be lost if the presentation's sharing settings change. Writing the content_url: The picture is fetched once at insertion time and a copy is stored for display inside the presentation. Pictures must be less than 50MB in size, cannot exceed 25 megapixels, and must be in one of PNG, JPEG, or GIF format. The provided URL can be at most 2 kB in length.
+                  "size": { # A width and height. # The original size of the picture fill. This field is read-only.
+                    "height": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
+                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                    },
+                    "width": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The width of the object.
+                      "magnitude": 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                      "unit": "A String", # The units for magnitude.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+            },
+            "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
+            "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
+            "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
+          },
         },
       },
       "updateSlidesPosition": { # Updates the position of slides in the presentation. # Updates the position of a set of slides in the presentation.
@@ -2045,12 +3052,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "locale": "A String", # The locale of the presentation, as an IETF BCP 47 language tag.
@@ -3061,12 +4063,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "notesMaster": { # A page in a presentation. # The notes master in the presentation. It serves three purposes: - Placeholder shapes on a notes master contain the default text styles and shape properties of all placeholder shapes on notes pages. Specifically, a `SLIDE_IMAGE` placeholder shape contains the slide thumbnail, and a `BODY` placeholder shape contains the speaker notes. - The notes master page properties define the common page properties inherited by all notes pages. - Any other shapes on the notes master appear on all notes pages. The notes master is read-only.
@@ -4075,12 +5072,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
     "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-    "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-      "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-      "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-    },
+    "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
   },
   "pageSize": { # A width and height. # The size of pages in the presentation.
     "height": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
@@ -5101,12 +6093,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "title": "A String", # The title of the presentation.
@@ -6128,12 +7115,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "locale": "A String", # The locale of the presentation, as an IETF BCP 47 language tag.
@@ -7144,12 +8126,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "notesMaster": { # A page in a presentation. # The notes master in the presentation. It serves three purposes: - Placeholder shapes on a notes master contain the default text styles and shape properties of all placeholder shapes on notes pages. Specifically, a `SLIDE_IMAGE` placeholder shape contains the slide thumbnail, and a `BODY` placeholder shape contains the speaker notes. - The notes master page properties define the common page properties inherited by all notes pages. - Any other shapes on the notes master appear on all notes pages. The notes master is read-only.
@@ -8158,12 +9135,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
     "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-    "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-      "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-      "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-    },
+    "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
   },
   "pageSize": { # A width and height. # The size of pages in the presentation.
     "height": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
@@ -9184,12 +10156,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "title": "A String", # The title of the presentation.
@@ -10218,12 +11185,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "locale": "A String", # The locale of the presentation, as an IETF BCP 47 language tag.
@@ -11234,12 +12196,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "notesMaster": { # A page in a presentation. # The notes master in the presentation. It serves three purposes: - Placeholder shapes on a notes master contain the default text styles and shape properties of all placeholder shapes on notes pages. Specifically, a `SLIDE_IMAGE` placeholder shape contains the slide thumbnail, and a `BODY` placeholder shape contains the speaker notes. - The notes master page properties define the common page properties inherited by all notes pages. - Any other shapes on the notes master appear on all notes pages. The notes master is read-only.
@@ -12248,12 +13205,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
     "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-    "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-      "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-      "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-    },
+    "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
   },
   "pageSize": { # A width and height. # The size of pages in the presentation.
     "height": { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
@@ -13274,12 +14226,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
       "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   "title": "A String", # The title of the presentation.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html
index 7671a5028bb..d6c583bb80b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html
@@ -1110,12 +1110,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "pageType": "A String", # The type of the page.
   "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. The revision ID of the presentation. Can be used in update requests to assert the presentation revision hasn't changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The revision ID is not a sequential number but an opaque string. The format of the revision ID might change over time. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated. However, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-  "slideProperties": { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-    "isSkipped": True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-    "layoutObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-    "masterObjectId": "A String", # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-    "notesPage": # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-  },
+  "slideProperties": # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
 }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/spanner_v1.projects.instances.databases.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/spanner_v1.projects.instances.databases.sessions.html index 4db06328cdf..ffe0a325433 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/spanner_v1.projects.instances.databases.sessions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/spanner_v1.projects.instances.databases.sessions.html @@ -428,7 +428,14 @@

Method Details

"arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "structType": { # `StructType` defines the fields of a STRUCT type. # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. + { # Message representing a single field of a struct. + "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. + }, + ], + }, "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. }, }, @@ -489,13 +496,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -507,13 +508,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -587,7 +582,14 @@

Method Details

"arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "structType": { # `StructType` defines the fields of a STRUCT type. # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. + { # Message representing a single field of a struct. + "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. + }, + ], + }, "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. }, }, @@ -657,13 +659,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -675,13 +671,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -744,7 +734,14 @@

Method Details

"arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "structType": { # `StructType` defines the fields of a STRUCT type. # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. + { # Message representing a single field of a struct. + "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. + }, + ], + }, "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. }, }, @@ -815,13 +812,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -833,13 +824,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -973,7 +958,14 @@

Method Details

"arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "structType": { # `StructType` defines the fields of a STRUCT type. # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. + "fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. + { # Message representing a single field of a struct. + "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. + }, + ], + }, "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. }, }, @@ -1236,13 +1228,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -1254,13 +1240,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -1430,13 +1410,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, @@ -1448,13 +1422,7 @@

Method Details

"fields": [ # The list of fields that make up this struct. Order is significant, because values of this struct type are represented as lists, where the order of field values matches the order of fields in the StructType. In turn, the order of fields matches the order of columns in a read request, or the order of fields in the `SELECT` clause of a query. { # Message representing a single field of a struct. "name": "A String", # The name of the field. For reads, this is the column name. For SQL queries, it is the column alias (e.g., `"Word"` in the query `"SELECT 'hello' AS Word"`), or the column name (e.g., `"ColName"` in the query `"SELECT ColName FROM Table"`). Some columns might have an empty name (e.g., `"SELECT UPPER(ColName)"`). Note that a query result can contain multiple fields with the same name. - "type": { # `Type` indicates the type of a Cloud Spanner value, as might be stored in a table cell or returned from an SQL query. # The type of the field. - "arrayElementType": # Object with schema name: Type # If code == ARRAY, then `array_element_type` is the type of the array elements. - "code": "A String", # Required. The TypeCode for this type. - "protoTypeFqn": "A String", # If code == PROTO or code == ENUM, then `proto_type_fqn` is the fully qualified name of the proto type representing the proto/enum definition. - "structType": # Object with schema name: StructType # If code == STRUCT, then `struct_type` provides type information for the struct's fields. - "typeAnnotation": "A String", # The TypeAnnotationCode that disambiguates SQL type that Spanner will use to represent values of this type during query processing. This is necessary for some type codes because a single TypeCode can be mapped to different SQL types depending on the SQL dialect. type_annotation typically is not needed to process the content of a value (it doesn't affect serialization) and clients can ignore it on the read path. - }, + "type": # Object with schema name: Type # The type of the field. }, ], }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html index dd302f8e84c..6c1655ed273 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html +++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "kind": "A String", # This is always `sql#usersList`. - "nextPageToken": "A String", # An identifier that uniquely identifies the operation. You can use this identifier to retrieve the Operations resource that has information about the operation. + "nextPageToken": "A String", # Unused. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html index 6e59a8b43ab..9a44c98c663 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html +++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "kind": "A String", # This is always *sql#usersList*. - "nextPageToken": "A String", # An identifier that uniquely identifies the operation. You can use this identifier to retrieve the Operations resource that has information about the operation. + "nextPageToken": "A String", # Unused. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.groups.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.groups.html index 27378f62cfb..e8565c4b5cd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.groups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.groups.html @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@

Method Details

} groupId: string, Required. The group identifier. - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Required. The Group name. (required) - requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The update time timestamp. } - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Group resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.datacenterConnectors.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.datacenterConnectors.html index 3501fd11c35..ed10a32330b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.datacenterConnectors.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.datacenterConnectors.html @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@

Method Details

} datacenterConnectorId: string, Required. The datacenterConnector identifier. - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Required. The DatacenterConnector name. (required) - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Request message for 'UpgradeAppliance' request. - "requestId": "A String", # A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + "requestId": "A String", # A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.html index 35b68823d3a..5ecc971b968 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.html @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@

Method Details

}, } - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). sourceId: string, Required. The source identifier. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Required. The Source name. (required) - requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@

Method Details

}, } - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Source resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html index 327976e1125..bfc4f2770c6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@

Method Details

} cloneJobId: string, Required. The clone job identifier. - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html index 19698ddd746..fb9140fff76 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@

Method Details

} cutoverJobId: string, Required. The cutover job identifier. - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html index 0fbdd221f6e..50de9b33b68 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@

Method Details

} migratingVmId: string, Required. The migratingVm identifier. - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time the migrating VM resource was updated. } - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the MigratingVm resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.utilizationReports.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.utilizationReports.html index 4adfde7b859..3877fc7b32c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.utilizationReports.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.utilizationReports.html @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@

Method Details

], } - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). utilizationReportId: string, Required. The ID to use for the report, which will become the final component of the reports's resource name. This value maximum length is 63 characters, and valid characters are /a-z-/. It must start with an english letter and must not end with a hyphen. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Required. The Utilization Report name. (required) - requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.targetProjects.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.targetProjects.html index 2c4816e9a0e..1473f5e14f6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.targetProjects.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.targetProjects.html @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time the target project resource was updated. } - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). targetProjectId: string, Required. The target_project identifier. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, Required. The TargetProject name. (required) - requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time the target project resource was updated. } - requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). + requestId: string, A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the TargetProject resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values diff --git a/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.html b/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.html index 70c957ec8e9..d792ebdf89d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.html +++ b/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.html @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@

Method Details

} validateOnly: boolean, If set, validate the request and preview the review, but do not actually apply it. - workstationClusterId: string, Required. ID to use for the cluster. + workstationClusterId: string, Required. ID to use for the workstation cluster. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -190,10 +190,10 @@

Method Details

Deletes the specified workstation cluster.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. Name of the cluster to delete. (required)
-  etag: string, If set, the request will be rejected if the latest version of the cluster on the server does not have this etag.
-  force: boolean, If set, any workstation configurations and workstations in the cluster will also be deleted. Otherwise, the request will work only if the cluster has no configurations or workstations.
-  validateOnly: boolean, If set, validate the request and preview the review, but do not actually apply it.
+  name: string, Required. Name of the workstation cluster to delete. (required)
+  etag: string, If set, the request will be rejected if the latest version of the workstation cluster on the server does not have this etag.
+  force: boolean, If set, any workstation configurations and workstations in the workstation cluster are also deleted. Otherwise, the request only works if the workstation cluster has no configurations or workstations.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If set, validate the request and preview the review, but do not apply it.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "unreachable": [ # Unreachable resources.
     "A String",
   ],
-  "workstationClusters": [ # The requested clusters.
+  "workstationClusters": [ # The requested workstation clusters.
     { # A grouping of workstation configurations and the associated workstations in that region.
       "annotations": { # Client-specified annotations.
         "a_key": "A String",
@@ -403,8 +403,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was most recently updated.
 }
 
-  allowMissing: boolean, If set, and the cluster is not found, a new cluster will be created. In this situation, update_mask is ignored.
-  updateMask: string, Required. Mask specifying which fields in the cluster should be updated.
+  allowMissing: boolean, If set, and the workstation cluster is not found, a new workstation cluster will be created. In this situation, update_mask is ignored.
+  updateMask: string, Required. Mask that specifies which fields in the workstation cluster should be updated.
   validateOnly: boolean, If set, validate the request and preview the review, but do not actually apply it.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.workstationConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.workstationConfigs.html
index 949b4ecb5f0..91abe9e57dc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.workstationConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/workstations_v1beta.projects.locations.workstationClusters.workstationConfigs.html
@@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ 
Method Details

   "degraded": True or False, # Output only. Whether this resource is in degraded mode, in which case it may require user action to restore full functionality. Details can be found in the `conditions` field.
   "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was soft-deleted.
   "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for this resource.
-  "encryptionKey": { # A customer-specified encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-specified encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk will be encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks will be encrypted using a generated key. Customer-specified encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-specified encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system will attempt to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours.
-    "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS, for example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`.
-    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. However, it is recommended to use a separate service account and to follow KMS best practices mentioned at https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties
+  "encryptionKey": { # A customer-managed encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-managed encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk are encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks are encrypted using a generated key. Customer-managed encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-managed encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system attempts to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours.
+    "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the Google Cloud KMS encryption key. For example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`.
+    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account to use with the specified KMS key. We recommend that you use a separate service account and follow KMS best practices. For more information, see [Separation of duties](https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties) and `gcloud kms keys add-iam-policy-binding` [`--member`](https://cloud.google.com/sdk/gcloud/reference/kms/keys/add-iam-policy-binding#--member).
   },
   "etag": "A String", # Checksum computed by the server. May be sent on update and delete requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.
   "host": { # Runtime host for a workstation. # Runtime host for the workstation.
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this resource is currently being updated to match its intended state.
-  "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this config should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours.
+  "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this configuration should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours.
   "uid": "A String", # Output only. A system-assigned unique identified for this resource.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was most recently updated.
 }
@@ -326,9 +326,9 @@ 
Method Details

   "degraded": True or False, # Output only. Whether this resource is in degraded mode, in which case it may require user action to restore full functionality. Details can be found in the `conditions` field.
   "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was soft-deleted.
   "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for this resource.
-  "encryptionKey": { # A customer-specified encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-specified encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk will be encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks will be encrypted using a generated key. Customer-specified encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-specified encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system will attempt to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours.
-    "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS, for example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`.
-    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. However, it is recommended to use a separate service account and to follow KMS best practices mentioned at https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties
+  "encryptionKey": { # A customer-managed encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-managed encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk are encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks are encrypted using a generated key. Customer-managed encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-managed encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system attempts to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours.
+    "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the Google Cloud KMS encryption key. For example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`.
+    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account to use with the specified KMS key. We recommend that you use a separate service account and follow KMS best practices. For more information, see [Separation of duties](https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties) and `gcloud kms keys add-iam-policy-binding` [`--member`](https://cloud.google.com/sdk/gcloud/reference/kms/keys/add-iam-policy-binding#--member).
   },
   "etag": "A String", # Checksum computed by the server. May be sent on update and delete requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.
   "host": { # Runtime host for a workstation. # Runtime host for the workstation.
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this resource is currently being updated to match its intended state.
-  "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this config should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours.
+  "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this configuration should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours.
   "uid": "A String", # Output only. A system-assigned unique identified for this resource.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was most recently updated.
 }
@@ -477,9 +477,9 @@

Method Details

"degraded": True or False, # Output only. Whether this resource is in degraded mode, in which case it may require user action to restore full functionality. Details can be found in the `conditions` field. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was soft-deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for this resource. - "encryptionKey": { # A customer-specified encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-specified encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk will be encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks will be encrypted using a generated key. Customer-specified encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-specified encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system will attempt to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours. - "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS, for example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`. - "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. However, it is recommended to use a separate service account and to follow KMS best practices mentioned at https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties + "encryptionKey": { # A customer-managed encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-managed encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk are encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks are encrypted using a generated key. Customer-managed encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-managed encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system attempts to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours. + "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the Google Cloud KMS encryption key. For example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`. + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account to use with the specified KMS key. We recommend that you use a separate service account and follow KMS best practices. For more information, see [Separation of duties](https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties) and `gcloud kms keys add-iam-policy-binding` [`--member`](https://cloud.google.com/sdk/gcloud/reference/kms/keys/add-iam-policy-binding#--member). }, "etag": "A String", # Checksum computed by the server. May be sent on update and delete requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. "host": { # Runtime host for a workstation. # Runtime host for the workstation. @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this resource is currently being updated to match its intended state. - "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this config should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours. + "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this configuration should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours. "uid": "A String", # Output only. A system-assigned unique identified for this resource. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was most recently updated. }, @@ -582,9 +582,9 @@

Method Details

"degraded": True or False, # Output only. Whether this resource is in degraded mode, in which case it may require user action to restore full functionality. Details can be found in the `conditions` field. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was soft-deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for this resource. - "encryptionKey": { # A customer-specified encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-specified encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk will be encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks will be encrypted using a generated key. Customer-specified encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-specified encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system will attempt to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours. - "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS, for example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`. - "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. However, it is recommended to use a separate service account and to follow KMS best practices mentioned at https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties + "encryptionKey": { # A customer-managed encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-managed encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk are encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks are encrypted using a generated key. Customer-managed encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-managed encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system attempts to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours. + "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the Google Cloud KMS encryption key. For example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`. + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account to use with the specified KMS key. We recommend that you use a separate service account and follow KMS best practices. For more information, see [Separation of duties](https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties) and `gcloud kms keys add-iam-policy-binding` [`--member`](https://cloud.google.com/sdk/gcloud/reference/kms/keys/add-iam-policy-binding#--member). }, "etag": "A String", # Checksum computed by the server. May be sent on update and delete requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. "host": { # Runtime host for a workstation. # Runtime host for the workstation. @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this resource is currently being updated to match its intended state. - "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this config should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours. + "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this configuration should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours. "uid": "A String", # Output only. A system-assigned unique identified for this resource. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was most recently updated. }, @@ -702,9 +702,9 @@

Method Details

"degraded": True or False, # Output only. Whether this resource is in degraded mode, in which case it may require user action to restore full functionality. Details can be found in the `conditions` field. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was soft-deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for this resource. - "encryptionKey": { # A customer-specified encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-specified encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk will be encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks will be encrypted using a generated key. Customer-specified encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-specified encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system will attempt to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours. - "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS, for example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`. - "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. However, it is recommended to use a separate service account and to follow KMS best practices mentioned at https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties + "encryptionKey": { # A customer-managed encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration. # Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-managed encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk are encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks are encrypted using a generated key. Customer-managed encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-managed encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system attempts to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours. + "kmsKey": "A String", # The name of the Google Cloud KMS encryption key. For example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`. + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account to use with the specified KMS key. We recommend that you use a separate service account and follow KMS best practices. For more information, see [Separation of duties](https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties) and `gcloud kms keys add-iam-policy-binding` [`--member`](https://cloud.google.com/sdk/gcloud/reference/kms/keys/add-iam-policy-binding#--member). }, "etag": "A String", # Checksum computed by the server. May be sent on update and delete requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. "host": { # Runtime host for a workstation. # Runtime host for the workstation. @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this resource is currently being updated to match its intended state. - "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this config should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours. + "runningTimeout": "A String", # How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this configuration should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours. "uid": "A String", # Output only. A system-assigned unique identified for this resource. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this resource was most recently updated. } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/acceleratedmobilepageurl.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/acceleratedmobilepageurl.v1.json index 225959d7a16..345db862c7e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/acceleratedmobilepageurl.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/acceleratedmobilepageurl.v1.json @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230125", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://acceleratedmobilepageurl.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AmpUrl": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1.json index ca2295e8cde..46f31fa0e49 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1.json @@ -1235,7 +1235,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://accesscontextmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessContextManagerOperationMetadata": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1beta.json index 527244e58c7..b3311d49714 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/accesscontextmanager.v1beta.json @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://accesscontextmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessContextManagerOperationMetadata": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adexchangebuyer2.v2beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adexchangebuyer2.v2beta1.json index 9f46b5d5a4a..fa0b5cfab36 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adexchangebuyer2.v2beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adexchangebuyer2.v2beta1.json @@ -2568,7 +2568,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://adexchangebuyer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbsoluteDateRange": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.datatransfer_v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.datatransfer_v1.json index 8d08c1abfeb..a5700edd950 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.datatransfer_v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.datatransfer_v1.json @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://admin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Application": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.directory_v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.directory_v1.json index c53e32fa450..57ffbb3b6fa 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.directory_v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.directory_v1.json @@ -4630,7 +4630,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://admin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Alias": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.reports_v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.reports_v1.json index 1e3680c4519..95bcfd34b48 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.reports_v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admin.reports_v1.json @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://admin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Activities": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1.json index 282a57420ff..1942b5598c9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1.json @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://admob.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdUnit": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1beta.json index 5cde696ad7f..d88fa10042d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/admob.v1beta.json @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://admob.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdSource": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adsense.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adsense.v2.json index 777ddb9a7ad..1ced7cbcc4f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adsense.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/adsense.v2.json @@ -1824,7 +1824,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://adsense.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/advisorynotifications.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/advisorynotifications.v1.json index f723c445c67..25a76994759 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/advisorynotifications.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/advisorynotifications.v1.json @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://advisorynotifications.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudAdvisorynotificationsV1Attachment": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alertcenter.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alertcenter.v1beta1.json index 4592f1a1116..8473bdfce1f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alertcenter.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alertcenter.v1beta1.json @@ -423,40 +423,9 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://alertcenter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { - "AbuseDetected": { - "description": "A generic alert for abusive user activity occurring with a customer.", - "id": "AbuseDetected", - "properties": { - "additionalDetails": { - "$ref": "EntityList", - "description": "List of abusive users/entities to be displayed in a table in the alert." - }, - "alertDescriptor": { - "description": "Displayed after Customer abuse detected - {alert_descriptor}. If missing, alert name will be displayed as Customer abuse detected.", - "type": "string" - }, - "nextSteps": { - "description": "Customizable text to display in the next steps section of the alert. Will be parsed as HTML to allow new paragraphs and hyperlinks.", - "type": "string" - }, - "product": { - "description": "Product that the abuse is originating from.", - "type": "string" - }, - "subAlertId": { - "description": "Unique identifier of each alert that is onboarded.", - "type": "string" - }, - "summary": { - "description": "Customizable text to display in the summary section of the alert. Will be parsed as HTML to allow new paragraphs and hyperlinks.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "AccountSuspensionDetails": { "description": "Details about why an account is receiving an account suspension warning.", "id": "AccountSuspensionDetails", @@ -1142,53 +1111,6 @@ "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, - "Entity": { - "description": "Individual entity affected by, or related to, an alert.", - "id": "Entity", - "properties": { - "link": { - "description": "Link to a Security Investigation Tool search based on this entity, if available.", - "type": "string" - }, - "name": { - "description": "Human-readable name of this entity, such as an email address, file ID, or device name.", - "type": "string" - }, - "values": { - "description": "Extra values beyond name. The order of values should align with headers in EntityList.", - "items": { - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "EntityList": { - "description": "EntityList stores entities in a format that can be translated to a table in the Alert Center UI.", - "id": "EntityList", - "properties": { - "entities": { - "description": "List of entities affected by the alert.", - "items": { - "$ref": "Entity" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "headers": { - "description": "Headers of the values in entities. If no value is defined in Entity, this field should be empty.", - "items": { - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "name": { - "description": "Name of the key detail used to display this entity list.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "GmailMessageInfo": { "description": "Details of a message in phishing spike alert.", "id": "GmailMessageInfo", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1alpha.json index 7e2d6ae5477..8d0be09ba6c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1alpha.json @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "updateMask": { - "description": "Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (e.g., \"field_to_update\"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string \"*\" to match all fields.", + "description": "Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (for example, \"field_to_update\"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string \"*\" to match all fields.", "format": "google-fieldmask", "location": "query", "type": "string" @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ "properties": { "methods": { "acknowledgeUserDataCollection": { - "description": "Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or via this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.", + "description": "Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or through this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/properties/{propertiesId}:acknowledgeUserDataCollection", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "analyticsadmin.properties.acknowledgeUserDataCollection", @@ -3588,7 +3588,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://analyticsadmin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleAnalyticsAdminV1alphaAccessBetweenFilter": { @@ -6358,7 +6358,7 @@ "description": "The account to create." }, "redirectUri": { - "description": "Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI", + "description": "Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -6388,7 +6388,7 @@ }, "dimensionFilter": { "$ref": "GoogleAnalyticsAdminV1alphaAccessFilterExpression", - "description": "Dimension filters allow you to restrict report response to specific dimension values which match the filter. For example, filtering on access records of a single user. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter." + "description": "Dimension filters let you restrict report response to specific dimension values which match the filter. For example, filtering on access records of a single user. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter." }, "dimensions": { "description": "The dimensions requested and displayed in the response. Requests are allowed up to 9 dimensions.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1beta.json index c4168d8766d..e60a49f30c6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsadmin.v1beta.json @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "updateMask": { - "description": "Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (e.g., \"field_to_update\"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string \"*\" to match all fields.", + "description": "Required. The list of fields to be updated. Field names must be in snake case (for example, \"field_to_update\"). Omitted fields will not be updated. To replace the entire entity, use one path with the string \"*\" to match all fields.", "format": "google-fieldmask", "location": "query", "type": "string" @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ "properties": { "methods": { "acknowledgeUserDataCollection": { - "description": "Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or via this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.", + "description": "Acknowledges the terms of user data collection for the specified property. This acknowledgement must be completed (either in the Google Analytics UI or through this API) before MeasurementProtocolSecret resources may be created.", "flatPath": "v1beta/properties/{propertiesId}:acknowledgeUserDataCollection", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "analyticsadmin.properties.acknowledgeUserDataCollection", @@ -1536,7 +1536,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://analyticsadmin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleAnalyticsAdminV1betaAccount": { @@ -2544,7 +2544,7 @@ "description": "The account to create." }, "redirectUri": { - "description": "Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI", + "description": "Redirect URI where the user will be sent after accepting Terms of Service. Must be configured in Developers Console as a Redirect URI.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsdata.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsdata.v1beta.json index 42be053a02e..c1abb195c39 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsdata.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticsdata.v1beta.json @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://analyticsdata.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActiveMetricRestriction": { @@ -1652,7 +1652,7 @@ }, "dimensionFilter": { "$ref": "FilterExpression", - "description": "Dimension filters allow you to ask for only specific dimension values in the report. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter." + "description": "Dimension filters let you ask for only specific dimension values in the report. To learn more, see [Fundamentals of Dimension Filters](https://developers.google.com/analytics/devguides/reporting/data/v1/basics#dimension_filters) for examples. Metrics cannot be used in this filter." }, "dimensions": { "description": "The dimensions requested and displayed.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json index 8eb321e3a3b..df1e3d74035 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://analyticshub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json index 0b51ddf2eeb..545b8ed837c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://analyticshub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androiddeviceprovisioning.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androiddeviceprovisioning.v1.json index c90c96736a4..0d2ffb92c72 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androiddeviceprovisioning.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androiddeviceprovisioning.v1.json @@ -825,7 +825,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://androiddeviceprovisioning.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ClaimDeviceRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidenterprise.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidenterprise.v1.json index d7971c03d85..fdb51d5ec3f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidenterprise.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidenterprise.v1.json @@ -2649,7 +2649,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://androidenterprise.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Administrator": { @@ -3157,6 +3157,18 @@ "description": "The Google Play Services Android ID for the device encoded as a lowercase hex string. For example, \"123456789abcdef0\".", "type": "string" }, + "device": { + "description": "The internal hardware codename of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.DEVICE. (field named \"device\" per logs/wireless/android/android_checkin.proto)", + "type": "string" + }, + "latestBuildFingerprint": { + "description": "The build fingerprint of the device if known.", + "type": "string" + }, + "maker": { + "description": "The manufacturer of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MANUFACTURER.", + "type": "string" + }, "managementType": { "description": "Identifies the extent to which the device is controlled by a managed Google Play EMM in various deployment configurations. Possible values include: - \"managedDevice\", a device that has the EMM's device policy controller (DPC) as the device owner. - \"managedProfile\", a device that has a profile managed by the DPC (DPC is profile owner) in addition to a separate, personal profile that is unavailable to the DPC. - \"containerApp\", no longer used (deprecated). - \"unmanagedProfile\", a device that has been allowed (by the domain's admin, using the Admin Console to enable the privilege) to use managed Google Play, but the profile is itself not owned by a DPC. ", "enum": [ @@ -3173,13 +3185,30 @@ ], "type": "string" }, + "model": { + "description": "The model name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.MODEL.", + "type": "string" + }, "policy": { "$ref": "Policy", "description": "The policy enforced on the device." }, + "product": { + "description": "The product name of the device. This comes from android.os.Build.PRODUCT.", + "type": "string" + }, "report": { "$ref": "DeviceReport", "description": "The device report updated with the latest app states." + }, + "retailBrand": { + "description": "Retail brand for the device, if set. See https://developer.android.com/reference/android/os/Build.html#BRAND", + "type": "string" + }, + "sdkVersion": { + "description": "API compatibility version.", + "format": "int32", + "type": "integer" } }, "type": "object" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json index 15283f2f692..a0fa76828d9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json @@ -3920,7 +3920,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://androidpublisher.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcquisitionTargetingRule": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1.json index c57bc945fc4..ce861f1ec0f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1.json @@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://apigateway.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApigatewayApi": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1beta.json index 1949c13a4c0..23fd030ec7b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigateway.v1beta.json @@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://apigateway.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApigatewayApi": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json index 2042d9d58e8..d42be67d573 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json @@ -8674,7 +8674,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://apigee.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "EdgeConfigstoreBundleBadBundle": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apikeys.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apikeys.v2.json index 2cbd145a164..ede335b9f1f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apikeys.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apikeys.v2.json @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://apikeys.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Operation": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1.json index 6f22d6708c9..19a28ba2293 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1.json @@ -1647,7 +1647,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://appengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApiConfigHandler": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1alpha.json index f7d42c85a4b..b6d238b3865 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1alpha.json @@ -887,7 +887,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://appengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizedCertificate": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1beta.json index ffe97f5090a..f43a5e1a38f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/appengine.v1beta.json @@ -1898,7 +1898,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://appengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApiConfigHandler": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/area120tables.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/area120tables.v1alpha1.json index 844ac0676a8..275d53f7396 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/area120tables.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/area120tables.v1alpha1.json @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://area120tables.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "BatchCreateRowsRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json index dee85822bc1..604c6af66a9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://assuredworkloads.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudAssuredworkloadsV1AcknowledgeViolationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json index 31394b9bcb4..8defded40fa 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://assuredworkloads.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudAssuredworkloadsV1beta1AcknowledgeViolationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1.json index 62eebb28753..4c391cece53 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1.json @@ -1307,7 +1307,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://authorizedbuyersmarketplace.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceptProposalRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/baremetalsolution.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/baremetalsolution.v2.json index 41c9226db0a..8fa5b78b0a0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/baremetalsolution.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/baremetalsolution.v2.json @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { - "description": "Immutable. The resource name of this `Instance`. Resource names are schemeless URIs that follow the conventions in https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance}`", + "description": "Required. The `name` field is used to identify the instance. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance}", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/instances/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ "$ref": "RenameInstanceRequest" }, "response": { - "$ref": "Operation" + "$ref": "Instance" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" @@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://baremetalsolution.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AllowedClient": { @@ -2974,11 +2974,7 @@ "description": "Message requesting rename of a server.", "id": "RenameInstanceRequest", "properties": { - "instance": { - "$ref": "Instance", - "description": "Required. The `name` field is used to identify the instance. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance}" - }, - "name": { + "newName": { "description": "Required. The new `name` of the instance. Format: {instancename}", "type": "string" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/batch.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/batch.v1.json index 07900e159c9..b45445dc4da 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/batch.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/batch.v1.json @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -277,37 +277,6 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, - "getIamPolicy": { - "description": "Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.", - "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/jobs/{jobsId}:getIamPolicy", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "batch.projects.locations.jobs.getIamPolicy", - "parameterOrder": [ - "resource" - ], - "parameters": { - "options.requestedPolicyVersion": { - "description": "Optional. The maximum policy version that will be used to format the policy. Valid values are 0, 1, and 3. Requests specifying an invalid value will be rejected. Requests for policies with any conditional role bindings must specify version 3. Policies with no conditional role bindings may specify any valid value or leave the field unset. The policy in the response might use the policy version that you specified, or it might use a lower policy version. For example, if you specify version 3, but the policy has no conditional role bindings, the response uses version 1. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).", - "format": "int32", - "location": "query", - "type": "integer" - }, - "resource": { - "description": "REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being requested. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/jobs/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+resource}:getIamPolicy", - "response": { - "$ref": "Policy" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, "list": { "description": "List all Jobs for a project within a region.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/jobs", @@ -348,62 +317,6 @@ "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] - }, - "setIamPolicy": { - "description": "Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.", - "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/jobs/{jobsId}:setIamPolicy", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "batch.projects.locations.jobs.setIamPolicy", - "parameterOrder": [ - "resource" - ], - "parameters": { - "resource": { - "description": "REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being specified. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/jobs/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+resource}:setIamPolicy", - "request": { - "$ref": "SetIamPolicyRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Policy" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "testIamPermissions": { - "description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource. If the resource does not exist, this will return an empty set of permissions, not a `NOT_FOUND` error. Note: This operation is designed to be used for building permission-aware UIs and command-line tools, not for authorization checking. This operation may \"fail open\" without warning.", - "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/jobs/{jobsId}:testIamPermissions", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "batch.projects.locations.jobs.testIamPermissions", - "parameterOrder": [ - "resource" - ], - "parameters": { - "resource": { - "description": "REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy detail is being requested. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/jobs/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+resource}:testIamPermissions", - "request": { - "$ref": "TestIamPermissionsRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "TestIamPermissionsResponse" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] } }, "resources": { @@ -643,7 +556,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230130", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://batch.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Accelerator": { @@ -905,54 +818,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "AuditConfig": { - "description": "Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { \"audit_configs\": [ { \"service\": \"allServices\", \"audit_log_configs\": [ { \"log_type\": \"DATA_READ\", \"exempted_members\": [ \"user:jose@example.com\" ] }, { \"log_type\": \"DATA_WRITE\" }, { \"log_type\": \"ADMIN_READ\" } ] }, { \"service\": \"sampleservice.googleapis.com\", \"audit_log_configs\": [ { \"log_type\": \"DATA_READ\" }, { \"log_type\": \"DATA_WRITE\", \"exempted_members\": [ \"user:aliya@example.com\" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.", - "id": "AuditConfig", - "properties": { - "auditLogConfigs": { - "description": "The configuration for logging of each type of permission.", - "items": { - "$ref": "AuditLogConfig" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "service": { - "description": "Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "AuditLogConfig": { - "description": "Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { \"audit_log_configs\": [ { \"log_type\": \"DATA_READ\", \"exempted_members\": [ \"user:jose@example.com\" ] }, { \"log_type\": \"DATA_WRITE\" } ] } This enables 'DATA_READ' and 'DATA_WRITE' logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.", - "id": "AuditLogConfig", - "properties": { - "exemptedMembers": { - "description": "Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.", - "items": { - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "logType": { - "description": "The log type that this config enables.", - "enum": [ - "LOG_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", - "ADMIN_READ", - "DATA_WRITE", - "DATA_READ" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Default case. Should never be this.", - "Admin reads. Example: CloudIAM getIamPolicy", - "Data writes. Example: CloudSQL Users create", - "Data reads. Example: CloudSQL Users list" - ], - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "Barrier": { "description": "Barrier runnable blocks until all tasks in a taskgroup reach it.", "id": "Barrier", @@ -964,28 +829,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "Binding": { - "description": "Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.", - "id": "Binding", - "properties": { - "condition": { - "$ref": "Expr", - "description": "The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies)." - }, - "members": { - "description": "Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.", - "items": { - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "role": { - "description": "Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "CancelOperationRequest": { "description": "The request message for Operations.CancelOperation.", "id": "CancelOperationRequest", @@ -1118,29 +961,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "Expr": { - "description": "Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: \"Summary size limit\" description: \"Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars\" expression: \"document.summary.size() < 100\" Example (Equality): title: \"Requestor is owner\" description: \"Determines if requestor is the document owner\" expression: \"document.owner == request.auth.claims.email\" Example (Logic): title: \"Public documents\" description: \"Determine whether the document should be publicly visible\" expression: \"document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'\" Example (Data Manipulation): title: \"Notification string\" description: \"Create a notification string with a timestamp.\" expression: \"'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)\" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information.", - "id": "Expr", - "properties": { - "description": { - "description": "Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.", - "type": "string" - }, - "expression": { - "description": "Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.", - "type": "string" - }, - "location": { - "description": "Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.", - "type": "string" - }, - "title": { - "description": "Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "GCS": { "description": "Represents a Google Cloud Storage volume.", "id": "GCS", @@ -1294,7 +1114,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "priority": { - "description": "Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied.", + "description": "Priority of the Job. The valid value range is [0, 100). Default value is 0. Higher value indicates higher priority. A job with higher priority value is more likely to run earlier if all other requirements are satisfied.", "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, @@ -1406,7 +1226,7 @@ "id": "LifecyclePolicy", "properties": { "action": { - "description": "Action to execute when ActionCondition is true.", + "description": "Action to execute when ActionCondition is true. When RETRY_TASK is specified, we will retry failed tasks if we notice any exit code match and fail tasks if no match is found. Likewise, when FAIL_TASK is specified, we will fail tasks if we notice any exit code match and retry tasks if no match is found.", "enum": [ "ACTION_UNSPECIFIED", "RETRY_TASK", @@ -1774,37 +1594,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "Policy": { - "description": "An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { \"bindings\": [ { \"role\": \"roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin\", \"members\": [ \"user:mike@example.com\", \"group:admins@example.com\", \"domain:google.com\", \"serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com\" ] }, { \"role\": \"roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer\", \"members\": [ \"user:eve@example.com\" ], \"condition\": { \"title\": \"expirable access\", \"description\": \"Does not grant access after Sep 2020\", \"expression\": \"request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z')\", } } ], \"etag\": \"BwWWja0YfJA=\", \"version\": 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z') etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).", - "id": "Policy", - "properties": { - "auditConfigs": { - "description": "Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.", - "items": { - "$ref": "AuditConfig" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "bindings": { - "description": "Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.", - "items": { - "$ref": "Binding" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "etag": { - "description": "`etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.", - "format": "byte", - "type": "string" - }, - "version": { - "description": "Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).", - "format": "int32", - "type": "integer" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "ReportAgentStateRequest": { "description": "Request to report agent's state. The Request itself implies the agent is healthy.", "id": "ReportAgentStateRequest", @@ -1921,22 +1710,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "SetIamPolicyRequest": { - "description": "Request message for `SetIamPolicy` method.", - "id": "SetIamPolicyRequest", - "properties": { - "policy": { - "$ref": "Policy", - "description": "REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the `resource`. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is a valid policy but certain Google Cloud services (such as Projects) might reject them." - }, - "updateMask": { - "description": "OPTIONAL: A FieldMask specifying which fields of the policy to modify. Only the fields in the mask will be modified. If no mask is provided, the following default mask is used: `paths: \"bindings, etag\"`", - "format": "google-fieldmask", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "Status": { "description": "The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors).", "id": "Status", @@ -2123,7 +1896,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "lifecyclePolicies": { - "description": "Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. The valid size of lifecycle policies are [0, 10]. For each lifecycle policy, when the condition is met, the action in that policy will execute. If there are multiple policies that the task execution result matches, we use the action from the first matched policy. If task execution result does not meet with any of the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count.", + "description": "Lifecycle management schema when any task in a task group is failed. Currently we only support one lifecycle policy. When the lifecycle policy condition is met, the action in the policy will execute. If task execution result does not meet with the defined lifecycle policy, we consider it as the default policy. Default policy means if the exit code is 0, exit task. If task ends with non-zero exit code, retry the task with max_retry_count.", "items": { "$ref": "LifecyclePolicy" }, @@ -2190,34 +1963,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "TestIamPermissionsRequest": { - "description": "Request message for `TestIamPermissions` method.", - "id": "TestIamPermissionsRequest", - "properties": { - "permissions": { - "description": "The set of permissions to check for the `resource`. Permissions with wildcards (such as `*` or `storage.*`) are not allowed. For more information see [IAM Overview](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/overview#permissions).", - "items": { - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "TestIamPermissionsResponse": { - "description": "Response message for `TestIamPermissions` method.", - "id": "TestIamPermissionsResponse", - "properties": { - "permissions": { - "description": "A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.", - "items": { - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "Volume": { "description": "Volume describes a volume and parameters for it to be mounted to a VM.", "id": "Volume", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryconnection.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryconnection.v1beta1.json index 9aeeb348c6a..c747fa36cb1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryconnection.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryconnection.v1beta1.json @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230211", "rootUrl": "https://bigqueryconnection.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json index d2fb85f50f2..f8ec6e591ef 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json @@ -1340,7 +1340,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230208", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://bigquerydatatransfer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CheckValidCredsRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json index d1c4f0ce138..d3e31bbfed2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json @@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://bigqueryreservation.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Assignment": { @@ -939,14 +939,14 @@ "type": "string" }, "edition": { - "description": "Edition of the capacity commitment.", + "description": "Do not use.", "enum": [ "EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", "ENTERPRISE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ - "Default value, only for legacy reservations and capacity commitments.", - "Enterprise edition." + "Do not use.", + "Do not use." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ "Trial commitments have a committed period of 182 days after becoming ACTIVE. After that, they are converted to a new commitment based on the `renewal_plan`. Default `renewal_plan` for Trial commitment is Flex so that it can be deleted right after committed period ends.", "Monthly commitments have a committed period of 30 days after becoming ACTIVE. After that, they are not in a committed period anymore and can be removed any time.", "Annual commitments have a committed period of 365 days after becoming ACTIVE. After that they are converted to a new commitment based on the renewal_plan.", - "Should only be used for `renewal_plan` and is only meaningful if edition is specified to values other than EDITION_UNSPECIFIED. Otherwise CreateCapacityCommitmentRequest or UpdateCapacityCommitmentRequest will be rejected with error code `google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT`. If the renewal_plan is NONE, capacity commitment will be removed at the end of its commitment period." + "Do not use." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ "Trial commitments have a committed period of 182 days after becoming ACTIVE. After that, they are converted to a new commitment based on the `renewal_plan`. Default `renewal_plan` for Trial commitment is Flex so that it can be deleted right after committed period ends.", "Monthly commitments have a committed period of 30 days after becoming ACTIVE. After that, they are not in a committed period anymore and can be removed any time.", "Annual commitments have a committed period of 365 days after becoming ACTIVE. After that they are converted to a new commitment based on the renewal_plan.", - "Should only be used for `renewal_plan` and is only meaningful if edition is specified to values other than EDITION_UNSPECIFIED. Otherwise CreateCapacityCommitmentRequest or UpdateCapacityCommitmentRequest will be rejected with error code `google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT`. If the renewal_plan is NONE, capacity commitment will be removed at the end of its commitment period." + "Do not use." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -1134,14 +1134,14 @@ "type": "string" }, "edition": { - "description": "Edition of the reservation.", + "description": "Do not use.", "enum": [ "EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", "ENTERPRISE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ - "Default value, only for legacy reservations and capacity commitments.", - "Enterprise edition." + "Do not use.", + "Do not use." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1.json index f8b3f88f89b..da9abd5235b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1.json @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://binaryauthorization.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdmissionRule": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1beta1.json index 7f8d96ac9d0..a9577c82eb5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/binaryauthorization.v1beta1.json @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://binaryauthorization.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdmissionRule": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v2.json index 8987b0dec23..884d1b026df 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v2.json @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://blogger.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Blog": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v3.json index 4933eead640..4e3831ec4c7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/blogger.v3.json @@ -1710,7 +1710,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://blogger.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Blog": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/businessprofileperformance.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/businessprofileperformance.v1.json index a3bc764b67f..da61d6d28ae 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/businessprofileperformance.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/businessprofileperformance.v1.json @@ -120,7 +120,8 @@ "CALL_CLICKS", "WEBSITE_CLICKS", "BUSINESS_BOOKINGS", - "BUSINESS_FOOD_ORDERS" + "BUSINESS_FOOD_ORDERS", + "BUSINESS_FOOD_MENU_CLICKS" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Represents the default unknown value.", @@ -133,7 +134,8 @@ "The number of times the business profile call button was clicked.", "The number of times the business profile website was clicked.", "The number of bookings received from the business profile.", - "The number of food orders received from the business profile." + "The number of food orders received from the business profile.", + "The number of clicks to view or interact with the menu content on the business profile. Multiple clicks by a unique user within a single day are counted as 1." ], "location": "query", "type": "string" @@ -323,7 +325,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://businessprofileperformance.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Date": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/calendar.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/calendar.v3.json index 89c83fbe576..fbfcc877156 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/calendar.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/calendar.v3.json @@ -1723,7 +1723,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230127", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://www.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Acl": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/certificatemanager.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/certificatemanager.v1.json index c0d8d11b237..baa1f37069a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/certificatemanager.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/certificatemanager.v1.json @@ -1108,7 +1108,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230123", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://certificatemanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizationAttemptInfo": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json index e1867b4c6b5..235f0c713cd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json @@ -2,6 +2,9 @@ "auth": { "oauth2": { "scopes": { + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot": { + "description": "Private Service: https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot" + }, "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships": { "description": "View, add, and remove members from conversations in Google Chat" }, @@ -147,6 +150,7 @@ "$ref": "Media" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages.readonly" ], @@ -178,6 +182,7 @@ "$ref": "Space" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly" ] @@ -206,6 +211,7 @@ "$ref": "ListSpacesResponse" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly" ] @@ -236,6 +242,7 @@ "$ref": "Membership" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.readonly" ] @@ -273,6 +280,7 @@ "$ref": "ListMembershipsResponse" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.readonly" ] @@ -336,6 +344,7 @@ "$ref": "Message" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages.create" ] @@ -362,6 +371,7 @@ "$ref": "Empty" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages" ] }, @@ -387,6 +397,7 @@ "$ref": "Message" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages.readonly" ] @@ -427,6 +438,7 @@ "$ref": "Message" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages" ] }, @@ -466,6 +478,7 @@ "$ref": "Message" }, "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.messages" ] } @@ -493,7 +506,10 @@ "path": "v1/{+name}", "response": { "$ref": "Attachment" - } + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot" + ] } } } @@ -502,7 +518,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://chat.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActionParameter": { @@ -1040,8 +1056,8 @@ "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value for the enum. DO NOT USE.", "A message was sent in a space.", - "The Chat app was added to a space.", - "The Chat app was removed from a space.", + "The Chat app was added to a space by a Chat user or Workspace administrator.", + "The Chat app was removed from a space by a Chat user or Workspace administrator.", "The Chat app's interactive card was clicked." ], "type": "string" @@ -1414,7 +1430,7 @@ "id": "GoogleAppsCardV1DecoratedText", "properties": { "bottomLabel": { - "description": "The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details.", + "description": "The text that appears below `text`. Always truncates.", "type": "string" }, "button": { @@ -1446,7 +1462,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "topLabel": { - "description": "The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates. Supports simple formatting. See Text formatting for formatting details.", + "description": "The text that appears above `text`. Always truncates.", "type": "string" }, "wrapText": { @@ -1457,13 +1473,13 @@ "type": "object" }, "GoogleAppsCardV1Divider": { - "description": "Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` \"divider\": { } ```", + "description": "Displays a divider between widgets, a horizontal line. For example, the following JSON creates a divider: ``` \"divider\": {} ```", "id": "GoogleAppsCardV1Divider", "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, "GoogleAppsCardV1Grid": { - "description": "Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` \"grid\": { \"title\": \"A fine collection of items\", \"numColumns\": 2, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\", \"cornerRadius\": 4.0 }, \"items\": [ \"image\": { \"imageUri\": \"https://www.example.com/image.png\", \"cropStyle\": { \"type\": \"SQUARE\" }, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\" } }, \"title\": \"An item\", \"textAlignment\": \"CENTER\" ], \"onClick\": { \"openLink\": { \"url\":\"https://www.example.com\" } } } ```", + "description": "Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by items divided by columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` \"grid\": { \"title\": \"A fine collection of items\", \"columnCount\": 2, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\", \"cornerRadius\": 4 }, \"items\": [ { \"image\": { \"imageUri\": \"https://www.example.com/image.png\", \"cropStyle\": { \"type\": \"SQUARE\" }, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\" } }, \"title\": \"An item\", \"textAlignment\": \"CENTER\" } ], \"onClick\": { \"openLink\": { \"url\": \"https://www.example.com\" } } } ```", "id": "GoogleAppsCardV1Grid", "properties": { "borderStyle": { @@ -1905,15 +1921,15 @@ "properties": { "buttonList": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1ButtonList", - "description": "A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` \"buttonList\": { \"buttons\": [ \"button\": { \"text\": \"Edit\", \"color\": { \"red\": 0, \"green\": 0, \"blue\": 1, \"alpha\": 1 } \"disabled\": true }, \"button\": { \"icon\": { \"knownIcon\": \"INVITE\" \"altText\": \"check calendar\" }, \"onClick\": { \"openLink\": { \"url\": \"https://example.com/calendar\" } } }, ] } ```" + "description": "A list of buttons. For example, the following JSON creates two buttons. The first is a blue text button and the second is an image button that opens a link: ``` \"buttonList\": { \"buttons\": [ { \"text\": \"Edit\", \"color\": { \"red\": 0, \"green\": 0, \"blue\": 1, \"alpha\": 1 }, \"disabled\": true, }, { \"icon\": { \"knownIcon\": \"INVITE\", \"altText\": \"check calendar\" }, \"onClick\": { \"openLink\": { \"url\": \"https://example.com/calendar\" } } } ] } ```" }, "dateTimePicker": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1DateTimePicker", - "description": "Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` \"date_time_picker\": { \"name\": \"appointment_time\", \"label\": \"Book your appointment at:\", \"type\": \"DateTimePickerType.DATE_AND_TIME\", \"valueMsEpoch\": \"796435200000\" } ```" + "description": "Displays a selection/input widget for date, time, or date and time. Not supported by Chat apps. Support by Chat apps is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a datetime picker to schedule an appointment: ``` \"dateTimePicker\": { \"name\": \"appointment_time\", \"label\": \"Book your appointment at:\", \"type\": \"DATE_AND_TIME\", \"valueMsEpoch\": \"796435200000\" } ```" }, "decoratedText": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1DecoratedText", - "description": "Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` \"decoratedText\": { \"icon\": { \"knownIcon\": \"EMAIL\" }, \"topLabel\": \"Email Address\", \"text\": \"sasha@example.com\", \"bottomLabel\": \"This is a new Email address!\", \"switchWidget\": { \"name\": \"has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha\", \"selected\": false, \"controlType\": \"ControlType.CHECKBOX\" } } ```" + "description": "Displays a decorated text item. For example, the following JSON creates a decorated text widget showing email address: ``` \"decoratedText\": { \"icon\": { \"knownIcon\": \"EMAIL\" }, \"topLabel\": \"Email Address\", \"text\": \"sasha@example.com\", \"bottomLabel\": \"This is a new Email address!\", \"switchControl\": { \"name\": \"has_send_welcome_email_to_sasha\", \"selected\": false, \"controlType\": \"CHECKBOX\" } } ```" }, "divider": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1Divider", @@ -1921,15 +1937,15 @@ }, "grid": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1Grid", - "description": "Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` \"grid\": { \"title\": \"A fine collection of items\", \"numColumns\": 2, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\", \"cornerRadius\": 4.0 }, \"items\": [ \"image\": { \"imageUri\": \"https://www.example.com/image.png\", \"cropStyle\": { \"type\": \"SQUARE\" }, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\" } }, \"title\": \"An item\", \"textAlignment\": \"CENTER\" ], \"onClick\": { \"openLink\": { \"url\":\"https://www.example.com\" } } } ```" + "description": "Displays a grid with a collection of items. A grid supports any number of columns and items. The number of rows is determined by the upper bounds of the number items divided by the number of columns. A grid with 10 items and 2 columns has 5 rows. A grid with 11 items and 2 columns has 6 rows. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a 2 column grid with a single item: ``` \"grid\": { \"title\": \"A fine collection of items\", \"columnCount\": 2, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\", \"cornerRadius\": 4 }, \"items\": [ { \"image\": { \"imageUri\": \"https://www.example.com/image.png\", \"cropStyle\": { \"type\": \"SQUARE\" }, \"borderStyle\": { \"type\": \"STROKE\" } }, \"title\": \"An item\", \"textAlignment\": \"CENTER\" } ], \"onClick\": { \"openLink\": { \"url\": \"https://www.example.com\" } } } ```" }, "image": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1Image", - "description": "Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` \"image\": { \"imageUrl\": \"https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png\" \"altText\": \"Chat app avatar\" } ```" + "description": "Displays an image. For example, the following JSON creates an image with alternative text: ``` \"image\": { \"imageUrl\": \"https://developers.google.com/chat/images/quickstart-app-avatar.png\", \"altText\": \"Chat app avatar\" } ```" }, "selectionInput": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1SelectionInput", - "description": "Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` \"selectionInput\": { \"name\": \"size\", \"label\": \"Size\" \"type\": \"SelectionType.DROPDOWN\", \"items\": [ { \"text\": \"S\", \"value\": \"small\", \"selected\": false }, { \"text\": \"M\", \"value\": \"medium\", \"selected\": true }, { \"text\": \"L\", \"value\": \"large\", \"selected\": false }, { \"text\": \"XL\", \"value\": \"extra_large\", \"selected\": false } ] } ```" + "description": "Displays a selection control that lets users select items. Selection controls can be check boxes, radio buttons, switches, or dropdown menus. Currently supported in [dialogs](https://developers.google.com/chat/how-tos/dialogs). Support for [card messages](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/guides/message-formats/cards) is coming soon. For example, the following JSON creates a dropdown menu that lets users choose a size: ``` \"selectionInput\": { \"name\": \"size\", \"label\": \"Size\" \"type\": \"DROPDOWN\", \"items\": [ { \"text\": \"S\", \"value\": \"small\", \"selected\": false }, { \"text\": \"M\", \"value\": \"medium\", \"selected\": true }, { \"text\": \"L\", \"value\": \"large\", \"selected\": false }, { \"text\": \"XL\", \"value\": \"extra_large\", \"selected\": false } ] } ```" }, "textInput": { "$ref": "GoogleAppsCardV1TextInput", @@ -2487,6 +2503,11 @@ "description": "A space in Google Chat. Spaces are conversations between two or more users or 1:1 messages between a user and a Chat app.", "id": "Space", "properties": { + "adminInstalled": { + "description": "Output only. Whether the Chat app was installed by a Google Workspace administrator. Administrators can install a Chat app for their domain, organizational unit, or a group of users. Administrators can only install Chat apps for direct messaging between users and the app. To support admin install, your app must feature direct messaging.", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "boolean" + }, "displayName": { "description": "The space's display name. Required when [creating a space](https://developers.google.com/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/create). For direct messages, this field may be empty. Supports up to 128 characters.", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json index 729cf9d3b2d..0814af528de 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json @@ -493,6 +493,108 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chrome.management.reports.readonly" ] }, + "countPrintJobsByPrinter": { + "description": "Get a summary of printing done by each printer.", + "flatPath": "v1/customers/{customersId}/reports:countPrintJobsByPrinter", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "chromemanagement.customers.reports.countPrintJobsByPrinter", + "parameterOrder": [ + "customer" + ], + "parameters": { + "customer": { + "description": "Required. Customer ID prefixed with \"customers/\" or \"customers/my_customer\" to use the customer associated to the account making the request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^customers/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "filter": { + "description": "Query string to filter results, AND-separated fields in EBNF syntax. Note: OR operations are not supported in this filter. Note: Only >= and <= comparators are supported in this filter. Supported filter fields: * completion_time", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "orderBy": { + "description": "Field used to order results. If omitted, results will be ordered in ascending order of the 'printer' field. Supported order_by fields: * printer * job_count * device_count * user_count", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "pageSize": { + "description": "Maximum number of results to return. Maximum and default are 100.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "Token to specify the page of the response to be returned.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "printerOrgUnitId": { + "description": "The ID of the organizational unit for printers. If specified, only data for printers from the specified organizational unit will be returned. If omitted, data for printers from all organizational units will be returned.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1/{+customer}/reports:countPrintJobsByPrinter", + "response": { + "$ref": "GoogleChromeManagementV1CountPrintJobsByPrinterResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chrome.management.reports.readonly" + ] + }, + "countPrintJobsByUser": { + "description": "Get a summary of printing done by each user.", + "flatPath": "v1/customers/{customersId}/reports:countPrintJobsByUser", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "chromemanagement.customers.reports.countPrintJobsByUser", + "parameterOrder": [ + "customer" + ], + "parameters": { + "customer": { + "description": "Required. Customer ID prefixed with \"customers/\" or \"customers/my_customer\" to use the customer associated to the account making the request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^customers/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "filter": { + "description": "Query string to filter results, AND-separated fields in EBNF syntax. Note: OR operations are not supported in this filter. Note: Only >= and <= comparators are supported in this filter. Supported filter fields: * completion_time", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "orderBy": { + "description": "Field used to order results. If omitted, results will be ordered in ascending order of the 'user_email' field. Supported order_by fields: * user_email * job_count * printer_count * device_count", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "pageSize": { + "description": "Maximum number of results to return. Maximum and default are 100.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "Token to specify the page of the response to be returned.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "printerOrgUnitId": { + "description": "The ID of the organizational unit for printers. If specified, only print jobs initiated with printers from the specified organizational unit will be counted. If omitted, all print jobs will be counted.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1/{+customer}/reports:countPrintJobsByUser", + "response": { + "$ref": "GoogleChromeManagementV1CountPrintJobsByUserResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chrome.management.reports.readonly" + ] + }, "findInstalledAppDevices": { "description": "Generate report of devices that have a specified app installed.", "flatPath": "v1/customers/{customersId}/reports:findInstalledAppDevices", @@ -794,7 +896,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230217", "rootUrl": "https://chromemanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleChromeManagementV1AndroidAppInfo": { @@ -1581,6 +1683,52 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "GoogleChromeManagementV1CountPrintJobsByPrinterResponse": { + "description": "Response containing a summary printing report for each printer from the specified organizational unit for the requested time interval.", + "id": "GoogleChromeManagementV1CountPrintJobsByPrinterResponse", + "properties": { + "nextPageToken": { + "description": "Pagination token for requesting the next page.", + "type": "string" + }, + "printerReports": { + "description": "List of PrinterReports matching request.", + "items": { + "$ref": "GoogleChromeManagementV1PrinterReport" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "totalSize": { + "description": "Total number of printers matching request.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleChromeManagementV1CountPrintJobsByUserResponse": { + "description": "Response containing a summary printing report for each user that has initiated a print job with a printer from the specified organizational unit during the requested time interval.", + "id": "GoogleChromeManagementV1CountPrintJobsByUserResponse", + "properties": { + "nextPageToken": { + "description": "Pagination token for requesting the next page.", + "type": "string" + }, + "totalSize": { + "description": "Total number of users matching request.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "userPrintReports": { + "description": "List of UserPrintReports matching request.", + "items": { + "$ref": "GoogleChromeManagementV1UserPrintReport" + }, + "type": "array" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "GoogleChromeManagementV1CpuInfo": { "description": "CPU specifications for the device * This field provides device information, which is static and will not change over time. * Data for this field is controlled via policy: [ReportDeviceCpuInfo](https://chromeenterprise.google/policies/#ReportDeviceCpuInfo) * Data Collection Frequency: Only at Upload * Default Data Reporting Frequency: 3 hours - Policy Controlled: Yes * Cache: If the device is offline, the collected data is stored locally, and will be reported when the device is next online: No * Reported for affiliated users only: N/A", "id": "GoogleChromeManagementV1CpuInfo", @@ -2483,6 +2631,40 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "GoogleChromeManagementV1PrinterReport": { + "description": "Report for CountPrintJobsByPrinter, contains statistics on printer usage. Contains the total number of print jobs initiated with this printer, the number of users and the number of devices that have initiated at least one print job with this printer.", + "id": "GoogleChromeManagementV1PrinterReport", + "properties": { + "deviceCount": { + "description": "Number of chrome devices that have been used to send print jobs to the specified printer.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "jobCount": { + "description": "Number of print jobs sent to the printer.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "printer": { + "description": "Printer name.", + "type": "string" + }, + "printerId": { + "description": "Printer API ID.", + "type": "string" + }, + "printerModel": { + "description": "Printer model.", + "type": "string" + }, + "userCount": { + "description": "Number of users that have sent print jobs to the printer.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "GoogleChromeManagementV1StorageInfo": { "description": "Status data for storage. * This field is telemetry information and this will change over time as the device is utilized. * Data for this field is controlled via policy: [ReportDeviceStorageStatus](https://chromeenterprise.google/policies/#ReportDeviceStorageStatus) * Data Collection Frequency: Only at Upload * Default Data Reporting Frequency: 3 hours - Policy Controlled: Yes * Cache: If the device is offline, the collected data is stored locally, and will be reported when the device is next online: No * Reported for affiliated users only: N/A", "id": "GoogleChromeManagementV1StorageInfo", @@ -3047,6 +3229,36 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "GoogleChromeManagementV1UserPrintReport": { + "description": "Report for CountPrintJobsByUser, contains printing statistics for a user. Contains the number of printers, the number of devices used to initiate print jobs, and the number of print jobs initiated.", + "id": "GoogleChromeManagementV1UserPrintReport", + "properties": { + "deviceCount": { + "description": "Number of chrome devices that have been used to initiate print jobs by the user.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "jobCount": { + "description": "Number of print jobs initiated by the user.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "printerCount": { + "description": "Number of printers used by the user.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "userEmail": { + "description": "The primary e-mail address of the user.", + "type": "string" + }, + "userId": { + "description": "The unique Directory API ID of the user.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "GoogleRpcStatus": { "description": "The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors).", "id": "GoogleRpcStatus", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromepolicy.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromepolicy.v1.json index 33fa7a845d1..a5adf1bd602 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromepolicy.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromepolicy.v1.json @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230217", "rootUrl": "https://chromepolicy.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ChromeCrosDpanelAutosettingsProtoPolicyApiLifecycle": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromeuxreport.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromeuxreport.v1.json index b442500842d..710a3c07aba 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromeuxreport.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromeuxreport.v1.json @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://chromeuxreport.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Bin": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/civicinfo.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/civicinfo.v2.json index b2a05dfb06b..2e0a1b43e18 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/civicinfo.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/civicinfo.v2.json @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://civicinfo.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdministrationRegion": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudchannel.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudchannel.v1.json index 80386e9e346..1de2277e611 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudchannel.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudchannel.v1.json @@ -2009,7 +2009,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://cloudchannel.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudChannelV1ActivateEntitlementRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/clouddebugger.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/clouddebugger.v2.json index b54efb60fbf..0aff9e7458c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/clouddebugger.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/clouddebugger.v2.json @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://clouddebugger.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AliasContext": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json index 790142784e3..8a895a8fec4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230206", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json index e9fd31340e9..6e1b74a54be 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230206", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json index a322f72f9a6..a62c36b7b68 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230206", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json index 850530a6a70..6835e514baa 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230206", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudprofiler.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudprofiler.v2.json index 8f2837f9cad..c77461442c1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudprofiler.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudprofiler.v2.json @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230130", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://cloudprofiler.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CreateProfileRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v1.json index 9cb487bcf03..8bb2fa61976 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v1.json @@ -1171,7 +1171,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Ancestor": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2.json index 18a6031d0d1..cf2c1c306eb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2.json @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2beta1.json index 02955d84ee6..e50d70d6bf4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudresourcemanager.v2beta1.json @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json index e1c536589c7..75819acd5e6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://cloudscheduler.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppEngineHttpTarget": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json index 16e62f5efc4..d15ea560e4b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://cloudscheduler.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppEngineHttpTarget": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsearch.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsearch.v1.json index 15106234326..22040e51092 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsearch.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsearch.v1.json @@ -2077,7 +2077,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://cloudsearch.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbuseReportingConfig": { @@ -3777,9 +3777,14 @@ "type": "string" }, "numMembers": { + "description": "Deprecated. Use segmented_membership_counts instead which also includes other counts such as rosters.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, + "segmentedMembershipCounts": { + "$ref": "AppsDynamiteSharedSegmentedMembershipCounts", + "description": "Member counts object with types of members and their respective counts." + }, "userMembershipState": { "description": "searching user's membership state in this space", "enum": [ @@ -3988,6 +3993,10 @@ "$ref": "AppsDynamiteStorageActionActionParameter" }, "type": "array" + }, + "persistValues": { + "description": "Indicates whether form values persist after the action. The default value is `false`. If `true`, form values remain after the action is triggered. When using [LoadIndicator.NONE](workspace/add-ons/reference/rpc/google.apps.card.v1#loadindicator) for actions, `persist_values` = `true`is recommended, as it ensures that any changes made by the user after form or on change actions are sent to the server are not overwritten by the response. If `false`, the form values are cleared when the action is triggered. When `persist_values` is set to `false`, it is strongly recommended that the card use [LoadIndicator.SPINNER](workspace/add-ons/reference/rpc/google.apps.card.v1#loadindicator) for all actions, as this locks the UI to ensure no changes are made by the user while the action is being processed.", + "type": "boolean" } }, "type": "object" @@ -4762,13 +4771,15 @@ "CHECK_BOX", "RADIO_BUTTON", "SWITCH", - "DROPDOWN" + "DROPDOWN", + "MULTI_SELECT" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The selection type is a checkbox.", "The selection type is a radio button.", "The selection type is a switch.", - "The selection type is a dropdown." + "The selection type is a dropdown.", + "The selection type is multi-select" ], "type": "string" } @@ -13071,6 +13082,13 @@ "$ref": "MultiKey" }, "type": "array" + }, + "wonderCardMappings": { + "description": "Value of coproc's message delete history record extension that exports /wonder/message_mapping/{vertical} attribute of deleted messages which have smartmail label (eg. ^cob_sm_invoice, etc).", + "items": { + "$ref": "WonderCardDelete" + }, + "type": "array" } }, "type": "object" @@ -17986,6 +18004,18 @@ "Server-generated user mention, for clients to strikethrough." ], "type": "string" + }, + "userMentionError": { + "description": "Specific reason for the user mention failing, for fine-grained processing by clients (i.e. specific error message for space limit exceeded case) IMPORTANT: Set this only for FAILED_TO_ADD case.", + "enum": [ + "USER_MENTION_ERROR_UNSPECIFIED", + "MEMBERSHIP_LIMIT_EXCEEDED" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "", + "Failure caused by adding user to a room that is full" + ], + "type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -18219,6 +18249,39 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "WonderCardDelete": { + "description": "Message delete history record extension that exports /wonder/message_mapping/{vertical} attribute of deleted messages which have any smartmail label (eg. ^cob_sm_invoice). go/how-dd-card-deletion", + "id": "WonderCardDelete", + "properties": { + "messageMappings": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "WonderMessageMapping" + }, + "description": "Contains <{@code WonderCardType} enum value, value of /wonder/message_mapping/{vertical} attribute of deleted message> pairs.", + "type": "object" + }, + "msgId": { + "description": "Message ID of the original deleted message", + "format": "uint64", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "WonderMessageMapping": { + "description": "Card mapping attached to original message as an attribute stored at /wonder/message_mapping/{vertical} Next ID: 2", + "id": "WonderMessageMapping", + "properties": { + "wonderCardMessageId": { + "description": "List of wonder card (client-generated) message IDs generated based on the original message.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "WrappedResourceKey": { "description": "A wrapper around a raw resource key. The secret should never be logged, and this proto annotates those secret fields to ensure that they are not. Clients are encouraged to use this proto rather than defining their own, to ensure that secrets are correctly annotated.", "id": "WrappedResourceKey", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudshell.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudshell.v1.json index bbe33651425..a1cababcb41 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudshell.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudshell.v1.json @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://cloudshell.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddPublicKeyMetadata": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json index 8d27f286945..eb867f9bf24 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Actor": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2.json index a90b742fbf4..93eecfbbb33 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2.json @@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://cloudtasks.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppEngineHttpRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta2.json index 9b501fcf0c5..b12312c02f8 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta2.json @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://cloudtasks.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcknowledgeTaskRequest": { @@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "BufferTaskRequest": { - "description": "Request message for BufferTask.", + "description": "LINT.IfChange Request message for BufferTask.", "id": "BufferTaskRequest", "properties": { "body": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta3.json index caab27727bf..55f0af96b69 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtasks.v2beta3.json @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://cloudtasks.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppEngineHttpQueue": { @@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "BufferTaskRequest": { - "description": "Request message for BufferTask.", + "description": "LINT.IfChange Request message for BufferTask.", "id": "BufferTaskRequest", "properties": { "body": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json index 92f6fb46a05..db7e53ae869 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230126", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://cloudtrace.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2.json index c0ec86391c1..5c11477b20e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2.json @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230126", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://cloudtrace.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Annotation": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2beta1.json index a22455889d3..67f6faba079 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v2beta1.json @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230126", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://cloudtrace.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1.json index 3c43ea35951..5993dd685c4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1.json @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://composer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AllowedIpRange": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1beta1.json index d38b96e4b3c..bfa39133b00 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/composer.v1beta1.json @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://composer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AllowedIpRange": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json index d150c1812a7..f3474dc9922 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json @@ -7840,7 +7840,7 @@ ] }, "getFromFamily": { - "description": "Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.", + "description": "Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/images/family/{family}", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "compute.images.getFromFamily", @@ -7857,7 +7857,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "project": { - "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "description": "The image project that the image belongs to. For example, to get a CentOS image, specify centos-cloud as the image project.", "location": "path", "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", "required": true, @@ -40433,7 +40433,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -51811,7 +51811,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "family": { - "description": "The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.", + "description": "The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.", "type": "string" }, "guestOsFeatures": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json index 4ce950c4d16..d1713674531 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json @@ -7175,7 +7175,7 @@ ] }, "getFromFamily": { - "description": "Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.", + "description": "Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/images/family/{family}", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "compute.images.getFromFamily", @@ -7192,7 +7192,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "project": { - "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "description": "The image project that the image belongs to. For example, to get a CentOS image, specify centos-cloud as the image project.", "location": "path", "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", "required": true, @@ -9241,6 +9241,66 @@ }, "instanceTemplates": { "methods": { + "aggregatedList": { + "description": "Retrieves the list of all InstanceTemplates resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/instanceTemplates", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "compute.instanceTemplates.aggregatedList", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project" + ], + "parameters": { + "filter": { + "description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "includeAllScopes": { + "description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", + "location": "query", + "type": "boolean" + }, + "maxResults": { + "default": "500", + "description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", + "format": "uint32", + "location": "query", + "minimum": "0", + "type": "integer" + }, + "orderBy": { + "description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "returnPartialSuccess": { + "description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.", + "location": "query", + "type": "boolean" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/instanceTemplates", + "response": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplateAggregatedList" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" + ] + }, "delete": { "description": "Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone. It is not possible to delete templates that are already in use by a managed instance group.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", @@ -23237,6 +23297,205 @@ } } }, + "regionInstanceTemplates": { + "methods": { + "delete": { + "description": "Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "httpMethod": "DELETE", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.delete", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region", + "instanceTemplate" + ], + "parameters": { + "instanceTemplate": { + "description": "The name of the instance template to delete.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the region for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" + ] + }, + "get": { + "description": "Returns the specified instance template. Gets a list of available instance templates by making a list() request.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.get", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region", + "instanceTemplate" + ], + "parameters": { + "instanceTemplate": { + "description": "The name of the instance template.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the region for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "response": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplate" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" + ] + }, + "insert": { + "description": "Creates an instance template in the specified project and region using the global instance template whose URL is included in the request.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.insert", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region" + ], + "parameters": { + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the region for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "request": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplate" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" + ] + }, + "list": { + "description": "Retrieves a list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and region.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.list", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region" + ], + "parameters": { + "filter": { + "description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "maxResults": { + "default": "500", + "description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", + "format": "uint32", + "location": "query", + "minimum": "0", + "type": "integer" + }, + "orderBy": { + "description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the regions for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "returnPartialSuccess": { + "description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.", + "location": "query", + "type": "boolean" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "response": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplateList" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" + ] + } + } + }, "regionInstances": { "methods": { "bulkInsert": { @@ -36022,7 +36281,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -40721,6 +40980,47 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "CustomErrorResponsePolicy": { + "description": "Specifies the custom error response policy that must be applied when the backend service or backend bucket responds with an error.", + "id": "CustomErrorResponsePolicy", + "properties": { + "errorResponseRules": { + "description": "Specifies rules for returning error responses. In a given policy, if you specify rules for both a range of error codes as well as rules for specific error codes then rules with specific error codes have a higher priority. For example, assume that you configure a rule for 401 (Un-authorized) code, and another for all 4 series error codes (4XX). If the backend service returns a 401, then the rule for 401 will be applied. However if the backend service returns a 403, the rule for 4xx takes effect.", + "items": { + "$ref": "CustomErrorResponsePolicyCustomErrorResponseRule" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "errorService": { + "description": "The full or partial URL to the BackendBucket resource that contains the custom error content. Examples are: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - compute/v1/projects/project/global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket - global/backendBuckets/myBackendBucket If errorService is not specified at lower levels like pathMatcher, pathRule and routeRule, an errorService specified at a higher level in the UrlMap will be used. If UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy contains one or more errorResponseRules[], it must specify errorService. If load balancer cannot reach the backendBucket, a simple Not Found Error will be returned, with the original response code (or overrideResponseCode if configured). errorService is not supported for internal or regional HTTP/HTTPS load balancers.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "CustomErrorResponsePolicyCustomErrorResponseRule": { + "description": "Specifies the mapping between the response code that will be returned along with the custom error content and the response code returned by the backend service.", + "id": "CustomErrorResponsePolicyCustomErrorResponseRule", + "properties": { + "matchResponseCodes": { + "description": "Valid values include: - A number between 400 and 599: For example 401 or 503, in which case the load balancer applies the policy if the error code exactly matches this value. - 5xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 500 to 599. - 4xx: Load Balancer will apply the policy if the backend service responds with any response code in the range of 400 to 499. Values must be unique within matchResponseCodes and across all errorResponseRules of CustomErrorResponsePolicy.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "overrideResponseCode": { + "description": "The HTTP status code returned with the response containing the custom error content. If overrideResponseCode is not supplied, the same response code returned by the original backend bucket or backend service is returned to the client.", + "format": "int32", + "type": "integer" + }, + "path": { + "description": "The full path to a file within backendBucket . For example: /errors/defaultError.html path must start with a leading slash. path cannot have trailing slashes. If the file is not available in backendBucket or the load balancer cannot reach the BackendBucket, a simple Not Found Error is returned to the client. The value must be from 1 to 1024 characters", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "CustomerEncryptionKey": { "id": "CustomerEncryptionKey", "properties": { @@ -45523,6 +45823,10 @@ "description": "The HttpRouteRule setting specifies how to match an HTTP request and the corresponding routing action that load balancing proxies perform.", "id": "HttpRouteRule", "properties": { + "customErrorResponsePolicy": { + "$ref": "CustomErrorResponsePolicy", + "description": "customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the RouteRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with routeRules.routeAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the customErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the customErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing." + }, "description": { "description": "The short description conveying the intent of this routeRule. The description can have a maximum length of 1024 characters.", "type": "string" @@ -45848,7 +46152,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "family": { - "description": "The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.", + "description": "The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.", "type": "string" }, "guestOsFeatures": { @@ -48975,6 +49279,10 @@ "$ref": "InstanceProperties", "description": "The instance properties for this instance template." }, + "region": { + "description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.", + "type": "string" + }, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.", "type": "string" @@ -48990,6 +49298,127 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "InstanceTemplateAggregatedList": { + "description": "Contains a list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList.", + "id": "InstanceTemplateAggregatedList", + "properties": { + "id": { + "description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", + "type": "string" + }, + "items": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplatesScopedList", + "description": "The name of the scope that contains this set of instance templates." + }, + "description": "A list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList resources.", + "type": "object" + }, + "kind": { + "default": "compute#instanceTemplateAggregatedList", + "description": "Type of resource.", + "type": "string" + }, + "nextPageToken": { + "description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", + "type": "string" + }, + "selfLink": { + "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", + "type": "string" + }, + "warning": { + "description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", + "properties": { + "code": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", + "enum": [ + "CLEANUP_FAILED", + "DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", + "DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", + "DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", + "EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", + "EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", + "FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", + "INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", + "INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", + "LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", + "MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", + "NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", + "NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", + "NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", + "NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", + "NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", + "PARTIAL_SUCCESS", + "REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", + "RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", + "RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", + "SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", + "SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", + "UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", + "UNREACHABLE" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", + "A link to a deprecated resource was created.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", + "The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", + "Warning that is present in an external api call", + "Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", + "The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", + "A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", + "When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", + "A resource depends on a missing type", + "The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", + "The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", + "The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", + "Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", + "No results are present on a particular list page.", + "Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", + "The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", + "Warning that a resource is in use.", + "One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", + "When a resource schema validation is ignored.", + "Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", + "When undeclared properties in the schema are present", + "A given scope cannot be reached." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "data": { + "description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", + "items": { + "properties": { + "key": { + "description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", + "type": "string" + }, + "value": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "message": { + "description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "InstanceTemplateList": { "description": "A list of instance templates.", "id": "InstanceTemplateList", @@ -49110,6 +49539,108 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "InstanceTemplatesScopedList": { + "id": "InstanceTemplatesScopedList", + "properties": { + "instanceTemplates": { + "description": "[Output Only] A list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and zone.", + "items": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplate" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "warning": { + "description": "[Output Only] An informational warning that replaces the list of instance templates when the list is empty.", + "properties": { + "code": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", + "enum": [ + "CLEANUP_FAILED", + "DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", + "DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", + "DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", + "EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", + "EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", + "FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", + "INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", + "INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", + "LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", + "MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", + "NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", + "NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", + "NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", + "NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", + "NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", + "PARTIAL_SUCCESS", + "REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", + "RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", + "RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", + "SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", + "SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", + "UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", + "UNREACHABLE" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", + "A link to a deprecated resource was created.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", + "The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", + "Warning that is present in an external api call", + "Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", + "The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", + "A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", + "When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", + "A resource depends on a missing type", + "The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", + "The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", + "The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", + "Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", + "No results are present on a particular list page.", + "Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", + "The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", + "Warning that a resource is in use.", + "One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", + "When a resource schema validation is ignored.", + "Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", + "When undeclared properties in the schema are present", + "A given scope cannot be reached." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "data": { + "description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", + "items": { + "properties": { + "key": { + "description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", + "type": "string" + }, + "value": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "message": { + "description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "InstanceWithNamedPorts": { "id": "InstanceWithNamedPorts", "properties": { @@ -57690,6 +58221,10 @@ "description": "A matcher for the path portion of the URL. The BackendService from the longest-matched rule will serve the URL. If no rule was matched, the default service is used.", "id": "PathMatcher", "properties": { + "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { + "$ref": "CustomErrorResponsePolicy", + "description": "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the PathMatcher level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like RouteRule and PathRule within this PathMatcher. If an error code does not have a policy defined in defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, then a policy defined for the error code in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A RouteRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in RouteRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with pathMatcher.defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing." + }, "defaultRouteAction": { "$ref": "HttpRouteAction", "description": "defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the pathRules or routeRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within a path matcher's defaultRouteAction." @@ -57735,6 +58270,10 @@ "description": "A path-matching rule for a URL. If matched, will use the specified BackendService to handle the traffic arriving at this URL.", "id": "PathRule", "properties": { + "customErrorResponsePolicy": { + "$ref": "CustomErrorResponsePolicy", + "description": "customErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. If a policy for an error code is not configured for the PathRule, a policy for the error code configured in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. If one is not specified in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy, the policy configured in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy are configured with policies for 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathRule for /coming_soon/ is configured for the error code 404. If the request is for www.myotherdomain.com and a 404 is encountered, the policy under UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If a 404 response is encountered for the request www.example.com/current_events/, the pathMatcher's policy takes effect. If however, the request for www.example.com/coming_soon/ encounters a 404, the policy in PathRule.customErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. If any of the requests in this example encounter a 500 error code, the policy at UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. customErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing." + }, "paths": { "description": "The list of path patterns to match. Each must start with / and the only place a * is allowed is at the end following a /. The string fed to the path matcher does not include any text after the first ? or #, and those chars are not allowed here.", "items": { @@ -71254,6 +71793,10 @@ "description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", "type": "string" }, + "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy": { + "$ref": "CustomErrorResponsePolicy", + "description": "defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy specifies how the Load Balancer returns error responses when BackendServiceor BackendBucket responds with an error. This policy takes effect at the Load Balancer level and applies only when no policy has been defined for the error code at lower levels like PathMatcher, RouteRule and PathRule within this UrlMap. For example, consider a UrlMap with the following configuration: - defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy containing policies for responding to 5xx and 4xx errors - A PathMatcher configured for *.example.com has defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy for 4xx. If a request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 404, the policy in pathMatcher.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When the request for http://www.example.com/ encounters a 502, the policy in UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy will be enforced. When a request that does not match any host in *.example.com such as http://www.myotherexample.com/, encounters a 404, UrlMap.defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy takes effect. When used in conjunction with defaultRouteAction.retryPolicy, retries take precedence. Only once all retries are exhausted, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is applied. While attempting a retry, if load balancer is successful in reaching the service, the defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is ignored and the response from the service is returned to the client. defaultCustomErrorResponsePolicy is supported only for Global External HTTP(S) load balancing." + }, "defaultRouteAction": { "$ref": "HttpRouteAction", "description": "defaultRouteAction takes effect when none of the hostRules match. The load balancer performs advanced routing actions, such as URL rewrites and header transformations, before forwarding the request to the selected backend. If defaultRouteAction specifies any weightedBackendServices, defaultService must not be set. Conversely if defaultService is set, defaultRouteAction cannot contain any weightedBackendServices. Only one of defaultRouteAction or defaultUrlRedirect must be set. URL maps for Classic external HTTP(S) load balancers only support the urlRewrite action within defaultRouteAction. defaultRouteAction has no effect when the URL map is bound to a target gRPC proxy that has the validateForProxyless field set to true." diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json index f0af2ec100d..28e2a6581ed 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json @@ -6655,7 +6655,7 @@ ] }, "getFromFamily": { - "description": "Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated.", + "description": "Returns the latest image that is part of an image family and is not deprecated. For more information on image families, see Public image families documentation.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/images/family/{family}", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "compute.images.getFromFamily", @@ -6672,7 +6672,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "project": { - "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "description": "The image project that the image belongs to. For example, to get a CentOS image, specify centos-cloud as the image project.", "location": "path", "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", "required": true, @@ -8485,6 +8485,66 @@ }, "instanceTemplates": { "methods": { + "aggregatedList": { + "description": "Retrieves the list of all InstanceTemplates resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/instanceTemplates", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "compute.instanceTemplates.aggregatedList", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project" + ], + "parameters": { + "filter": { + "description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "includeAllScopes": { + "description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", + "location": "query", + "type": "boolean" + }, + "maxResults": { + "default": "500", + "description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", + "format": "uint32", + "location": "query", + "minimum": "0", + "type": "integer" + }, + "orderBy": { + "description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "returnPartialSuccess": { + "description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.", + "location": "query", + "type": "boolean" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/instanceTemplates", + "response": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplateAggregatedList" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" + ] + }, "delete": { "description": "Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone. It is not possible to delete templates that are already in use by a managed instance group.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", @@ -10312,6 +10372,56 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] }, + "setName": { + "description": "Sets name of an instance.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/setName", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "compute.instances.setName", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "zone", + "instance" + ], + "parameters": { + "instance": { + "description": "The instance name for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "zone": { + "description": "The name of the zone for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/setName", + "request": { + "$ref": "InstancesSetNameRequest" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" + ] + }, "setScheduling": { "description": "Sets an instance's scheduling options. You can only call this method on a stopped instance, that is, a VM instance that is in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. For more information about setting scheduling options for a VM, see Set VM host maintenance policy.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/setScheduling", @@ -21077,6 +21187,205 @@ } } }, + "regionInstanceTemplates": { + "methods": { + "delete": { + "description": "Deletes the specified instance template. Deleting an instance template is permanent and cannot be undone.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "httpMethod": "DELETE", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.delete", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region", + "instanceTemplate" + ], + "parameters": { + "instanceTemplate": { + "description": "The name of the instance template to delete.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the region for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" + ] + }, + "get": { + "description": "Returns the specified instance template. Gets a list of available instance templates by making a list() request.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.get", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region", + "instanceTemplate" + ], + "parameters": { + "instanceTemplate": { + "description": "The name of the instance template.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the region for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates/{instanceTemplate}", + "response": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplate" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" + ] + }, + "insert": { + "description": "Creates an instance template in the specified project and region using the global instance template whose URL is included in the request.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.insert", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region" + ], + "parameters": { + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the region for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "request": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplate" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" + ] + }, + "list": { + "description": "Retrieves a list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and region.", + "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "compute.regionInstanceTemplates.list", + "parameterOrder": [ + "project", + "region" + ], + "parameters": { + "filter": { + "description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:` operator can be used with string fields to match substrings. For non-string fields it is equivalent to the `=` operator. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "maxResults": { + "default": "500", + "description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", + "format": "uint32", + "location": "query", + "minimum": "0", + "type": "integer" + }, + "orderBy": { + "description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "project": { + "description": "Project ID for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "region": { + "description": "The name of the regions for this request.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "returnPartialSuccess": { + "description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.", + "location": "query", + "type": "boolean" + } + }, + "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceTemplates", + "response": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplateList" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" + ] + } + } + }, "regionInstances": { "methods": { "bulkInsert": { @@ -32814,7 +33123,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceleratorConfig": { @@ -42342,7 +42651,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "family": { - "description": "The name of the image family to which this image belongs. You can create disks by specifying an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.", + "description": "The name of the image family to which this image belongs. The image family name can be from a publicly managed image family provided by Compute Engine, or from a custom image family you create. For example, centos-stream-9 is a publicly available image family. For more information, see Image family best practices. When creating disks, you can specify an image family instead of a specific image name. The image family always returns its latest image that is not deprecated. The name of the image family must comply with RFC1035.", "type": "string" }, "guestOsFeatures": { @@ -45275,6 +45584,10 @@ "$ref": "InstanceProperties", "description": "The instance properties for this instance template." }, + "region": { + "description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the instance template resides. Only applicable for regional resources.", + "type": "string" + }, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] The URL for this instance template. The server defines this URL.", "type": "string" @@ -45290,6 +45603,127 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "InstanceTemplateAggregatedList": { + "description": "Contains a list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList.", + "id": "InstanceTemplateAggregatedList", + "properties": { + "id": { + "description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", + "type": "string" + }, + "items": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplatesScopedList", + "description": "The name of the scope that contains this set of instance templates." + }, + "description": "A list of InstanceTemplatesScopedList resources.", + "type": "object" + }, + "kind": { + "default": "compute#instanceTemplateAggregatedList", + "description": "Type of resource.", + "type": "string" + }, + "nextPageToken": { + "description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", + "type": "string" + }, + "selfLink": { + "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", + "type": "string" + }, + "warning": { + "description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", + "properties": { + "code": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", + "enum": [ + "CLEANUP_FAILED", + "DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", + "DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", + "DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", + "EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", + "EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", + "FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", + "INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", + "INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", + "LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", + "MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", + "NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", + "NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", + "NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", + "NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", + "NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", + "PARTIAL_SUCCESS", + "REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", + "RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", + "RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", + "SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", + "SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", + "UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", + "UNREACHABLE" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", + "A link to a deprecated resource was created.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", + "The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", + "Warning that is present in an external api call", + "Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", + "The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", + "A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", + "When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", + "A resource depends on a missing type", + "The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", + "The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", + "The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", + "Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", + "No results are present on a particular list page.", + "Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", + "The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", + "Warning that a resource is in use.", + "One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", + "When a resource schema validation is ignored.", + "Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", + "When undeclared properties in the schema are present", + "A given scope cannot be reached." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "data": { + "description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", + "items": { + "properties": { + "key": { + "description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", + "type": "string" + }, + "value": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "message": { + "description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "InstanceTemplateList": { "description": "A list of instance templates.", "id": "InstanceTemplateList", @@ -45410,6 +45844,108 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "InstanceTemplatesScopedList": { + "id": "InstanceTemplatesScopedList", + "properties": { + "instanceTemplates": { + "description": "[Output Only] A list of instance templates that are contained within the specified project and zone.", + "items": { + "$ref": "InstanceTemplate" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "warning": { + "description": "[Output Only] An informational warning that replaces the list of instance templates when the list is empty.", + "properties": { + "code": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", + "enum": [ + "CLEANUP_FAILED", + "DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", + "DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", + "DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", + "EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", + "EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", + "FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", + "INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", + "INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", + "LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", + "MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", + "NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", + "NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", + "NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", + "NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", + "NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", + "NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", + "PARTIAL_SUCCESS", + "REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", + "RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", + "RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", + "SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", + "SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", + "UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", + "UNREACHABLE" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", + "A link to a deprecated resource was created.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", + "The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", + "When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", + "Warning that is present in an external api call", + "Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", + "The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", + "A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", + "When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", + "A resource depends on a missing type", + "The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", + "The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", + "The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", + "The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", + "Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", + "No results are present on a particular list page.", + "Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", + "The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", + "Warning that a resource is in use.", + "One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", + "When a resource schema validation is ignored.", + "Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", + "When undeclared properties in the schema are present", + "A given scope cannot be reached." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "data": { + "description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", + "items": { + "properties": { + "key": { + "description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", + "type": "string" + }, + "value": { + "description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "message": { + "description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "InstanceWithNamedPorts": { "id": "InstanceWithNamedPorts", "properties": { @@ -45694,6 +46230,20 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "InstancesSetNameRequest": { + "id": "InstancesSetNameRequest", + "properties": { + "currentName": { + "description": "The current name of this resource, used to prevent conflicts. Provide the latest name when making a request to change name.", + "type": "string" + }, + "name": { + "description": "The name to be applied to the instance. Needs to be RFC 1035 compliant.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "InstancesSetServiceAccountRequest": { "id": "InstancesSetServiceAccountRequest", "properties": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json index 60d1916957e..50ef44ab15e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json @@ -1079,7 +1079,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230130", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://connectors.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -1547,7 +1547,8 @@ "INACTIVE", "DELETING", "UPDATING", - "ERROR" + "ERROR", + "AUTHORIZATION_REQUIRED" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Connection does not have a state yet.", @@ -1556,7 +1557,8 @@ "Connection is stopped.", "Connection is being deleted.", "Connection is being updated.", - "Connection is not running due to an error." + "Connection is not running due to an error.", + "Connection is not running due to an auth error for the Oauth2 Auth Code based connector." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json index cc04fa140dc..2f7f706d06f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230130", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://connectors.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Action": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenteraiplatform.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenteraiplatform.v1alpha1.json index 67613c94895..cfbba1caf65 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenteraiplatform.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenteraiplatform.v1alpha1.json @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://contactcenteraiplatform.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json index 80300320711..d5fe1d2d430 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json @@ -1356,7 +1356,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://contactcenterinsights.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudContactcenterinsightsV1Analysis": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1.json index 88b28801099..eaf39176db0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1.json @@ -2487,7 +2487,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230124", + "revision": "20230203", "rootUrl": "https://container.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceleratorConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1beta1.json index 30a9ec12597..76f2fdaab2e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/container.v1beta1.json @@ -2512,7 +2512,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230124", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://container.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceleratorConfig": { @@ -5328,7 +5328,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "NodeTaint": { - "description": "Kubernetes taint is comprised of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.", + "description": "Kubernetes taint is composed of three fields: key, value, and effect. Effect can only be one of three types: NoSchedule, PreferNoSchedule or NoExecute. See [here](https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/configuration/taint-and-toleration) for more information, including usage and the valid values.", "id": "NodeTaint", "properties": { "effect": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json index 268efce3119..08b87ee8e6b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json @@ -1506,6 +1506,213 @@ } } }, + "conversionsources": { + "methods": { + "create": { + "description": "Creates a new conversion source.", + "flatPath": "{merchantId}/conversionsources", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "content.conversionsources.create", + "parameterOrder": [ + "merchantId" + ], + "parameters": { + "merchantId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source.", + "format": "int64", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "{merchantId}/conversionsources", + "request": { + "$ref": "ConversionSource" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "ConversionSource" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" + ] + }, + "delete": { + "description": "Archives an existing conversion source. It will be recoverable for 30 days. This archiving behavior is not typical in the Content API and unique to this service.", + "flatPath": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}", + "httpMethod": "DELETE", + "id": "content.conversionsources.delete", + "parameterOrder": [ + "merchantId", + "conversionSourceId" + ], + "parameters": { + "conversionSourceId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the conversion source to be deleted.", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "merchantId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source.", + "format": "int64", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}", + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" + ] + }, + "get": { + "description": "Fetches a conversion source.", + "flatPath": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "content.conversionsources.get", + "parameterOrder": [ + "merchantId", + "conversionSourceId" + ], + "parameters": { + "conversionSourceId": { + "description": "Required. The REST ID of the collection.", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "merchantId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source.", + "format": "int64", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}", + "response": { + "$ref": "ConversionSource" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" + ] + }, + "list": { + "description": "Retrieves the list of conversion sources the caller has access to.", + "flatPath": "{merchantId}/conversionsources", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "content.conversionsources.list", + "parameterOrder": [ + "merchantId" + ], + "parameters": { + "merchantId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source.", + "format": "int64", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "pageSize": { + "description": "The maximum number of conversion sources to return in a page. If no `page_size` is specified, `100` is used as the default value. The maximum value is `200`. Values above `200` will be coerced to `200`. Regardless of pagination, at most `200` conversion sources are returned in total.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "Page token.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "showDeleted": { + "description": "If true, also returns archived conversion sources.", + "location": "query", + "type": "boolean" + } + }, + "path": "{merchantId}/conversionsources", + "response": { + "$ref": "ListConversionSourcesResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" + ] + }, + "patch": { + "description": "Updates information of an existing conversion source.", + "flatPath": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}", + "httpMethod": "PATCH", + "id": "content.conversionsources.patch", + "parameterOrder": [ + "merchantId", + "conversionSourceId" + ], + "parameters": { + "conversionSourceId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the conversion source to be updated.", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "merchantId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source.", + "format": "int64", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Required. List of fields being updated.", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}", + "request": { + "$ref": "ConversionSource" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "ConversionSource" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" + ] + }, + "undelete": { + "description": "Re-enables an archived conversion source.", + "flatPath": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}:undelete", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "content.conversionsources.undelete", + "parameterOrder": [ + "merchantId", + "conversionSourceId" + ], + "parameters": { + "conversionSourceId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the conversion source to be undeleted.", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "merchantId": { + "description": "Required. The ID of the account that owns the new conversion source.", + "format": "int64", + "location": "path", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "{merchantId}/conversionsources/{conversionSourceId}:undelete", + "request": { + "$ref": "UndeleteConversionSourceRequest" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" + ] + } + } + }, "csses": { "methods": { "get": { @@ -5953,7 +6160,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230217", "rootUrl": "https://shoppingcontent.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { @@ -5992,6 +6199,10 @@ "$ref": "AccountBusinessInformation", "description": "The business information of the account." }, + "conversionSettings": { + "$ref": "AccountConversionSettings", + "description": "Settings for conversion tracking." + }, "cssId": { "description": "ID of CSS the account belongs to.", "format": "uint64", @@ -6123,7 +6334,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "phoneNumber": { - "description": "The phone number of the business. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.", + "description": "The phone number of the business in [E.164](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164) format. This can only be updated if a verified phone number is not already set. To replace a verified phone number use the `Accounts.requestphoneverification` and `Accounts.verifyphonenumber`.", "type": "string" }, "phoneVerificationStatus": { @@ -6133,6 +6344,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "AccountConversionSettings": { + "description": "Settings for conversion tracking.", + "id": "AccountConversionSettings", + "properties": { + "freeListingsAutoTaggingEnabled": { + "description": "When enabled, free listing URLs have a parameter to enable conversion tracking for products owned by the current merchant account. See [auto-tagging](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11127659).", + "type": "boolean" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "AccountCredentials": { "description": "Credentials allowing Google to call a partner's API on behalf of a merchant.", "id": "AccountCredentials", @@ -7164,6 +7386,66 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "AttributionSettings": { + "description": "Represents attribution settings for conversion sources receiving pre-attribution data.", + "id": "AttributionSettings", + "properties": { + "attributionLookbackWindowInDays": { + "description": "Required. Lookback windows (in days) used for attribution in this source. Supported values are 7, 30, 60, 90.", + "format": "int32", + "type": "integer" + }, + "attributionModel": { + "description": "Required. Attribution model.", + "enum": [ + "ATTRIBUTION_MODEL_UNSPECIFIED", + "CROSS_CHANNEL_LAST_CLICK", + "ADS_PREFERRED_LAST_CLICK", + "CROSS_CHANNEL_DATA_DRIVEN", + "CROSS_CHANNEL_FIRST_CLICK", + "CROSS_CHANNEL_LINEAR", + "CROSS_CHANNEL_POSITION_BASED", + "CROSS_CHANNEL_TIME_DECAY" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "", + "Cross-channel Last Click model.", + "Ads-preferred Last Click model.", + "Cross-channel Data Driven model.", + "Cross-channel Frist Click model.", + "Cross-channel Linear model.", + "Cross-channel Position Based model.", + "Cross-channel Time Decay model." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "conversionType": { + "description": "Immutable. Unordered list. List of different conversion types a conversion event can be classified as. A standard \"purchase\" type will be automatically created if this list is empty at creation time.", + "items": { + "$ref": "AttributionSettingsConversionType" + }, + "type": "array" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "AttributionSettingsConversionType": { + "description": "Message representing a types of conversion events", + "id": "AttributionSettingsConversionType", + "properties": { + "includeInReporting": { + "description": "Output only. Option indicating if the type should be included in Merchant Center reporting.", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "boolean" + }, + "name": { + "description": "Output only. Conversion event name, as it'll be reported by the client.", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "BestSellers": { "description": "Fields related to the [Best Sellers reports](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9488679).", "id": "BestSellers", @@ -7673,6 +7955,49 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "ConversionSource": { + "description": "Represents a conversion source owned by a Merchant account. A merchant account can have up to 200 conversion sources.", + "id": "ConversionSource", + "properties": { + "conversionSourceId": { + "description": "Output only. Generated by the Content API upon creation of a new `ConversionSource`. Format: [a-z]{4}:.+ The four characters before the colon represent the type of conversio source. Content after the colon represents the ID of the conversion source within that type. The ID of two different conversion sources might be the same across different types. The following type prefixes are supported: - galk: For GoogleAnalyticsLink sources. - mcdn: For MerchantCenterDestination sources.", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "expireTime": { + "description": "Output only. The time when an archived conversion source becomes permanently deleted and is no longer available to undelete.", + "format": "google-datetime", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "googleAnalyticsLink": { + "$ref": "GoogleAnalyticsLink", + "description": "Immutable. Conversion Source of type \"Link to Google Analytics Property\"." + }, + "merchantCenterDestination": { + "$ref": "MerchantCenterDestination", + "description": "Conversion Source of type \"Merchant Center Tag Destination\"." + }, + "state": { + "description": "Output only. Current state of this conversion source. Can't be edited through the API.", + "enum": [ + "STATE_UNSPECIFIED", + "ACTIVE", + "ARCHIVED", + "PENDING" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "", + "Conversion source is fully functional.", + "Conversion source has been archived in the last 30 days and not currently functional. Can be restored using the undelete method.", + "Conversion source creation has started but not fully finished yet." + ], + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "Css": { "description": "Information about CSS domain.", "id": "Css", @@ -8646,6 +8971,28 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "GoogleAnalyticsLink": { + "description": "\"Google Analytics Link\" sources can be used to get conversion data from an existing Google Analytics property into the linked Merchant Center account.", + "id": "GoogleAnalyticsLink", + "properties": { + "attributionSettings": { + "$ref": "AttributionSettings", + "description": "Output only. Attribution settings for the linked Google Analytics property.", + "readOnly": true + }, + "propertyId": { + "description": "Required. Immutable. ID of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "propertyName": { + "description": "Output only. Name of the Google Analytics property the merchant is linked to.", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "Headers": { "description": "A non-empty list of row or column headers for a table. Exactly one of `prices`, `weights`, `numItems`, `postalCodeGroupNames`, or `location` must be set.", "id": "Headers", @@ -9283,6 +9630,24 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "ListConversionSourcesResponse": { + "description": "Response message for the ListConversionSources method.", + "id": "ListConversionSourcesResponse", + "properties": { + "conversionSources": { + "description": "List of conversion sources.", + "items": { + "$ref": "ConversionSource" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "nextPageToken": { + "description": "Token to be used to fetch the next results page.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "ListCssesResponse": { "description": "The response message for the `ListCsses` method", "id": "ListCssesResponse", @@ -9572,6 +9937,30 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "MerchantCenterDestination": { + "description": "\"Merchant Center Destination\" sources can be used to send conversion events from a website using a Google tag directly to a Merchant Center account where the source is created.", + "id": "MerchantCenterDestination", + "properties": { + "attributionSettings": { + "$ref": "AttributionSettings", + "description": "Required. Attribution settings being used for the Merchant Center Destination." + }, + "currencyCode": { + "description": "Required. Three-letter currency code (ISO 4217). The currency code defines in which currency the conversions sent to this destination will be reported in Merchant Center.", + "type": "string" + }, + "destinationId": { + "description": "Output only. Merchant Center Destination ID.", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "displayName": { + "description": "Required. Merchant-specified display name for the destination. This is the name that identifies the conversion source within the Merchant Center UI. Limited to 64 characters.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "MerchantOrderReturn": { "description": "Order return. Production access (all methods) requires the order manager role. Sandbox access does not.", "id": "MerchantOrderReturn", @@ -12902,7 +13291,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "id": { - "description": "The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product is of the form channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId.", + "description": "The REST ID of the product. Content API methods that operate on products take this as their `productId` parameter. The REST ID for a product has one of the 2 forms channel:contentLanguage: targetCountry: offerId or channel:contentLanguage:feedLabel: offerId.", "type": "string" }, "identifierExists": { @@ -17059,6 +17448,12 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "UndeleteConversionSourceRequest": { + "description": "Request message for the UndeleteConversionSource method.", + "id": "UndeleteConversionSourceRequest", + "properties": {}, + "type": "object" + }, "UnitInvoice": { "id": "UnitInvoice", "properties": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/customsearch.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/customsearch.v1.json index 506525caab5..52446a32458 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/customsearch.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/customsearch.v1.json @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://customsearch.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Promotion": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1.json index 5194ada4473..35d35184916 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1.json @@ -2134,7 +2134,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://datacatalog.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Binding": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1beta1.json index 7b706da8a51..f3f6a0446b3 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datacatalog.v1beta1.json @@ -1813,7 +1813,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://datacatalog.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Binding": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataflow.v1b3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataflow.v1b3.json index 55b67e8365e..e9ed4470ac5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataflow.v1b3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataflow.v1b3.json @@ -2199,7 +2199,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://dataflow.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApproximateProgress": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json index 77412bbeac1..9fb4851e586 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json @@ -1622,7 +1622,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://dataform.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Assertion": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datapipelines.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datapipelines.v1.json index 3e4c74116e8..13716251cd9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datapipelines.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datapipelines.v1.json @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230129", + "revision": "20230206", "rootUrl": "https://datapipelines.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDatapipelinesV1DataflowJobDetails": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json index 344296e6c16..250e06e44c2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230120", + "revision": "20230202", "rootUrl": "https://deploymentmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ "description": "The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies)." }, "members": { - "description": "Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. ", + "description": "Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.", "items": { "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json index 819287a4fb5..08bfa05ce36 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json @@ -1552,7 +1552,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230120", + "revision": "20230202", "rootUrl": "https://deploymentmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AsyncOptions": { @@ -1666,7 +1666,7 @@ "description": "The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies)." }, "members": { - "description": "Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. ", + "description": "Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding.", "items": { "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v3.5.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v3.5.json index ef5b158653a..c6551298212 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v3.5.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v3.5.json @@ -9659,7 +9659,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230118", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://dfareporting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json index 8e80c4f2933..e7538aecf08 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json @@ -10032,7 +10032,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230118", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://dfareporting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/digitalassetlinks.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/digitalassetlinks.v1.json index 1090dcc4c35..f9bbb46f328 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/digitalassetlinks.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/digitalassetlinks.v1.json @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230211", "rootUrl": "https://digitalassetlinks.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AndroidAppAsset": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json index aec00d8678f..f3c19e53fe2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleApiHttpBody": { @@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "name": { - "description": "Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/", + "description": "Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\\_store\\_id}/branches/{branch\\_id}/documents/{document\\_id}", "type": "string" }, "promotionIds": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json index 81e7fe71759..309331b7ab7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleApiHttpBody": { @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "name": { - "description": "Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects//locations//dataStores//branches//documents/", + "description": "Required. The Document resource full name, of the form: projects/{project\\_id}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data\\_store\\_id}/branches/{branch\\_id}/documents/{document\\_id}", "type": "string" }, "promotionIds": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v1.json index 7dbcd3417fe..4ed59c0c46d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v1.json @@ -8146,7 +8146,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://displayvideo.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActivateManualTriggerRequest": { @@ -15406,7 +15406,7 @@ }, "targetingExpansion": { "$ref": "TargetingExpansionConfig", - "description": "The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022." + "description": "The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item." }, "updateTime": { "description": "Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.", @@ -17938,7 +17938,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "TargetingExpansionConfig": { - "description": "Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.", + "description": "Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level.", "id": "TargetingExpansionConfig", "properties": { "excludeFirstPartyAudience": { @@ -17946,7 +17946,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "targetingExpansionLevel": { - "description": "Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.", + "description": "Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.", "enum": [ "TARGETING_EXPANSION_LEVEL_UNSPECIFIED", "NO_EXPANSION", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json index 118fea436eb..8e92fa65ff8 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json @@ -9172,7 +9172,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://displayvideo.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActivateManualTriggerRequest": { @@ -16997,7 +16997,7 @@ }, "targetingExpansion": { "$ref": "TargetingExpansionConfig", - "description": "The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022." + "description": "The [targeting expansion](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/10191558) settings of the line item. This config is only applicable when eligible audience list targeting is assigned to the line item." }, "updateTime": { "description": "Output only. The timestamp when the line item was last updated. Assigned by the system.", @@ -19766,7 +19766,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "TargetingExpansionConfig": { - "description": "Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level. Beginning November 7, 2022, these settings may represent the [optimized targeting feature](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859) in place of targeting expansion. This feature will be rolled out to all partners by November 9, 2022.", + "description": "Settings that control the targeting expansion of the line item. Targeting expansion allows the line item to reach a larger audience based on the original audience list and the targeting expansion level.", "id": "TargetingExpansionConfig", "properties": { "excludeFirstPartyAudience": { @@ -19774,7 +19774,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "targetingExpansionLevel": { - "description": "Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item. Beginning November 7, 2022, the behavior of this field will change in the following ways with the replacement of targeting expansion with [optimized targeting](//support.google.com/displayvideo/answer/12060859): * This field will represent the optimized targeting checkbox, with a `NO_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned off and a `LEAST_EXPANSION` value representing optimized targeting turned on. * `NO_EXPANSION` will be the default value for the field and will be automatically assigned if you do not set the field. * If you set the field to any value other than `NO_EXPANSION`, it will automatically be set to `LEAST_EXPANSION`.", + "description": "Required. Magnitude of expansion for applicable targeting under this line item.", "enum": [ "TARGETING_EXPANSION_LEVEL_UNSPECIFIED", "NO_EXPANSION", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dlp.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dlp.v2.json index b307e878976..6927edde600 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dlp.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dlp.v2.json @@ -3412,7 +3412,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://dlp.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GooglePrivacyDlpV2Action": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json index 3136fb8d2fa..6c0162fa013 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://documentai.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDocumentaiUiv1beta3BatchDeleteDocumentsMetadata": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta2.json index 406b4ac0fc5..246d3d99336 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta2.json @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://documentai.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDocumentaiUiv1beta3BatchDeleteDocumentsMetadata": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json index 6e5be207fd7..d7df5e55633 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json @@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://documentai.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDocumentaiUiv1beta3BatchDeleteDocumentsMetadata": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1.json index 4e70024cfdb..2a6ca933243 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1.json @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://domains.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1alpha2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1alpha2.json index 7b281aef901..4753f435290 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1alpha2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1alpha2.json @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://domains.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1beta1.json index ebd32d8c1ff..60d69ba2258 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domains.v1beta1.json @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://domains.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domainsrdap.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domainsrdap.v1.json index e6bc4a6c354..9a6104ee5a6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domainsrdap.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/domainsrdap.v1.json @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://domainsrdap.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "HttpBody": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v1.1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v1.1.json index 235d199f18c..812e963026a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v1.1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v1.1.json @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://doubleclickbidmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ChannelGrouping": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v2.json index 00d86bde65c..6eba2fd63f4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/doubleclickbidmanager.v2.json @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://doubleclickbidmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ChannelGrouping": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json index f235d6920e4..f046a23ec2a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ "description": "Manages files in Drive including uploading, downloading, searching, detecting changes, and updating sharing permissions.", "discoveryVersion": "v1", "documentationLink": "https://developers.google.com/drive/", - "etag": "\"uWj2hSb4GVjzdDlAnRd2gbM1ZQ8/S9Ey_-CHeSNYoyZsHdPBhdrnfUY\"", + "etag": "\"uWj2hSb4GVjzdDlAnRd2gbM1ZQ8/YVCKnp3Zl6X5A7iBN9YZ0dNBIBk\"", "icons": { "x16": "https://ssl.gstatic.com/docs/doclist/images/drive_icon_16.png", "x32": "https://ssl.gstatic.com/docs/doclist/images/drive_icon_32.png" @@ -3668,7 +3668,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://www.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "About": { @@ -4616,6 +4616,10 @@ "description": "Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.", "type": "boolean" }, + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": { + "description": "Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.", + "type": "boolean" + }, "canComment": { "description": "Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.", "type": "boolean" @@ -4728,6 +4732,10 @@ "driveMembersOnly": { "description": "Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.", "type": "boolean" + }, + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": { + "description": "If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.", + "type": "boolean" } }, "type": "object" @@ -6279,6 +6287,10 @@ "description": "Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" }, + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": { + "description": "Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.", + "type": "boolean" + }, "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": { "description": "Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" @@ -6396,6 +6408,10 @@ "description": "Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" }, + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": { + "description": "If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.", + "type": "boolean" + }, "teamMembersOnly": { "description": "Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json index d65da9184f0..17cc2ae7654 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ "description": "Manages files in Drive including uploading, downloading, searching, detecting changes, and updating sharing permissions.", "discoveryVersion": "v1", "documentationLink": "https://developers.google.com/drive/", - "etag": "\"uWj2hSb4GVjzdDlAnRd2gbM1ZQ8/usHvhS2KEqa4qu-fvyF64hqv4W8\"", + "etag": "\"uWj2hSb4GVjzdDlAnRd2gbM1ZQ8/FMnBlYEB3J1VPpdpymK8SWXFoSQ\"", "icons": { "x16": "https://ssl.gstatic.com/docs/doclist/images/drive_icon_16.png", "x32": "https://ssl.gstatic.com/docs/doclist/images/drive_icon_32.png" @@ -2312,7 +2312,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://www.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "About": { @@ -2768,6 +2768,10 @@ "description": "Whether the current user can change the driveMembersOnly restriction of this shared drive.", "type": "boolean" }, + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": { + "description": "Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this shared drive.", + "type": "boolean" + }, "canComment": { "description": "Whether the current user can comment on files in this shared drive.", "type": "boolean" @@ -2880,6 +2884,10 @@ "driveMembersOnly": { "description": "Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members.", "type": "boolean" + }, + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": { + "description": "If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.", + "type": "boolean" } }, "type": "object" @@ -4207,6 +4215,10 @@ "description": "Whether the current user can change the domainUsersOnly restriction of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" }, + "canChangeSharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermissionRestriction": { + "description": "Whether the current user can change the sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission restriction of this Team Drive.", + "type": "boolean" + }, "canChangeTeamDriveBackground": { "description": "Whether the current user can change the background of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" @@ -4324,6 +4336,10 @@ "description": "Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" }, + "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": { + "description": "If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders.", + "type": "boolean" + }, "teamMembersOnly": { "description": "Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive.", "type": "boolean" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/driveactivity.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/driveactivity.v2.json index 351993d3f32..496f8475aa6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/driveactivity.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/driveactivity.v2.json @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://driveactivity.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Action": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json index 4033ed61019..fb36d75ee8e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://drivelabels.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2BadgeColors": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json index 613bf1359ac..103ffc35788 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json @@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://drivelabels.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaBadgeColors": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/essentialcontacts.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/essentialcontacts.v1.json index ee32fcdc134..b0da72a7c9b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/essentialcontacts.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/essentialcontacts.v1.json @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://essentialcontacts.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudEssentialcontactsV1ComputeContactsResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json index 7f04fc7703c..b8f374fd294 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json @@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://eventarc.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1beta1.json index 596ea860464..e039dce2f56 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1beta1.json @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://eventarc.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/factchecktools.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/factchecktools.v1alpha1.json index 5b60a228365..3fd374830ac 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/factchecktools.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/factchecktools.v1alpha1.json @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://factchecktools.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleFactcheckingFactchecktoolsV1alpha1Claim": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcm.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcm.v1.json index 24b25fb703e..b12be3aaa49 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcm.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcm.v1.json @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://fcm.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AndroidConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcmdata.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcmdata.v1beta1.json index b49210f2446..51f3992897a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcmdata.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fcmdata.v1beta1.json @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://fcmdata.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleFirebaseFcmDataV1beta1AndroidDeliveryData": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json index a0deb7e470c..669139fe004 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230129", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://file.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Backup": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1beta1.json index 10e794ac2b7..77f8ce168d9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1beta1.json @@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230129", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://file.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Backup": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebase.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebase.v1beta1.json index dc385d098de..828ea1ed8d9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebase.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebase.v1beta1.json @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230210", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://firebase.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddFirebaseRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json index 36c68199e2e..50be21ada62 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json @@ -1338,7 +1338,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseappcheck.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1AppAttestConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json index c32f60f06a9..f5b93d8c270 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json @@ -1464,7 +1464,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseappcheck.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaAppAttestConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedatabase.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedatabase.v1beta.json index a1884c3f743..87621349efc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedatabase.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedatabase.v1beta.json @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230210", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://firebasedatabase.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "DatabaseInstance": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedynamiclinks.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedynamiclinks.v1.json index 3b4b1fd1e56..572449443fb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedynamiclinks.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedynamiclinks.v1.json @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://firebasedynamiclinks.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AnalyticsInfo": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1.json index 77929703f8f..87f52ef080a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1.json @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://firebasehosting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1beta1.json index bb4e75aab2b..5858beb530d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasehosting.v1beta1.json @@ -2107,7 +2107,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://firebasehosting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActingUser": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1.json index 9f3f73a2846..b71566a2697 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1.json @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230208", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseml.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1beta2.json index a1c1475cdb4..13ef784dc88 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v1beta2.json @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230208", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseml.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "DownloadModelResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaserules.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaserules.v1.json index 25d8c02f10e..7d1989a82cd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaserules.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaserules.v1.json @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230111", + "revision": "20230130", "rootUrl": "https://firebaserules.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Arg": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasestorage.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasestorage.v1beta.json index c37f747cbae..4bb8f4456a4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasestorage.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasestorage.v1beta.json @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://firebasestorage.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddFirebaseRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fitness.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fitness.v1.json index 9729c2c0456..03b0ecea8f8 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fitness.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/fitness.v1.json @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230208", + "revision": "20230220", "rootUrl": "https://fitness.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AggregateBucket": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/forms.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/forms.v1.json index 8ebd9c27465..d1860b2d4cb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/forms.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/forms.v1.json @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://forms.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Answer": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesConfiguration.v1configuration.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesConfiguration.v1configuration.json index e5427786c6a..46ff4754f92 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesConfiguration.v1configuration.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesConfiguration.v1configuration.json @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230210", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://gamesconfiguration.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AchievementConfiguration": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesManagement.v1management.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesManagement.v1management.json index 773eee66421..82c23f69b63 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesManagement.v1management.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gamesManagement.v1management.json @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230210", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://gamesmanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AchievementResetAllResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gameservices.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gameservices.v1beta.json index 51ba1505240..0780c38316e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gameservices.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gameservices.v1beta.json @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://gameservices.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/genomics.v2alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/genomics.v2alpha1.json index 800c3789331..4f7ef10a2cd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/genomics.v2alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/genomics.v2alpha1.json @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://genomics.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Accelerator": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmail.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmail.v1.json index cc2a787744a..32ddbe3f958 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmail.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmail.v1.json @@ -3077,7 +3077,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://gmail.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AutoForwarding": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1.json index 395132f210d..069aef54e59 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1.json @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://gmailpostmastertools.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "DeliveryError": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1beta1.json index df7d5fef7fc..95a9ab02ed5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gmailpostmastertools.v1beta1.json @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://gmailpostmastertools.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "DeliveryError": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json index 6e9b8049e85..d57be4aca97 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json @@ -2724,6 +2724,31 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, + "getFHIRStoreMetrics": { + "description": "Gets metrics associated with the FHIR store.", + "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:getFHIRStoreMetrics", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.getFHIRStoreMetrics", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/fhirStores/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1/{+name}:getFHIRStoreMetrics", + "response": { + "$ref": "FhirStoreMetrics" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, "getIamPolicy": { "description": "Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:getIamPolicy", @@ -5161,6 +5186,45 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "FhirStoreMetric": { + "description": "Count of resources and total storage size by type for a given FHIR store.", + "id": "FhirStoreMetric", + "properties": { + "count": { + "description": "The total count of FHIR resources in the store of this resource type.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "resourceType": { + "description": "The FHIR resource type this metric applies to.", + "type": "string" + }, + "structuredStorageSizeBytes": { + "description": "The total amount of structured storage used by FHIR resources of this resource type in the store.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "FhirStoreMetrics": { + "description": "List of metrics for a given FHIR store.", + "id": "FhirStoreMetrics", + "properties": { + "metrics": { + "description": "List of FhirStoreMetric by resource type.", + "items": { + "$ref": "FhirStoreMetric" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "name": { + "description": "The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for, in the format `projects/{project_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "Field": { "description": "A (sub) field of a type.", "id": "Field", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json index 53fda6cb99e..13178fd93ea 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json @@ -3259,6 +3259,31 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, + "getFHIRStoreMetrics": { + "description": "Gets metrics associated with the FHIR store.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:getFHIRStoreMetrics", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.getFHIRStoreMetrics", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/fhirStores/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}:getFHIRStoreMetrics", + "response": { + "$ref": "FhirStoreMetrics" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, "getIamPolicy": { "description": "Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.", "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:getIamPolicy", @@ -6417,6 +6442,45 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "FhirStoreMetric": { + "description": "Count of resources and total storage size by type for a given FHIR store.", + "id": "FhirStoreMetric", + "properties": { + "count": { + "description": "The total count of FHIR resources in the store of this resource type.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + }, + "resourceType": { + "description": "The FHIR resource type this metric applies to.", + "type": "string" + }, + "structuredStorageSizeBytes": { + "description": "The total amount of structured storage used by FHIR resources of this resource type in the store.", + "format": "int64", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "FhirStoreMetrics": { + "description": "List of metrics for a given FHIR store.", + "id": "FhirStoreMetrics", + "properties": { + "metrics": { + "description": "List of FhirStoreMetric by resource type.", + "items": { + "$ref": "FhirStoreMetric" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "name": { + "description": "The resource name of the FHIR store to get metrics for, in the format `projects/{project_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "Field": { "description": "A (sub) field of a type.", "id": "Field", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/homegraph.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/homegraph.v1.json index 84c95ddb788..f157326a4a2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/homegraph.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/homegraph.v1.json @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://homegraph.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AgentDeviceId": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json index cd7c2272e4c..607879b907f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json @@ -2441,7 +2441,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://iam.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdminAuditData": { @@ -3697,7 +3697,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "sessionDuration": { - "description": "Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the SessionNotOnOrAfter claim in the SAML assertion.", + "description": "Duration that the Google Cloud access tokens, console sign-in sessions, and `gcloud` sign-in sessions from this pool are valid. Must be greater than 15 minutes (900s) and less than 12 hours (43200s). If `session_duration` is not configured, minted credentials have a default duration of one hour (3600s). For SAML providers, the lifetime of the token is the minimum of the `session_duration` and the `SessionNotOnOrAfter` claim in the SAML assertion.", "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2.json index ae676c60aa0..bb923d94f12 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2.json @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://iam.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleIamAdminV1AuditData": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2beta.json index 8afebf39eab..64324b1bc3a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v2beta.json @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://iam.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleIamAdminV1AuditData": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iamcredentials.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iamcredentials.v1.json index c2a2a9b52f8..2117cfc5a2c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iamcredentials.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iamcredentials.v1.json @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://iamcredentials.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GenerateAccessTokenRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1.json index e6b6dfe85c2..6e43114b5b9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1.json @@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://iap.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessDeniedPageSettings": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1beta1.json index a44e6d1c245..37e9517c1d9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iap.v1beta1.json @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://iap.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Binding": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v1.json index 17644047ce0..23d294bca7d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v1.json @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ ] }, "signInWithGameCenter": { - "description": "Signs in or signs up a user with iOS Game Center credentials. If the sign-in succeeds, a new Identity Platform ID token and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. The bundle ID is required in the request header as `x-ios-bundle-identifier`. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project.", + "description": "Signs in or signs up a user with iOS Game Center credentials. If the sign-in succeeds, a new Identity Platform ID token and refresh token are issued for the authenticated user. The bundle ID is required in the request header as `x-ios-bundle-identifier`. An [API key](https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/api-keys) is required in the request in order to identify the Google Cloud project. Apple has [deprecated the `playerID` field](https://developer.apple.com/documentation/gamekit/gkplayer/1521127-playerid/). The Apple platform Firebase SDK will use `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` from version 10.5.0 and onwards. Upgrading to SDK version 10.5.0 or later updates existing integrations that use `playerID` to instead use `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID`. When making calls to `signInWithGameCenter`, you must include `playerID` along with the new fields `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` to successfully identify all existing users. Upgrading existing Game Center sign in integrations to SDK version 10.5.0 or later is irreversible.", "flatPath": "v1/accounts:signInWithGameCenter", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "identitytoolkit.accounts.signInWithGameCenter", @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230204", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://identitytoolkit.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudIdentitytoolkitV1Argon2Parameters": { @@ -2739,7 +2739,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "playerId": { - "description": "Required. The user's Game Center player ID.", + "description": "Required. The user's Game Center player ID. Deprecated by Apple. Pass `playerID` along with `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` to initiate the migration of a user's Game Center player ID to `gamePlayerID`.", "type": "string" }, "publicKeyUrl": { @@ -2800,7 +2800,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "playerId": { - "description": "The user's Game Center player ID.", + "description": "The user's Game Center player ID. Pass `playerID` along with `gamePlayerID` and `teamPlayerID` to initiate the migration of a user's Game Center player ID to `gamePlayerID`.", "type": "string" }, "refreshToken": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v2.json index 2f46c816b94..84c70538572 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/identitytoolkit.v2.json @@ -1559,7 +1559,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230204", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://identitytoolkit.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudIdentitytoolkitAdminV2AllowByDefault": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kgsearch.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kgsearch.v1.json index 684a6e9e2e7..aa355887722 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kgsearch.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kgsearch.v1.json @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://kgsearch.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "SearchResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kmsinventory.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kmsinventory.v1.json index b21429a3b7e..f0bf136bead 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kmsinventory.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/kmsinventory.v1.json @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://kmsinventory.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudKmsInventoryV1ListCryptoKeysResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/libraryagent.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/libraryagent.v1.json index aac2238eb81..5919db4e957 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/libraryagent.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/libraryagent.v1.json @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://libraryagent.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleExampleLibraryagentV1Book": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/licensing.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/licensing.v1.json index 7c63c613f5d..30877aec1dc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/licensing.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/licensing.v1.json @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230211", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://licensing.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/lifesciences.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/lifesciences.v2beta.json index 0e426fbe359..673a9af8aeb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/lifesciences.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/lifesciences.v2beta.json @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://lifesciences.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Accelerator": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/localservices.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/localservices.v1.json index a14608a9cd1..a7463171b8f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/localservices.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/localservices.v1.json @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://localservices.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleAdsHomeservicesLocalservicesV1AccountReport": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json index 81e950f51ae..644de0099c3 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json @@ -450,6 +450,40 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] }, + "createAsync": { + "description": "Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/billingAccounts/{billingAccountsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets:createAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.createAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "bucketId": { + "description": "Required. A client-assigned identifier such as \"my-bucket\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^billingAccounts/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+parent}/buckets:createAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] + }, "delete": { "description": "Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.", "flatPath": "v2/billingAccounts/{billingAccountsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", @@ -544,7 +578,7 @@ ] }, "patch": { - "description": "Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "description": "Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", "flatPath": "v2/billingAccounts/{billingAccountsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "logging.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.patch", @@ -606,6 +640,41 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] + }, + "updateAsync": { + "description": "Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/billingAccounts/{billingAccountsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}:updateAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.updateAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^billingAccounts/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/buckets/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+name}:updateAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] } }, "resources": { @@ -1837,6 +1906,40 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] }, + "createAsync": { + "description": "Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/folders/{foldersId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets:createAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.folders.locations.buckets.createAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "bucketId": { + "description": "Required. A client-assigned identifier such as \"my-bucket\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^folders/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+parent}/buckets:createAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] + }, "delete": { "description": "Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.", "flatPath": "v2/folders/{foldersId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", @@ -1931,7 +2034,7 @@ ] }, "patch": { - "description": "Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "description": "Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", "flatPath": "v2/folders/{foldersId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "logging.folders.locations.buckets.patch", @@ -1993,6 +2096,41 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] + }, + "updateAsync": { + "description": "Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/folders/{foldersId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}:updateAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.folders.locations.buckets.updateAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^folders/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/buckets/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+name}:updateAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] } }, "resources": { @@ -2722,6 +2860,40 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] }, + "createAsync": { + "description": "Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/{v2Id}/{v2Id1}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets:createAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.locations.buckets.createAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "bucketId": { + "description": "Required. A client-assigned identifier such as \"my-bucket\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^[^/]+/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+parent}/buckets:createAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] + }, "delete": { "description": "Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.", "flatPath": "v2/{v2Id}/{v2Id1}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", @@ -2816,7 +2988,7 @@ ] }, "patch": { - "description": "Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "description": "Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", "flatPath": "v2/{v2Id}/{v2Id1}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "logging.locations.buckets.patch", @@ -2878,6 +3050,41 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] + }, + "updateAsync": { + "description": "Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/{v2Id}/{v2Id1}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}:updateAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.locations.buckets.updateAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^[^/]+/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/buckets/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+name}:updateAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] } }, "resources": { @@ -3668,6 +3875,40 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] }, + "createAsync": { + "description": "Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets:createAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.organizations.locations.buckets.createAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "bucketId": { + "description": "Required. A client-assigned identifier such as \"my-bucket\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+parent}/buckets:createAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] + }, "delete": { "description": "Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.", "flatPath": "v2/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", @@ -3762,7 +4003,7 @@ ] }, "patch": { - "description": "Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "description": "Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", "flatPath": "v2/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "logging.organizations.locations.buckets.patch", @@ -3824,6 +4065,41 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] + }, + "updateAsync": { + "description": "Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}:updateAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.organizations.locations.buckets.updateAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/buckets/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+name}:updateAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] } }, "resources": { @@ -4774,6 +5050,40 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] }, + "createAsync": { + "description": "Creates a log bucket asynchronously that can be used to store log entries.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets:createAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.projects.locations.buckets.createAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "bucketId": { + "description": "Required. A client-assigned identifier such as \"my-bucket\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+parent}/buckets:createAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] + }, "delete": { "description": "Deletes a log bucket.Changes the bucket's lifecycle_state to the DELETE_REQUESTED state. After 7 days, the bucket will be purged and all log entries in the bucket will be permanently deleted.", "flatPath": "v2/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", @@ -4868,7 +5178,7 @@ ] }, "patch": { - "description": "Updates a log bucket. This method replaces the following fields in the existing bucket with values from the new bucket: retention_periodIf the retention period is decreased and the bucket is locked, FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "description": "Updates a log bucket.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", "flatPath": "v2/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "logging.projects.locations.buckets.patch", @@ -4930,6 +5240,41 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" ] + }, + "updateAsync": { + "description": "Updates a log bucket asynchronously.If the bucket has a lifecycle_state of DELETE_REQUESTED, then FAILED_PRECONDITION will be returned.After a bucket has been created, the bucket's location cannot be changed.", + "flatPath": "v2/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/buckets/{bucketsId}:updateAsync", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "logging.projects.locations.buckets.updateAsync", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket\"", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/buckets/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v2/{+name}:updateAsync", + "request": { + "$ref": "LogBucket" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/logging.admin" + ] } }, "resources": { @@ -6007,7 +6352,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230211", "rootUrl": "https://logging.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "BigQueryOptions": { @@ -6026,6 +6371,53 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "BucketMetadata": { + "description": "Metadata for LongRunningUpdateBucket Operations.", + "id": "BucketMetadata", + "properties": { + "createBucketRequest": { + "$ref": "CreateBucketRequest", + "description": "LongRunningCreateBucket RPC request." + }, + "endTime": { + "description": "The end time of an operation.", + "format": "google-datetime", + "type": "string" + }, + "startTime": { + "description": "The create time of an operation.", + "format": "google-datetime", + "type": "string" + }, + "state": { + "description": "State of an operation.", + "enum": [ + "OPERATION_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", + "OPERATION_STATE_SCHEDULED", + "OPERATION_STATE_WAITING_FOR_PERMISSIONS", + "OPERATION_STATE_RUNNING", + "OPERATION_STATE_SUCCEEDED", + "OPERATION_STATE_FAILED", + "OPERATION_STATE_CANCELLED" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Should not be used.", + "The operation is scheduled.", + "Waiting for necessary permissions.", + "The operation is running.", + "The operation was completed successfully.", + "The operation failed.", + "The operation was cancelled by the user." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "updateBucketRequest": { + "$ref": "UpdateBucketRequest", + "description": "LongRunningUpdateBucket RPC request." + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "BucketOptions": { "description": "BucketOptions describes the bucket boundaries used to create a histogram for the distribution. The buckets can be in a linear sequence, an exponential sequence, or each bucket can be specified explicitly. BucketOptions does not include the number of values in each bucket.A bucket has an inclusive lower bound and exclusive upper bound for the values that are counted for that bucket. The upper bound of a bucket must be strictly greater than the lower bound. The sequence of N buckets for a distribution consists of an underflow bucket (number 0), zero or more finite buckets (number 1 through N - 2) and an overflow bucket (number N - 1). The buckets are contiguous: the lower bound of bucket i (i > 0) is the same as the upper bound of bucket i - 1. The buckets span the whole range of finite values: lower bound of the underflow bucket is -infinity and the upper bound of the overflow bucket is +infinity. The finite buckets are so-called because both bounds are finite.", "id": "BucketOptions", @@ -6163,6 +6555,25 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "CreateBucketRequest": { + "description": "The parameters to CreateBucket.", + "id": "CreateBucketRequest", + "properties": { + "bucket": { + "$ref": "LogBucket", + "description": "Required. The new bucket. The region specified in the new bucket must be compliant with any Location Restriction Org Policy. The name field in the bucket is ignored." + }, + "bucketId": { + "description": "Required. A client-assigned identifier such as \"my-bucket\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods.", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The resource in which to create the log bucket: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "Empty": { "description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } ", "id": "Empty", @@ -6616,6 +7027,10 @@ "description": "Describes a repository in which log entries are stored.", "id": "LogBucket", "properties": { + "analyticsEnabled": { + "description": "Whether log analytics is enabled for this bucket.Once enabled, log analytics features cannot be disabled.", + "type": "boolean" + }, "cmekSettings": { "$ref": "CmekSettings", "description": "The CMEK settings of the log bucket. If present, new log entries written to this log bucket are encrypted using the CMEK key provided in this configuration. If a log bucket has CMEK settings, the CMEK settings cannot be disabled later by updating the log bucket. Changing the KMS key is allowed." @@ -6642,12 +7057,18 @@ "enum": [ "LIFECYCLE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", "ACTIVE", - "DELETE_REQUESTED" + "DELETE_REQUESTED", + "UPDATING", + "CREATING", + "FAILED" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Unspecified state. This is only used/useful for distinguishing unset values.", "The normal and active state.", - "The resource has been marked for deletion by the user. For some resources (e.g. buckets), this can be reversed by an un-delete operation." + "The resource has been marked for deletion by the user. For some resources (e.g. buckets), this can be reversed by an un-delete operation.", + "The resource has been marked for an update by the user. It will remain in this state until the update is complete.", + "The resource has been marked for creation by the user. It will remain in this state until the creation is complete.", + "The resource is in an INTERNAL error state." ], "readOnly": true, "type": "string" @@ -7719,6 +8140,26 @@ "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, + "UpdateBucketRequest": { + "description": "The parameters to UpdateBucket.", + "id": "UpdateBucketRequest", + "properties": { + "bucket": { + "$ref": "LogBucket", + "description": "Required. The updated bucket." + }, + "name": { + "description": "Required. The full resource name of the bucket to update. \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/buckets/my-bucket\"", + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Required. Field mask that specifies the fields in bucket that need an update. A bucket field will be overwritten if, and only if, it is in the update mask. name and output only fields cannot be updated.For a detailed FieldMask definition, see: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#google.protobuf.FieldMaskFor example: updateMask=retention_days", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "WriteLogEntriesRequest": { "description": "The parameters to WriteLogEntries.", "id": "WriteLogEntriesRequest", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json index b8c79c9179e..4d89387d541 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json @@ -1486,7 +1486,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230204", + "revision": "20230211", "rootUrl": "https://ml.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleApi__HttpBody": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json index 023a6ebb249..2a7c7be9316 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://monitoring.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Aggregation": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v3.json index 1dce60ca482..7bbff3cd1e6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v3.json @@ -2714,7 +2714,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://monitoring.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Aggregation": { @@ -3823,14 +3823,20 @@ "description": "The content type header to use for the check. The following configurations result in errors: 1. Content type is specified in both the headers field and the content_type field. 2. Request method is GET and content_type is not TYPE_UNSPECIFIED 3. Request method is POST and content_type is TYPE_UNSPECIFIED. 4. Request method is POST and a \"Content-Type\" header is provided via headers field. The content_type field should be used instead.", "enum": [ "TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", - "URL_ENCODED" + "URL_ENCODED", + "USER_PROVIDED" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "No content type specified.", - "body is in URL-encoded form. Equivalent to setting the Content-Type to application/x-www-form-urlencoded in the HTTP request." + "body is in URL-encoded form. Equivalent to setting the Content-Type to application/x-www-form-urlencoded in the HTTP request.", + "body is in custom_content_type form. Equivalent to setting the Content-Type to the contents of custom_content_type in the HTTP request." ], "type": "string" }, + "customContentType": { + "description": "A user provided content type header to use for the check. The invalid configurations outlined in the content_type field apply to custom_content_type, as well as the following: 1. content_type is URL_ENCODED and custom_content_type is set. 2. content_type is USER_PROVIDED and custom_content_type is not set.", + "type": "string" + }, "headers": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessaccountmanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessaccountmanagement.v1.json index 1d38f3e5f89..f7dfdf5beb0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessaccountmanagement.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessaccountmanagement.v1.json @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinessaccountmanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceptInvitationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinesscalls.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinesscalls.v1.json index 46f35a068ca..653c371cfde 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinesscalls.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinesscalls.v1.json @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinessbusinesscalls.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AggregateMetrics": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinessinformation.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinessinformation.v1.json index b2ad93e1910..f813d54ba30 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinessinformation.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessbusinessinformation.v1.json @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinessbusinessinformation.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdWordsLocationExtensions": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinesslodging.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinesslodging.v1.json index 2dd6c5fff89..455f950b187 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinesslodging.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinesslodging.v1.json @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinesslodging.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Accessibility": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessnotifications.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessnotifications.v1.json index 876ef87b451..8d54c3b17dd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessnotifications.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessnotifications.v1.json @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinessnotifications.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "NotificationSetting": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessplaceactions.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessplaceactions.v1.json index e629f7014a4..36ccfa05895 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessplaceactions.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessplaceactions.v1.json @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinessplaceactions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessqanda.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessqanda.v1.json index 8fa7d1bf056..e0a4611c09b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessqanda.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessqanda.v1.json @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinessqanda.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Answer": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessverifications.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessverifications.v1.json index 73bda22f599..311add7383f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessverifications.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/mybusinessverifications.v1.json @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://mybusinessverifications.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddressVerificationData": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1.json index 32dc4461aea..160acc58b78 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1.json @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "pageSize": { - "description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned.", + "description": "The maximum number of results per page to return.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" @@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "pageSize": { - "description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned.", + "description": "The maximum number of results to return per page.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" @@ -1393,7 +1393,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://networkconnectivity.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1alpha1.json index 117d6fac2a8..6b596e8b451 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkconnectivity.v1alpha1.json @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -861,7 +861,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://networkconnectivity.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json index baf72fa701c..76fa09ac542 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json @@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230130", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizationPolicy": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json index 5a95e5c3054..c3b79827ccc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json @@ -109,6 +109,298 @@ "resources": { "locations": { "resources": { + "addressGroups": { + "methods": { + "addItems": { + "description": "Adds items to an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:addItems", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.addItems", + "parameterOrder": [ + "addressGroup" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to add items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:addItems", + "request": { + "$ref": "AddAddressGroupItemsRequest" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "cloneItems": { + "description": "Clones items from one address group to another.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:cloneItems", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.cloneItems", + "parameterOrder": [ + "addressGroup" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:cloneItems", + "request": { + "$ref": "CloneAddressGroupItemsRequest" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "create": { + "description": "Creates a new address group in a given project and location.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.create", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroupId": { + "description": "Required. Short name of the AddressGroup resource to be created. This value should be 1-63 characters long, containing only letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores, and should not start with a number. E.g. \"authz_policy\".", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The parent resource of the AddressGroup. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/addressGroups", + "request": { + "$ref": "AddressGroup" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "delete": { + "description": "Deletes an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}", + "httpMethod": "DELETE", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.delete", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to delete. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "get": { + "description": "Gets details of a single address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.get", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to get. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "response": { + "$ref": "AddressGroup" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "list": { + "description": "Lists address groups in a given project and location.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.list", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "pageSize": { + "description": "Maximum number of AddressGroups to return per call.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "The value returned by the last `ListAddressGroupsResponse` Indicates that this is a continuation of a prior `ListAddressGroups` call, and that the system should return the next page of data.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The project and location from which the AddressGroups should be listed, specified in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/addressGroups", + "response": { + "$ref": "ListAddressGroupsResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "listReferences": { + "description": "Lists references of an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:listReferences", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.listReferences", + "parameterOrder": [ + "addressGroup" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "pageSize": { + "description": "The maximum number of references to return. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default. Server may return fewer items than requested. A caller should only rely on response's next_page_token to determine if there are more AddressGroupUsers left to be queried.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:listReferences", + "response": { + "$ref": "ListAddressGroupReferencesResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "patch": { + "description": "Updates parameters of an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}", + "httpMethod": "PATCH", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.patch", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "updateMask": { + "description": "Optional. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the AddressGroup resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten.", + "format": "google-fieldmask", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "request": { + "$ref": "AddressGroup" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "removeItems": { + "description": "Removes items from an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:removeItems", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.addressGroups.removeItems", + "parameterOrder": [ + "addressGroup" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to remove items from. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:removeItems", + "request": { + "$ref": "RemoveAddressGroupItemsRequest" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + } + } + }, "operations": { "methods": { "cancel": { @@ -170,172 +462,460 @@ "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.operations.get", "parameterOrder": [ - "name" + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "The name of the operation resource.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "list": { + "description": "Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`. NOTE: the `name` binding allows API services to override the binding to use different resource name schemes, such as `users/*/operations`. To override the binding, API services can add a binding such as `\"/v1/{name=users/*}/operations\"` to their service configuration. For backwards compatibility, the default name includes the operations collection id, however overriding users must ensure the name binding is the parent resource, without the operations collection id.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/operations", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.operations.list", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "filter": { + "description": "The standard list filter.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "name": { + "description": "The name of the operation's parent resource.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "pageSize": { + "description": "The standard list page size.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "The standard list page token.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}/operations", + "response": { + "$ref": "ListOperationsResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + } + } + } + } + } + } + }, + "projects": { + "resources": { + "locations": { + "methods": { + "get": { + "description": "Gets information about a location.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.get", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Resource name for the location.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "response": { + "$ref": "Location" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "list": { + "description": "Lists information about the supported locations for this service.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.list", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "filter": { + "description": "A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `\"displayName=tokyo\"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "name": { + "description": "The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "pageSize": { + "description": "The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}/locations", + "response": { + "$ref": "ListLocationsResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + } + }, + "resources": { + "addressGroups": { + "methods": { + "addItems": { + "description": "Adds items to an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:addItems", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.addItems", + "parameterOrder": [ + "addressGroup" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to add items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:addItems", + "request": { + "$ref": "AddAddressGroupItemsRequest" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "cloneItems": { + "description": "Clones items from one address group to another.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:cloneItems", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.cloneItems", + "parameterOrder": [ + "addressGroup" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:cloneItems", + "request": { + "$ref": "CloneAddressGroupItemsRequest" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "create": { + "description": "Creates a new address group in a given project and location.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.create", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "addressGroupId": { + "description": "Required. Short name of the AddressGroup resource to be created. This value should be 1-63 characters long, containing only letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores, and should not start with a number. E.g. \"authz_policy\".", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The parent resource of the AddressGroup. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/addressGroups", + "request": { + "$ref": "AddressGroup" + }, + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "delete": { + "description": "Deletes a single address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}", + "httpMethod": "DELETE", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.delete", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to delete. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "response": { + "$ref": "Operation" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "get": { + "description": "Gets details of a single address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.get", + "parameterOrder": [ + "name" + ], + "parameters": { + "name": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to get. Must be in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "response": { + "$ref": "AddressGroup" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "getIamPolicy": { + "description": "Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:getIamPolicy", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.getIamPolicy", + "parameterOrder": [ + "resource" + ], + "parameters": { + "options.requestedPolicyVersion": { + "description": "Optional. The maximum policy version that will be used to format the policy. Valid values are 0, 1, and 3. Requests specifying an invalid value will be rejected. Requests for policies with any conditional role bindings must specify version 3. Policies with no conditional role bindings may specify any valid value or leave the field unset. The policy in the response might use the policy version that you specified, or it might use a lower policy version. For example, if you specify version 3, but the policy has no conditional role bindings, the response uses version 1. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "resource": { + "description": "REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being requested. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+resource}:getIamPolicy", + "response": { + "$ref": "GoogleIamV1Policy" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "list": { + "description": "Lists address groups in a given project and location.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.list", + "parameterOrder": [ + "parent" + ], + "parameters": { + "pageSize": { + "description": "Maximum number of AddressGroups to return per call.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "The value returned by the last `ListAddressGroupsResponse` Indicates that this is a continuation of a prior `ListAddressGroups` call, and that the system should return the next page of data.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" + }, + "parent": { + "description": "Required. The project and location from which the AddressGroups should be listed, specified in the format `projects/*/locations/{location}`.", + "location": "path", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "required": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/addressGroups", + "response": { + "$ref": "ListAddressGroupsResponse" + }, + "scopes": [ + "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" + ] + }, + "listReferences": { + "description": "Lists references of an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:listReferences", + "httpMethod": "GET", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.listReferences", + "parameterOrder": [ + "addressGroup" ], "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The name of the operation resource.", + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to clone items to. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", "location": "path", - "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" + }, + "pageSize": { + "description": "The maximum number of references to return. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default. Server may return fewer items than requested. A caller should only rely on response's next_page_token to determine if there are more AddressGroupUsers left to be queried.", + "format": "int32", + "location": "query", + "type": "integer" + }, + "pageToken": { + "description": "The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.", + "location": "query", + "type": "string" } }, - "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:listReferences", "response": { - "$ref": "Operation" + "$ref": "ListAddressGroupReferencesResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, - "list": { - "description": "Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`. NOTE: the `name` binding allows API services to override the binding to use different resource name schemes, such as `users/*/operations`. To override the binding, API services can add a binding such as `\"/v1/{name=users/*}/operations\"` to their service configuration. For backwards compatibility, the default name includes the operations collection id, however overriding users must ensure the name binding is the parent resource, without the operations collection id.", - "flatPath": "v1beta1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/operations", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "networksecurity.organizations.locations.operations.list", + "patch": { + "description": "Updates the parameters of a single address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}", + "httpMethod": "PATCH", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.patch", "parameterOrder": [ "name" ], "parameters": { - "filter": { - "description": "The standard list filter.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, "name": { - "description": "The name of the operation's parent resource.", + "description": "Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.", "location": "path", - "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", + "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" }, - "pageSize": { - "description": "The standard list page size.", - "format": "int32", + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", - "type": "integer" + "type": "string" }, - "pageToken": { - "description": "The standard list page token.", + "updateMask": { + "description": "Optional. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the AddressGroup resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields will be overwritten.", + "format": "google-fieldmask", "location": "query", "type": "string" } }, - "path": "v1beta1/{+name}/operations", + "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", + "request": { + "$ref": "AddressGroup" + }, "response": { - "$ref": "ListOperationsResponse" + "$ref": "Operation" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] - } - } - } - } - } - } - }, - "projects": { - "resources": { - "locations": { - "methods": { - "get": { - "description": "Gets information about a location.", - "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.get", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "Resource name for the location.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1beta1/{+name}", - "response": { - "$ref": "Location" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "list": { - "description": "Lists information about the supported locations for this service.", - "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.list", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "filter": { - "description": "A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `\"displayName=tokyo\"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "name": { - "description": "The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "pageSize": { - "description": "The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default.", - "format": "int32", - "location": "query", - "type": "integer" }, - "pageToken": { - "description": "A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1beta1/{+name}/locations", - "response": { - "$ref": "ListLocationsResponse" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - } - }, - "resources": { - "addressGroups": { - "methods": { - "getIamPolicy": { - "description": "Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.", - "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:getIamPolicy", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.getIamPolicy", + "removeItems": { + "description": "Removes items from an address group.", + "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/addressGroups/{addressGroupsId}:removeItems", + "httpMethod": "POST", + "id": "networksecurity.projects.locations.addressGroups.removeItems", "parameterOrder": [ - "resource" + "addressGroup" ], "parameters": { - "options.requestedPolicyVersion": { - "description": "Optional. The maximum policy version that will be used to format the policy. Valid values are 0, 1, and 3. Requests specifying an invalid value will be rejected. Requests for policies with any conditional role bindings must specify version 3. Policies with no conditional role bindings may specify any valid value or leave the field unset. The policy in the response might use the policy version that you specified, or it might use a lower policy version. For example, if you specify version 3, but the policy has no conditional role bindings, the response uses version 1. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).", - "format": "int32", - "location": "query", - "type": "integer" - }, - "resource": { - "description": "REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being requested. See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names) for the appropriate value for this field.", + "addressGroup": { + "description": "Required. A name of the AddressGroup to remove items from. Must be in the format `projects|organization/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/*`.", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/addressGroups/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, - "path": "v1beta1/{+resource}:getIamPolicy", + "path": "v1beta1/{+addressGroup}:removeItems", + "request": { + "$ref": "RemoveAddressGroupItemsRequest" + }, "response": { - "$ref": "GoogleIamV1Policy" + "$ref": "Operation" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" @@ -1259,9 +1839,92 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230130", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { + "AddAddressGroupItemsRequest": { + "description": "Request used by the AddAddressGroupItems method.", + "id": "AddAddressGroupItemsRequest", + "properties": { + "items": { + "description": "Required. List of items to add.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "AddressGroup": { + "description": "AddressGroup is a resource that specifies how a collection of IP/DNS used in Firewall Policy.", + "id": "AddressGroup", + "properties": { + "capacity": { + "description": "Required. Capacity of the Address Group", + "format": "int32", + "type": "integer" + }, + "createTime": { + "description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.", + "format": "google-datetime", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "description": { + "description": "Optional. Free-text description of the resource.", + "type": "string" + }, + "items": { + "description": "Optional. List of items.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "labels": { + "additionalProperties": { + "type": "string" + }, + "description": "Optional. Set of label tags associated with the AddressGroup resource.", + "type": "object" + }, + "name": { + "description": "Required. Name of the AddressGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects/*/locations/{location}/addressGroups/`.", + "type": "string" + }, + "selfLink": { + "description": "Output only. Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + }, + "type": { + "description": "Required. The type of the Address Group. Possible values are \"IPv4\" or \"IPV6\".", + "enum": [ + "TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", + "IPV4", + "IPV6" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Default value.", + "IP v4 ranges.", + "IP v6 ranges." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "updateTime": { + "description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was updated.", + "format": "google-datetime", + "readOnly": true, + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "AuthorizationPolicy": { "description": "AuthorizationPolicy is a resource that specifies how a server should authorize incoming connections. This resource in itself does not change the configuration unless it's attached to a target https proxy or endpoint config selector resource.", "id": "AuthorizationPolicy", @@ -1383,6 +2046,21 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "CloneAddressGroupItemsRequest": { + "description": "Request used by the CloneAddressGroupItems method.", + "id": "CloneAddressGroupItemsRequest", + "properties": { + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "type": "string" + }, + "sourceAddressGroup": { + "description": "Required. Source address group to clone items from.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "Destination": { "description": "Specification of traffic destination attributes.", "id": "Destination", @@ -1631,6 +2309,58 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "ListAddressGroupReferencesResponse": { + "description": "Response of the ListAddressGroupReferences method.", + "id": "ListAddressGroupReferencesResponse", + "properties": { + "addressGroupReferences": { + "description": "A list of references that matches the specified filter in the request.", + "items": { + "$ref": "ListAddressGroupReferencesResponseAddressGroupReference" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "nextPageToken": { + "description": "If there might be more results than those appearing in this response, then `next_page_token` is included. To get the next set of results, call this method again using the value of `next_page_token` as `page_token`.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "ListAddressGroupReferencesResponseAddressGroupReference": { + "description": "The Reference of AddressGroup.", + "id": "ListAddressGroupReferencesResponseAddressGroupReference", + "properties": { + "firewallPolicy": { + "description": "FirewallPolicy that is using the Address Group.", + "type": "string" + }, + "rulePriority": { + "description": "Rule priority of the FirewallPolicy that is using the Address Group.", + "format": "int32", + "type": "integer" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "ListAddressGroupsResponse": { + "description": "Response returned by the ListAddressGroups method.", + "id": "ListAddressGroupsResponse", + "properties": { + "addressGroups": { + "description": "List of AddressGroups resources.", + "items": { + "$ref": "AddressGroup" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "nextPageToken": { + "description": "If there might be more results than those appearing in this response, then `next_page_token` is included. To get the next set of results, call this method again using the value of `next_page_token` as `page_token`.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "ListAuthorizationPoliciesResponse": { "description": "Response returned by the ListAuthorizationPolicies method.", "id": "ListAuthorizationPoliciesResponse", @@ -1848,6 +2578,24 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "RemoveAddressGroupItemsRequest": { + "description": "Request used by the RemoveAddressGroupItems method.", + "id": "RemoveAddressGroupItemsRequest", + "properties": { + "items": { + "description": "Required. List of items to remove.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "requestId": { + "description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "Rule": { "description": "Specification of rules.", "id": "Rule", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1.json index ee1af8f75d9..513085205b7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1.json @@ -2148,7 +2148,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://networkservices.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -2412,7 +2412,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "scope": { - "description": "Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.", + "description": "Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.", "type": "string" }, "selfLink": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1beta1.json index e71da7c0405..61f1463dcac 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkservices.v1beta1.json @@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://networkservices.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -2096,7 +2096,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "scope": { - "description": "Required. Immutable. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.", + "description": "Optional. Scope determines how configuration across multiple Gateway instances are merged. The configuration for multiple Gateway instances with the same scope will be merged as presented as a single coniguration to the proxy/load balancer. Max length 64 characters. Scope should start with a letter and can only have letters, numbers, hyphens.", "type": "string" }, "selfLink": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1.json index ea15ba2cba4..ec588fb848a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1.json @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://ondemandscanning.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AliasContext": { @@ -2326,6 +2326,10 @@ "format": "float", "type": "number" }, + "cvssV2": { + "$ref": "CVSS", + "description": "The cvss v2 score for the vulnerability." + }, "cvssVersion": { "description": "Output only. CVSS version used to populate cvss_score and severity.", "enum": [ diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1beta1.json index 30f770888e1..cf9c05b5b3b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ondemandscanning.v1beta1.json @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://ondemandscanning.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AliasContext": { @@ -2322,6 +2322,10 @@ "format": "float", "type": "number" }, + "cvssV2": { + "$ref": "CVSS", + "description": "The cvss v2 score for the vulnerability." + }, "cvssVersion": { "description": "Output only. CVSS version used to populate cvss_score and severity.", "enum": [ diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/orgpolicy.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/orgpolicy.v2.json index e82884ea11e..5eb825ab211 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/orgpolicy.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/orgpolicy.v2.json @@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://orgpolicy.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2AlternatePolicySpec": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1.json index 140c00549b6..abec5f5d069 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1.json @@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://osconfig.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AptSettings": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1beta.json index 6621f2e57c3..9ae72c130e3 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/osconfig.v1beta.json @@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://osconfig.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AptRepository": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1.json index 49d80317f95..95c50f6d447 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1.json @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://oslogin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1alpha.json index 1e7a355e017..18471c64ea6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1alpha.json @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://oslogin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1beta.json index 01a84d54c07..9069b213db9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oslogin.v1beta.json @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://oslogin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pagespeedonline.v5.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pagespeedonline.v5.json index 0b464e54ad5..b716273273f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pagespeedonline.v5.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pagespeedonline.v5.json @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230210", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://pagespeedonline.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditRefs": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/paymentsresellersubscription.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/paymentsresellersubscription.v1.json index 2ca24aefe5e..eff3778e3c2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/paymentsresellersubscription.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/paymentsresellersubscription.v1.json @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230217", "rootUrl": "https://paymentsresellersubscription.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPaymentsResellerSubscriptionV1Amount": { @@ -1068,6 +1068,11 @@ "description": "Individual line item definition of a subscription.", "id": "GoogleCloudPaymentsResellerSubscriptionV1SubscriptionLineItem", "properties": { + "amount": { + "$ref": "GoogleCloudPaymentsResellerSubscriptionV1Amount", + "description": "Output only. The price of the product/service in this line item.", + "readOnly": true + }, "description": { "description": "Output only. Description of this line item.", "readOnly": true, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/people.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/people.v1.json index b3b214f3d05..b8087afd0a2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/people.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/people.v1.json @@ -1172,7 +1172,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://people.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Address": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playcustomapp.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playcustomapp.v1.json index 7f529cebbfa..1a068a2a206 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playcustomapp.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playcustomapp.v1.json @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://playcustomapp.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CustomApp": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json index 51ed6c2349e..4fd5670b887 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://playintegrity.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccountActivity": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1.json index 496fb2a6dba..7b7d279de7e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1.json @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://policyanalyzer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPolicyanalyzerV1Activity": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1beta1.json index 22d46f37cd2..c37802e96b4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policyanalyzer.v1beta1.json @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://policyanalyzer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPolicyanalyzerV1beta1Activity": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json index 58f2ac31629..b6727829cf1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230115", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://policysimulator.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1AccessStateDiff": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1alpha.json index 234d6d2d430..89c070dbdba 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1alpha.json @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230115", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://policysimulator.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1Replay": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1beta1.json index 59ad33ac179..4fa1f329abb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1beta1.json @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230115", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://policysimulator.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1Replay": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1.json index 8aa17ac169c..0ddc05cc701 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1.json @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://policytroubleshooter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPolicytroubleshooterV1AccessTuple": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1beta.json index ff3c8e89d82..1f1b61d89fb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policytroubleshooter.v1beta.json @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://policytroubleshooter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudPolicytroubleshooterV1betaAccessTuple": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json index fac1a560876..333f21b3101 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1222,7 +1222,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1387,7 +1387,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://privateca.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessUrls": { @@ -1625,7 +1625,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "type": "string" }, "subordinateConfig": { @@ -2105,7 +2105,8 @@ "EXTENDED_KEY_USAGE", "CA_OPTIONS", "POLICY_IDS", - "AIA_OCSP_SERVERS" + "AIA_OCSP_SERVERS", + "NAME_CONSTRAINTS" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Not specified.", @@ -2113,7 +2114,8 @@ "Refers to a certificate's Extended Key Usage extension, as described in [RFC 5280 section 4.2.1.12](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.12). This corresponds to the KeyUsage.extended_key_usage message.", "Refers to a certificate's Basic Constraints extension, as described in [RFC 5280 section 4.2.1.9](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.9). This corresponds to the X509Parameters.ca_options field.", "Refers to a certificate's Policy object identifiers, as described in [RFC 5280 section 4.2.1.4](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4). This corresponds to the X509Parameters.policy_ids field.", - "Refers to OCSP servers in a certificate's Authority Information Access extension, as described in [RFC 5280 section 4.2.2.1](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.2.1), This corresponds to the X509Parameters.aia_ocsp_servers field." + "Refers to OCSP servers in a certificate's Authority Information Access extension, as described in [RFC 5280 section 4.2.2.1](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.2.1), This corresponds to the X509Parameters.aia_ocsp_servers field.", + "Refers to Name Constraints extension as described in [RFC 5280 section 4.2.1.10](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10)" ], "type": "string" }, @@ -2279,7 +2281,7 @@ "id": "DisableCertificateAuthorityRequest", "properties": { "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "type": "string" } }, @@ -2319,7 +2321,7 @@ "id": "EnableCertificateAuthorityRequest", "properties": { "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "type": "string" } }, @@ -2384,7 +2386,7 @@ "id": "FetchCaCertsRequest", "properties": { "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "type": "string" } }, @@ -2774,6 +2776,73 @@ }, "type": "object" }, + "NameConstraints": { + "description": "Describes the X.509 name constraints extension, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.10", + "id": "NameConstraints", + "properties": { + "critical": { + "description": "Indicates whether or not the name constraints are marked critical.", + "type": "boolean" + }, + "excludedDnsNames": { + "description": "Contains excluded DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "excludedEmailAddresses": { + "description": "Contains the excluded email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "excludedIpRanges": { + "description": "Contains the excluded IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "excludedUris": { + "description": "Contains the excluded URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "permittedDnsNames": { + "description": "Contains permitted DNS names. Any DNS name that can be constructed by simply adding zero or more labels to the left-hand side of the name satisfies the name constraint. For example, `example.com`, `www.example.com`, `www.sub.example.com` would satisfy `example.com` while `example1.com` does not.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "permittedEmailAddresses": { + "description": "Contains the permitted email addresses. The value can be a particular email address, a hostname to indicate all email addresses on that host or a domain with a leading period (e.g. `.example.com`) to indicate all email addresses in that domain.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "permittedIpRanges": { + "description": "Contains the permitted IP ranges. For IPv4 addresses, the ranges are expressed using CIDR notation as specified in RFC 4632. For IPv6 addresses, the ranges are expressed in similar encoding as IPv4 addresses.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "permittedUris": { + "description": "Contains the permitted URIs that apply to the host part of the name. The value can be a hostname or a domain with a leading period (like `.example.com`)", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, "ObjectId": { "description": "An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages.", "id": "ObjectId", @@ -3032,7 +3101,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "type": "string" } }, @@ -3331,7 +3400,7 @@ "id": "UndeleteCertificateAuthorityRequest", "properties": { "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. An ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "type": "string" } }, @@ -3383,6 +3452,10 @@ "$ref": "KeyUsage", "description": "Optional. Indicates the intended use for keys that correspond to a certificate." }, + "nameConstraints": { + "$ref": "NameConstraints", + "description": "Optional. Describes the X.509 name constraints extension." + }, "policyIds": { "description": "Optional. Describes the X.509 certificate policy object identifiers, per https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.4.", "items": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json index 74c12c786ce..5c4e17b717b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://privateca.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/prod_tt_sasportal.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/prod_tt_sasportal.v1alpha1.json index 3f7f7279c4c..d2429c88a68 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/prod_tt_sasportal.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/prod_tt_sasportal.v1alpha1.json @@ -2502,7 +2502,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://prod-tt-sasportal.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "SasPortalAssignment": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1.json index 6978fc75284..aaedbdfe930 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1.json @@ -1565,7 +1565,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://pubsub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcknowledgeRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta1a.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta1a.json index 490a9862fb7..8ffa3e8956b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta1a.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta1a.json @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://pubsub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcknowledgeRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta2.json index 42e04191f46..98b19dce352 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsub.v1beta2.json @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://pubsub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcknowledgeRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsublite.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsublite.v1.json index aa1ce42c837..94abd029a8b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsublite.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/pubsublite.v1.json @@ -1040,7 +1040,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230204", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://pubsublite.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1.json index 237d54dbc3a..6b0a1109439 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1.json @@ -1305,7 +1305,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://realtimebidding.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActivatePretargetingConfigRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1alpha.json index f1996157d6c..4702879f8f6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/realtimebidding.v1alpha.json @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://realtimebidding.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActivateBiddingFunctionRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recaptchaenterprise.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recaptchaenterprise.v1.json index a14f0675554..418f131700a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recaptchaenterprise.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recaptchaenterprise.v1.json @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://recaptchaenterprise.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudRecaptchaenterpriseV1AccountDefenderAssessment": { @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ }, "transactionEvent": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudRecaptchaenterpriseV1TransactionEvent", - "description": "Optional. If the Assessment is part of a Payment Transaction, provide details on Payment Lifecycle Events that occur in the Transaction." + "description": "Optional. If the assessment is part of a payment transaction, provide details on payment lifecycle events that occur in the transaction." } }, "type": "object" @@ -1268,20 +1268,20 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default, unspecified event type.", - "Indicates that the transaction is approved by the merchant's risk engine. The accompanying reasons can include 'INHOUSE', 'ACCERTIFY', or 'RECAPTCHA'.", - "Indicates that the transaction is denied and concluded due to risks detected by the merchant's risk engine. The accompanying reasons can include 'INHOUSE', 'ACCERTIFY', 'MANUAL_REVIEW', or 'RECAPTCHA'.", + "Indicates that the transaction is approved by the merchant. The accompanying reasons can include terms such as 'INHOUSE', 'ACCERTIFY', 'CYBERSOURCE', or 'MANUAL_REVIEW'.", + "Indicates that the transaction is denied and concluded due to risks detected by the merchant. The accompanying reasons can include terms such as 'INHOUSE', 'ACCERTIFY', 'CYBERSOURCE', or 'MANUAL_REVIEW'.", "Indicates that the transaction is being evaluated by a human, due to suspicion or risk.", "Indicates that the authorization attempt with the card issuer succeeded.", - "Indicates that the authorization attempt with the card issuer failed. The accompanying reasons can include Visa's '54' indicating that the card is expired or '82' indicating that the CVV is incorrect.", + "Indicates that the authorization attempt with the card issuer failed. The accompanying reasons can include Visa's '54' indicating that the card is expired, or '82' indicating that the CVV is incorrect.", "Indicates that the transaction is completed because the funds were settled.", "Indicates that the transaction could not be completed because the funds were not settled.", "Indicates that the transaction has been canceled. Specify the reason for the cancellation. For example, 'INSUFFICIENT_INVENTORY'.", - "Indicates that the merchant has received a chargeback inquiry for the transaction, requesting additional information before a chargeback is officially issued and a formal chargeback notification is sent.", - "Indicates that the merchant has received a chargeback alert for the transaction. The process of resolving the dispute without involving the payment network is started.", + "Indicates that the merchant has received a chargeback inquiry due to fraud for the transaction, requesting additional information before a fraud chargeback is officially issued and a formal chargeback notification is sent.", + "Indicates that the merchant has received a chargeback alert due to fraud for the transaction. The process of resolving the dispute without involving the payment network is started.", "Indicates that a fraud notification is issued for the transaction, sent by the payment instrument's issuing bank because the transaction appears to be fraudulent. We recommend including TC40 or SAFE data in the `reason` field for this event type. For partial chargebacks, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field.", - "Indicates that the merchant is informed by the payment network that the transaction has entered the chargeback process. Reason code examples include Discover's '4553' and '6041'. For partial chargebacks, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field.", - "Indicates that the transaction has entered the chargeback process, and that the merchant has chosen to enter representment. Reason examples include Discover's '4553' and '6041'. For partial chargebacks, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field.", - "Indicates that the transaction has had a chargeback which was illegitimate and was reversed as a result. For partial chargebacks, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field.", + "Indicates that the merchant is informed by the payment network that the transaction has entered the chargeback process due to fraud. Reason code examples include Discover's '6005' and '6041'. For partial chargebacks, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field.", + "Indicates that the transaction has entered the chargeback process due to fraud, and that the merchant has chosen to enter representment. Reason examples include Discover's '6005' and '6041'. For partial chargebacks, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field.", + "Indicates that the transaction has had a fraud chargeback which was illegitimate and was reversed as a result. For partial chargebacks, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field.", "Indicates that the merchant has received a refund for a completed transaction. For partial refunds, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field. Reason example: 'TAX_EXEMPT' (partial refund of exempt tax)", "Indicates that the merchant has received a refund request for this transaction, but that they have declined it. For partial refunds, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field. Reason example: 'TAX_EXEMPT' (partial refund of exempt tax)", "Indicates that the completed transaction was refunded by the merchant. For partial refunds, we recommend that you include an amount in the `value` field. Reason example: 'TAX_EXEMPT' (partial refund of exempt tax)", @@ -1290,11 +1290,11 @@ "type": "string" }, "reason": { - "description": "Optional. The reason or standardized code which corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. E.g. a CHARGEBACK Event with code 4553.", + "description": "Optional. The reason or standardized code that corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. For example, a CHARGEBACK event with code 6005.", "type": "string" }, "value": { - "description": "Optional. The value that corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. E.g. A refund event where $5.00 was refunded. Currency is obtained from the original transaction data.", + "description": "Optional. The value that corresponds with this transaction event, if one exists. For example, a refund event where $5.00 was refunded. Currency is obtained from the original transaction data.", "format": "double", "type": "number" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommendationengine.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommendationengine.v1beta1.json index d4d13ced8f0..af224957e01 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommendationengine.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommendationengine.v1beta1.json @@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230105", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://recommendationengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleApiHttpBody": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1.json index fc9da89ed18..40157e9887e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1.json @@ -1686,7 +1686,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://recommender.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudRecommenderV1CostProjection": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json index 76e026c9edd..bcdde8c0a4b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json @@ -1686,7 +1686,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://recommender.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudRecommenderV1beta1CostProjection": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json index 45fc5c0f29f..2b999741c92 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://redis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { @@ -783,6 +783,13 @@ "description": "Optional. The full name of the Google Compute Engine [network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. If left unspecified, the `default` network will be used.", "type": "string" }, + "availableMaintenanceVersions": { + "description": "Optional. The available maintenance versions that an instance could update to.", + "items": { + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, "connectMode": { "description": "Optional. The network connect mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, the connect mode defaults to DIRECT_PEERING.", "enum": [ @@ -841,6 +848,10 @@ "description": "Output only. Date and time of upcoming maintenance events which have been scheduled.", "readOnly": true }, + "maintenanceVersion": { + "description": "Optional. The self service update maintenance version. The version is date based such as \"20210712_00_00\".", + "type": "string" + }, "memorySizeGb": { "description": "Required. Redis memory size in GiB.", "format": "int32", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json index 831b77103e5..2056d6bdfd5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://redis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/reseller.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/reseller.v1.json index fbbf821f5e2..6026b1744fd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/reseller.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/reseller.v1.json @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://reseller.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Address": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/resourcesettings.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/resourcesettings.v1.json index 58fd526ddca..dc026d72384 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/resourcesettings.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/resourcesettings.v1.json @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://resourcesettings.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudResourcesettingsV1ListSettingsResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json index e2b5069ecd9..d01812d6256 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json @@ -2289,7 +2289,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://run.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Addressable": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json index 611d80d83d7..f663ec67a1b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json @@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230212", "rootUrl": "https://run.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudRunV2BinaryAuthorization": { @@ -1612,7 +1612,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudRunV2GRPCAction", "properties": { "port": { - "description": "Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.", + "description": "Port number of the gRPC service. Number must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, @@ -1639,7 +1639,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "port": { - "description": "Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535.", + "description": "Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" } @@ -2493,7 +2493,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudRunV2TCPSocketAction", "properties": { "port": { - "description": "Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to 8080.", + "description": "Port number to access on the container. Must be in the range 1 to 65535. If not specified, defaults to the exposed port of the container, which is the value of container.ports[0].containerPort.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1.json index 6b20e1a6101..211d30be4d8 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1.json @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://runtimeconfig.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1beta1.json index 7c817ee930b..d08d37500b2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/runtimeconfig.v1beta1.json @@ -805,7 +805,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://runtimeconfig.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Binding": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/safebrowsing.v4.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/safebrowsing.v4.json index 7ebb40c3295..4a719027767 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/safebrowsing.v4.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/safebrowsing.v4.json @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ }, "path": "v4/encodedFullHashes/{encodedRequest}", "response": { - "$ref": "FindFullHashesResponse" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindFullHashesResponse" } } } @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ }, "path": "v4/encodedUpdates/{encodedRequest}", "response": { - "$ref": "FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse" } } } @@ -179,10 +179,10 @@ "parameters": {}, "path": "v4/fullHashes:find", "request": { - "$ref": "FindFullHashesRequest" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindFullHashesRequest" }, "response": { - "$ref": "FindFullHashesResponse" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindFullHashesResponse" } } } @@ -198,10 +198,10 @@ "parameters": {}, "path": "v4/threatHits", "request": { - "$ref": "ThreatHit" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHit" }, "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" + "$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" } } } @@ -217,10 +217,10 @@ "parameters": {}, "path": "v4/threatListUpdates:fetch", "request": { - "$ref": "FetchThreatListUpdatesRequest" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequest" }, "response": { - "$ref": "FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse" } } } @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ "parameters": {}, "path": "v4/threatLists", "response": { - "$ref": "ListThreatListsResponse" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ListThreatListsResponse" } } } @@ -252,21 +252,27 @@ "parameters": {}, "path": "v4/threatMatches:find", "request": { - "$ref": "FindThreatMatchesRequest" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindThreatMatchesRequest" }, "response": { - "$ref": "FindThreatMatchesResponse" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindThreatMatchesResponse" } } } } }, - "revision": "20230206", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://safebrowsing.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { - "Checksum": { + "GoogleProtobufEmpty": { + "description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }", + "id": "GoogleProtobufEmpty", + "properties": {}, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4Checksum": { "description": "The expected state of a client's local database.", - "id": "Checksum", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4Checksum", "properties": { "sha256": { "description": "The SHA256 hash of the client state; that is, of the sorted list of all hashes present in the database.", @@ -276,9 +282,9 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "ClientInfo": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ClientInfo": { "description": "The client metadata associated with Safe Browsing API requests.", - "id": "ClientInfo", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ClientInfo", "properties": { "clientId": { "description": "A client ID that (hopefully) uniquely identifies the client implementation of the Safe Browsing API.", @@ -291,191 +297,30 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "Constraints": { - "description": "The constraints for this update.", - "id": "Constraints", - "properties": { - "deviceLocation": { - "description": "A client's physical location, expressed as a ISO 31166-1 alpha-2 region code.", - "type": "string" - }, - "language": { - "description": "Requests the lists for a specific language. Expects ISO 639 alpha-2 format.", - "type": "string" - }, - "maxDatabaseEntries": { - "description": "Sets the maximum number of entries that the client is willing to have in the local database for the specified list. This should be a power of 2 between 2**10 and 2**20. If zero, no database size limit is set.", - "format": "int32", - "type": "integer" - }, - "maxUpdateEntries": { - "description": "The maximum size in number of entries. The update will not contain more entries than this value. This should be a power of 2 between 2**10 and 2**20. If zero, no update size limit is set.", - "format": "int32", - "type": "integer" - }, - "region": { - "description": "Requests the list for a specific geographic location. If not set the server may pick that value based on the user's IP address. Expects ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 format.", - "type": "string" - }, - "supportedCompressions": { - "description": "The compression types supported by the client.", - "items": { - "enum": [ - "COMPRESSION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", - "RAW", - "RICE" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Unknown.", - "Raw, uncompressed data.", - "Rice-Golomb encoded data." - ], - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "Empty": { - "description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }", - "id": "Empty", - "properties": {}, - "type": "object" - }, - "FetchThreatListUpdatesRequest": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequest": { "description": "Describes a Safe Browsing API update request. Clients can request updates for multiple lists in a single request. The server may not respond to all requests, if the server has no updates for that list. NOTE: Field index 2 is unused. NEXT: 5", - "id": "FetchThreatListUpdatesRequest", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequest", "properties": { "client": { - "$ref": "ClientInfo", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ClientInfo", "description": "The client metadata." }, "listUpdateRequests": { "description": "The requested threat list updates.", "items": { - "$ref": "ListUpdateRequest" - }, - "type": "array" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse": { - "id": "FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse", - "properties": { - "listUpdateResponses": { - "description": "The list updates requested by the clients. The number of responses here may be less than the number of requests sent by clients. This is the case, for example, if the server has no updates for a particular list.", - "items": { - "$ref": "ListUpdateResponse" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "minimumWaitDuration": { - "description": "The minimum duration the client must wait before issuing any update request. If this field is not set clients may update as soon as they want.", - "format": "google-duration", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "FindFullHashesRequest": { - "description": "Request to return full hashes matched by the provided hash prefixes.", - "id": "FindFullHashesRequest", - "properties": { - "apiClient": { - "$ref": "ClientInfo", - "description": "Client metadata associated with callers of higher-level APIs built on top of the client's implementation." - }, - "client": { - "$ref": "ClientInfo", - "description": "The client metadata." - }, - "clientStates": { - "description": "The current client states for each of the client's local threat lists.", - "items": { - "format": "byte", - "type": "string" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "threatInfo": { - "$ref": "ThreatInfo", - "description": "The lists and hashes to be checked." - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "FindFullHashesResponse": { - "id": "FindFullHashesResponse", - "properties": { - "matches": { - "description": "The full hashes that matched the requested prefixes.", - "items": { - "$ref": "ThreatMatch" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "minimumWaitDuration": { - "description": "The minimum duration the client must wait before issuing any find hashes request. If this field is not set, clients can issue a request as soon as they want.", - "format": "google-duration", - "type": "string" - }, - "negativeCacheDuration": { - "description": "For requested entities that did not match the threat list, how long to cache the response.", - "format": "google-duration", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "FindThreatMatchesRequest": { - "description": "Request to check entries against lists.", - "id": "FindThreatMatchesRequest", - "properties": { - "client": { - "$ref": "ClientInfo", - "description": "The client metadata." - }, - "threatInfo": { - "$ref": "ThreatInfo", - "description": "The lists and entries to be checked for matches." - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "FindThreatMatchesResponse": { - "id": "FindThreatMatchesResponse", - "properties": { - "matches": { - "description": "The threat list matches.", - "items": { - "$ref": "ThreatMatch" - }, - "type": "array" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "ListThreatListsResponse": { - "id": "ListThreatListsResponse", - "properties": { - "threatLists": { - "description": "The lists available for download by the client.", - "items": { - "$ref": "ThreatListDescriptor" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequestListUpdateRequest" }, "type": "array" } }, "type": "object" }, - "ListUpdateRequest": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequestListUpdateRequest": { "description": "A single list update request.", - "id": "ListUpdateRequest", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequestListUpdateRequest", "properties": { "constraints": { - "$ref": "Constraints", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequestListUpdateRequestConstraints", "description": "The constraints associated with this request." }, "platformType": { @@ -578,19 +423,83 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "ListUpdateResponse": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequestListUpdateRequestConstraints": { + "description": "The constraints for this update.", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesRequestListUpdateRequestConstraints", + "properties": { + "deviceLocation": { + "description": "A client's physical location, expressed as a ISO 31166-1 alpha-2 region code.", + "type": "string" + }, + "language": { + "description": "Requests the lists for a specific language. Expects ISO 639 alpha-2 format.", + "type": "string" + }, + "maxDatabaseEntries": { + "description": "Sets the maximum number of entries that the client is willing to have in the local database for the specified list. This should be a power of 2 between 2**10 and 2**20. If zero, no database size limit is set.", + "format": "int32", + "type": "integer" + }, + "maxUpdateEntries": { + "description": "The maximum size in number of entries. The update will not contain more entries than this value. This should be a power of 2 between 2**10 and 2**20. If zero, no update size limit is set.", + "format": "int32", + "type": "integer" + }, + "region": { + "description": "Requests the list for a specific geographic location. If not set the server may pick that value based on the user's IP address. Expects ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 format.", + "type": "string" + }, + "supportedCompressions": { + "description": "The compression types supported by the client.", + "items": { + "enum": [ + "COMPRESSION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", + "RAW", + "RICE" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Unknown.", + "Raw, uncompressed data.", + "Rice-Golomb encoded data." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse": { + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesResponse", + "properties": { + "listUpdateResponses": { + "description": "The list updates requested by the clients. The number of responses here may be less than the number of requests sent by clients. This is the case, for example, if the server has no updates for a particular list.", + "items": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesResponseListUpdateResponse" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "minimumWaitDuration": { + "description": "The minimum duration the client must wait before issuing any update request. If this field is not set clients may update as soon as they want.", + "format": "google-duration", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesResponseListUpdateResponse": { "description": "An update to an individual list.", - "id": "ListUpdateResponse", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FetchThreatListUpdatesResponseListUpdateResponse", "properties": { "additions": { "description": "A set of entries to add to a local threat type's list. Repeated to allow for a combination of compressed and raw data to be sent in a single response.", "items": { - "$ref": "ThreatEntrySet" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntrySet" }, "type": "array" }, "checksum": { - "$ref": "Checksum", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4Checksum", "description": "The expected SHA256 hash of the client state; that is, of the sorted list of all hashes present in the database after applying the provided update. If the client state doesn't match the expected state, the client must disregard this update and retry later." }, "newClientState": { @@ -627,7 +536,7 @@ "removals": { "description": "A set of entries to remove from a local threat type's list. In practice, this field is empty or contains exactly one ThreatEntrySet.", "items": { - "$ref": "ThreatEntrySet" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntrySet" }, "type": "array" }, @@ -714,26 +623,100 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "MetadataEntry": { - "description": "A single metadata entry.", - "id": "MetadataEntry", + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindFullHashesRequest": { + "description": "Request to return full hashes matched by the provided hash prefixes.", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindFullHashesRequest", "properties": { - "key": { - "description": "The metadata entry key. For JSON requests, the key is base64-encoded.", - "format": "byte", + "apiClient": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ClientInfo", + "description": "Client metadata associated with callers of higher-level APIs built on top of the client's implementation." + }, + "client": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ClientInfo", + "description": "The client metadata." + }, + "clientStates": { + "description": "The current client states for each of the client's local threat lists.", + "items": { + "format": "byte", + "type": "string" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "threatInfo": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatInfo", + "description": "The lists and hashes to be checked." + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindFullHashesResponse": { + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindFullHashesResponse", + "properties": { + "matches": { + "description": "The full hashes that matched the requested prefixes.", + "items": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatMatch" + }, + "type": "array" + }, + "minimumWaitDuration": { + "description": "The minimum duration the client must wait before issuing any find hashes request. If this field is not set, clients can issue a request as soon as they want.", + "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, - "value": { - "description": "The metadata entry value. For JSON requests, the value is base64-encoded.", - "format": "byte", + "negativeCacheDuration": { + "description": "For requested entities that did not match the threat list, how long to cache the response.", + "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" } }, "type": "object" }, - "RawHashes": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindThreatMatchesRequest": { + "description": "Request to check entries against lists.", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindThreatMatchesRequest", + "properties": { + "client": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ClientInfo", + "description": "The client metadata." + }, + "threatInfo": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatInfo", + "description": "The lists and entries to be checked for matches." + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindThreatMatchesResponse": { + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4FindThreatMatchesResponse", + "properties": { + "matches": { + "description": "The threat list matches.", + "items": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatMatch" + }, + "type": "array" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ListThreatListsResponse": { + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ListThreatListsResponse", + "properties": { + "threatLists": { + "description": "The lists available for download by the client.", + "items": { + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatListDescriptor" + }, + "type": "array" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RawHashes": { "description": "The uncompressed threat entries in hash format of a particular prefix length. Hashes can be anywhere from 4 to 32 bytes in size. A large majority are 4 bytes, but some hashes are lengthened if they collide with the hash of a popular URL. Used for sending ThreatEntrySet to clients that do not support compression, or when sending non-4-byte hashes to clients that do support compression.", - "id": "RawHashes", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RawHashes", "properties": { "prefixSize": { "description": "The number of bytes for each prefix encoded below. This field can be anywhere from 4 (shortest prefix) to 32 (full SHA256 hash).", @@ -748,9 +731,9 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "RawIndices": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RawIndices": { "description": "A set of raw indices to remove from a local list.", - "id": "RawIndices", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RawIndices", "properties": { "indices": { "description": "The indices to remove from a lexicographically-sorted local list.", @@ -763,9 +746,9 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "RiceDeltaEncoding": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RiceDeltaEncoding": { "description": "The Rice-Golomb encoded data. Used for sending compressed 4-byte hashes or compressed removal indices.", - "id": "RiceDeltaEncoding", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RiceDeltaEncoding", "properties": { "encodedData": { "description": "The encoded deltas that are encoded using the Golomb-Rice coder.", @@ -790,9 +773,9 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "ThreatEntry": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntry": { "description": "An individual threat; for example, a malicious URL or its hash representation. Only one of these fields should be set.", - "id": "ThreatEntry", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntry", "properties": { "digest": { "description": "The digest of an executable in SHA256 format. The API supports both binary and hex digests. For JSON requests, digests are base64-encoded.", @@ -811,23 +794,40 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "ThreatEntryMetadata": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntryMetadata": { "description": "The metadata associated with a specific threat entry. The client is expected to know the metadata key/value pairs associated with each threat type.", - "id": "ThreatEntryMetadata", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntryMetadata", "properties": { "entries": { "description": "The metadata entries.", "items": { - "$ref": "MetadataEntry" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntryMetadataMetadataEntry" }, "type": "array" } }, "type": "object" }, - "ThreatEntrySet": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntryMetadataMetadataEntry": { + "description": "A single metadata entry.", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntryMetadataMetadataEntry", + "properties": { + "key": { + "description": "The metadata entry key. For JSON requests, the key is base64-encoded.", + "format": "byte", + "type": "string" + }, + "value": { + "description": "The metadata entry value. For JSON requests, the value is base64-encoded.", + "format": "byte", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntrySet": { "description": "A set of threats that should be added or removed from a client's local database.", - "id": "ThreatEntrySet", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntrySet", "properties": { "compressionType": { "description": "The compression type for the entries in this set.", @@ -844,33 +844,33 @@ "type": "string" }, "rawHashes": { - "$ref": "RawHashes", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RawHashes", "description": "The raw SHA256-formatted entries." }, "rawIndices": { - "$ref": "RawIndices", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RawIndices", "description": "The raw removal indices for a local list." }, "riceHashes": { - "$ref": "RiceDeltaEncoding", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RiceDeltaEncoding", "description": "The encoded 4-byte prefixes of SHA256-formatted entries, using a Golomb-Rice encoding. The hashes are converted to uint32, sorted in ascending order, then delta encoded and stored as encoded_data." }, "riceIndices": { - "$ref": "RiceDeltaEncoding", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4RiceDeltaEncoding", "description": "The encoded local, lexicographically-sorted list indices, using a Golomb-Rice encoding. Used for sending compressed removal indices. The removal indices (uint32) are sorted in ascending order, then delta encoded and stored as encoded_data." } }, "type": "object" }, - "ThreatHit": { - "id": "ThreatHit", + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHit": { + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHit", "properties": { "clientInfo": { - "$ref": "ClientInfo", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ClientInfo", "description": "Client-reported identification." }, "entry": { - "$ref": "ThreatEntry", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntry", "description": "The threat entry responsible for the hit. Full hash should be reported for hash-based hits." }, "platformType": { @@ -902,7 +902,7 @@ "resources": { "description": "The resources related to the threat hit.", "items": { - "$ref": "ThreatSource" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHitThreatSource" }, "type": "array" }, @@ -951,15 +951,68 @@ "type": "string" }, "userInfo": { - "$ref": "UserInfo", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHitUserInfo", "description": "Details about the user that encountered the threat." } }, "type": "object" }, - "ThreatInfo": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHitThreatSource": { + "description": "A single resource related to a threat hit.", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHitThreatSource", + "properties": { + "referrer": { + "description": "Referrer of the resource. Only set if the referrer is available.", + "type": "string" + }, + "remoteIp": { + "description": "The remote IP of the resource in ASCII format. Either IPv4 or IPv6.", + "type": "string" + }, + "type": { + "description": "The type of source reported.", + "enum": [ + "THREAT_SOURCE_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", + "MATCHING_URL", + "TAB_URL", + "TAB_REDIRECT", + "TAB_RESOURCE" + ], + "enumDescriptions": [ + "Unknown.", + "The URL that matched the threat list (for which GetFullHash returned a valid hash).", + "The final top-level URL of the tab that the client was browsing when the match occurred.", + "A redirect URL that was fetched before hitting the final TAB_URL.", + "A resource loaded within the final TAB_URL." + ], + "type": "string" + }, + "url": { + "description": "The URL of the resource.", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHitUserInfo": { + "description": "Details about the user that encountered the threat.", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatHitUserInfo", + "properties": { + "regionCode": { + "description": "The UN M.49 region code associated with the user's location.", + "type": "string" + }, + "userId": { + "description": "Unique user identifier defined by the client.", + "format": "byte", + "type": "string" + } + }, + "type": "object" + }, + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatInfo": { "description": "The information regarding one or more threats that a client submits when checking for matches in threat lists.", - "id": "ThreatInfo", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatInfo", "properties": { "platformTypes": { "description": "The platform types to be checked.", @@ -993,7 +1046,7 @@ "threatEntries": { "description": "The threat entries to be checked.", "items": { - "$ref": "ThreatEntry" + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntry" }, "type": "array" }, @@ -1072,9 +1125,9 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "ThreatListDescriptor": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatListDescriptor": { "description": "Describes an individual threat list. A list is defined by three parameters: the type of threat posed, the type of platform targeted by the threat, and the type of entries in the list.", - "id": "ThreatListDescriptor", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatListDescriptor", "properties": { "platformType": { "description": "The platform type targeted by the list's entries.", @@ -1171,9 +1224,9 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "ThreatMatch": { + "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatMatch": { "description": "A match when checking a threat entry in the Safe Browsing threat lists.", - "id": "ThreatMatch", + "id": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatMatch", "properties": { "cacheDuration": { "description": "The cache lifetime for the returned match. Clients must not cache this response for more than this duration to avoid false positives.", @@ -1207,11 +1260,11 @@ "type": "string" }, "threat": { - "$ref": "ThreatEntry", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntry", "description": "The threat matching this threat." }, "threatEntryMetadata": { - "$ref": "ThreatEntryMetadata", + "$ref": "GoogleSecuritySafebrowsingV4ThreatEntryMetadata", "description": "Optional metadata associated with this threat." }, "threatEntryType": { @@ -1282,59 +1335,6 @@ } }, "type": "object" - }, - "ThreatSource": { - "description": "A single resource related to a threat hit.", - "id": "ThreatSource", - "properties": { - "referrer": { - "description": "Referrer of the resource. Only set if the referrer is available.", - "type": "string" - }, - "remoteIp": { - "description": "The remote IP of the resource in ASCII format. Either IPv4 or IPv6.", - "type": "string" - }, - "type": { - "description": "The type of source reported.", - "enum": [ - "THREAT_SOURCE_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", - "MATCHING_URL", - "TAB_URL", - "TAB_REDIRECT", - "TAB_RESOURCE" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Unknown.", - "The URL that matched the threat list (for which GetFullHash returned a valid hash).", - "The final top-level URL of the tab that the client was browsing when the match occurred.", - "A redirect URL that was fetched before hitting the final TAB_URL.", - "A resource loaded within the final TAB_URL." - ], - "type": "string" - }, - "url": { - "description": "The URL of the resource.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "UserInfo": { - "description": "Details about the user that encountered the threat.", - "id": "UserInfo", - "properties": { - "regionCode": { - "description": "The UN M.49 region code associated with the user's location.", - "type": "string" - }, - "userId": { - "description": "Unique user identifier defined by the client.", - "format": "byte", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" } }, "servicePath": "", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/searchconsole.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/searchconsole.v1.json index 2ea9cabc923..06e4b8b5fea 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/searchconsole.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/searchconsole.v1.json @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://searchconsole.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AmpInspectionResult": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1.json index 6fd877b9683..8c6590461a4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1.json @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://serviceconsumermanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddTenantProjectRequest": { @@ -787,6 +787,13 @@ "format": "double", "type": "number" }, + "overridesByRequestProtocol": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "BackendRule" + }, + "description": "The map between request protocol and the backend address.", + "type": "object" + }, "pathTranslation": { "enum": [ "PATH_TRANSLATION_UNSPECIFIED", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1beta1.json index c0a83ba5126..90bd741ce02 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceconsumermanagement.v1beta1.json @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://serviceconsumermanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Api": { @@ -696,6 +696,13 @@ "format": "double", "type": "number" }, + "overridesByRequestProtocol": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "BackendRule" + }, + "description": "The map between request protocol and the backend address.", + "type": "object" + }, "pathTranslation": { "enum": [ "PATH_TRANSLATION_UNSPECIFIED", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json index c224b5e0aaa..b9378268cd0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230127", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://servicecontrol.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AllocateInfo": { @@ -646,10 +646,6 @@ "$ref": "CheckInfo", "description": "Feedback data returned from the server during processing a Check request." }, - "esfMigrationServerOverride": { - "$ref": "EsfMigrationServerOverride", - "description": "Esf migration server override during check v2 migration. This is temporary and Chemist internal only." - }, "operationId": { "description": "The same operation_id value used in the CheckRequest. Used for logging and diagnostics purposes.", "type": "string" @@ -763,27 +759,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "EsfMigrationServerOverride": { - "description": "Esf migration server override during chemist check v2 migration", - "id": "EsfMigrationServerOverride", - "properties": { - "overrideMode": { - "description": "Esf migration override mode", - "enum": [ - "ESF_MIGRATION_OVERRIDE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", - "DRY_RUN", - "NO_OVERRIDE" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Default, ESF should use the mode that is determined by the configuration.", - "ESF should send 95% v1 request and 5% dry run request.", - "Same as ESF_MIGRATION_OVERRIDE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED, remove the override mode. This is used for safe unpush." - ], - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "Exemplar": { "description": "Exemplars are example points that may be used to annotate aggregated distribution values. They are metadata that gives information about a particular value added to a Distribution bucket, such as a trace ID that was active when a value was added. They may contain further information, such as a example values and timestamps, origin, etc.", "id": "Exemplar", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json index 98cd3446afd..80c75b4830f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230127", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://servicecontrol.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Api": { @@ -460,10 +460,6 @@ "description": "Response message for the Check method.", "id": "CheckResponse", "properties": { - "esfMigrationServerOverride": { - "$ref": "EsfMigrationServerOverride", - "description": "Esf migration server override during check v2 migration. This is temporary and Chemist internal only." - }, "headers": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" @@ -478,27 +474,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, - "EsfMigrationServerOverride": { - "description": "Esf migration server override during chemist check v2 migration", - "id": "EsfMigrationServerOverride", - "properties": { - "overrideMode": { - "description": "Esf migration override mode", - "enum": [ - "ESF_MIGRATION_OVERRIDE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", - "DRY_RUN", - "NO_OVERRIDE" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Default, ESF should use the mode that is determined by the configuration.", - "ESF should send 95% v1 request and 5% dry run request.", - "Same as ESF_MIGRATION_OVERRIDE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED, remove the override mode. This is used for safe unpush." - ], - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, "FirstPartyPrincipal": { "description": "First party identity principal.", "id": "FirstPartyPrincipal", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json index 33a95985980..a88b55c38c7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://servicemanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Advice": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json index f04a0b6ae65..05e5e708d61 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json @@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://servicenetworking.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddDnsRecordSetMetadata": { @@ -1254,6 +1254,13 @@ "format": "double", "type": "number" }, + "overridesByRequestProtocol": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "BackendRule" + }, + "description": "The map between request protocol and the backend address.", + "type": "object" + }, "pathTranslation": { "enum": [ "PATH_TRANSLATION_UNSPECIFIED", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json index bf3dbff87de..5dfc23c4bc6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://servicenetworking.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddDnsRecordSetMetadata": { @@ -593,6 +593,13 @@ "format": "double", "type": "number" }, + "overridesByRequestProtocol": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "BackendRule" + }, + "description": "The map between request protocol and the backend address.", + "type": "object" + }, "pathTranslation": { "enum": [ "PATH_TRANSLATION_UNSPECIFIED", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1.json index ef8b61db5ba..184a6b7d19e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1.json @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://serviceusage.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdminQuotaPolicy": { @@ -657,6 +657,13 @@ "format": "double", "type": "number" }, + "overridesByRequestProtocol": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "BackendRule" + }, + "description": "The map between request protocol and the backend address.", + "type": "object" + }, "pathTranslation": { "enum": [ "PATH_TRANSLATION_UNSPECIFIED", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1beta1.json index 05cf5574e26..7c22ed4d222 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/serviceusage.v1beta1.json @@ -959,7 +959,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://serviceusage.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdminQuotaPolicy": { @@ -1190,6 +1190,13 @@ "format": "double", "type": "number" }, + "overridesByRequestProtocol": { + "additionalProperties": { + "$ref": "BackendRule" + }, + "description": "The map between request protocol and the backend address.", + "type": "object" + }, "pathTranslation": { "enum": [ "PATH_TRANSLATION_UNSPECIFIED", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sourcerepo.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sourcerepo.v1.json index d99984cc529..2983529b065 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sourcerepo.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sourcerepo.v1.json @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230130", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://sourcerepo.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/spanner.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/spanner.v1.json index 0574fd8e31b..e963682151b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/spanner.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/spanner.v1.json @@ -2402,7 +2402,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://spanner.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Backup": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1.json index 4f6a7d4efb9..47655d29c31 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1.json @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://speech.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ABNFGrammar": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1p1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1p1beta1.json index 665d083310e..9a1cd7e9168 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1p1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/speech.v1p1beta1.json @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://speech.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ABNFGrammar": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1.json index dccb43a6975..94bc4a05eaa 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1.json @@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230109", + "revision": "20230211", "rootUrl": "https://sqladmin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AclEntry": { @@ -2313,6 +2313,7 @@ "MYSQL_8_0_29", "MYSQL_8_0_30", "MYSQL_8_0_31", + "MYSQL_8_0_32", "SQLSERVER_2019_STANDARD", "SQLSERVER_2019_ENTERPRISE", "SQLSERVER_2019_EXPRESS", @@ -2342,6 +2343,7 @@ "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 29.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 30.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 31.", + "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 32.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Standard.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Enterprise.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Express.", @@ -2501,6 +2503,7 @@ "MYSQL_8_0_29", "MYSQL_8_0_30", "MYSQL_8_0_31", + "MYSQL_8_0_32", "SQLSERVER_2019_STANDARD", "SQLSERVER_2019_ENTERPRISE", "SQLSERVER_2019_EXPRESS", @@ -2530,6 +2533,7 @@ "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 29.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 30.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 31.", + "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 32.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Standard.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Enterprise.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Express.", @@ -3035,6 +3039,7 @@ "MYSQL_8_0_29", "MYSQL_8_0_30", "MYSQL_8_0_31", + "MYSQL_8_0_32", "SQLSERVER_2019_STANDARD", "SQLSERVER_2019_ENTERPRISE", "SQLSERVER_2019_EXPRESS", @@ -3064,6 +3069,7 @@ "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 29.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 30.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 31.", + "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 32.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Standard.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Enterprise.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Express.", @@ -4894,7 +4900,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "nextPageToken": { - "description": "An identifier that uniquely identifies the operation. You can use this identifier to retrieve the Operations resource that has information about the operation.", + "description": "Unused.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1beta4.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1beta4.json index 49ac1b4e9fb..80a6714771f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1beta4.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sqladmin.v1beta4.json @@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230109", + "revision": "20230211", "rootUrl": "https://sqladmin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AclEntry": { @@ -2313,6 +2313,7 @@ "MYSQL_8_0_29", "MYSQL_8_0_30", "MYSQL_8_0_31", + "MYSQL_8_0_32", "SQLSERVER_2019_STANDARD", "SQLSERVER_2019_ENTERPRISE", "SQLSERVER_2019_EXPRESS", @@ -2342,6 +2343,7 @@ "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 29.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 30.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 31.", + "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 32.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Standard.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Enterprise.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Express.", @@ -2501,6 +2503,7 @@ "MYSQL_8_0_29", "MYSQL_8_0_30", "MYSQL_8_0_31", + "MYSQL_8_0_32", "SQLSERVER_2019_STANDARD", "SQLSERVER_2019_ENTERPRISE", "SQLSERVER_2019_EXPRESS", @@ -2530,6 +2533,7 @@ "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 29.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 30.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 31.", + "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 32.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Standard.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Enterprise.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Express.", @@ -3035,6 +3039,7 @@ "MYSQL_8_0_29", "MYSQL_8_0_30", "MYSQL_8_0_31", + "MYSQL_8_0_32", "SQLSERVER_2019_STANDARD", "SQLSERVER_2019_ENTERPRISE", "SQLSERVER_2019_EXPRESS", @@ -3064,6 +3069,7 @@ "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 29.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 30.", "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 31.", + "The database major version is MySQL 8.0 and the minor version is 32.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Standard.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Enterprise.", "The database version is SQL Server 2019 Express.", @@ -4892,7 +4898,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "nextPageToken": { - "description": "An identifier that uniquely identifies the operation. You can use this identifier to retrieve the Operations resource that has information about the operation.", + "description": "Unused.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json index 2f626ea997c..614f783fe0a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ "description": "Stores and retrieves potentially large, immutable data objects.", "discoveryVersion": "v1", "documentationLink": "https://developers.google.com/storage/docs/json_api/", - "etag": "\"37383633383535333334313632333634363039\"", + "etag": "\"3136383937393438363236363538333038343532\"", "icons": { "x16": "https://www.google.com/images/icons/product/cloud_storage-16.png", "x32": "https://www.google.com/images/icons/product/cloud_storage-32.png" @@ -3005,7 +3005,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://storage.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Bucket": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storagetransfer.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storagetransfer.v1.json index 0c06df5c661..2a53ea13583 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storagetransfer.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storagetransfer.v1.json @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://storagetransfer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AgentPool": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/streetviewpublish.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/streetviewpublish.v1.json index f2e3710d70f..ea78febbe22 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/streetviewpublish.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/streetviewpublish.v1.json @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "BatchDeletePhotosRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json index d51a2d76a83..47b51debb8a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://sts.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleIamV1Binding": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1beta.json index 9ac876a9ba5..8f5b9ffd430 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1beta.json @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230213", "rootUrl": "https://sts.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleIamV1Binding": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v1.json index f91ca1a3960..2a74412d116 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v1.json @@ -1932,7 +1932,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230208", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://tagmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v2.json index 4ef3b0f5218..c6a2e59ccbb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tagmanager.v2.json @@ -3716,7 +3716,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230208", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://tagmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tasks.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tasks.v1.json index 35659f551fc..25b5835b420 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tasks.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tasks.v1.json @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://tasks.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Task": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/testing.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/testing.v1.json index 7248ce22308..c1e253ef1c8 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/testing.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/testing.v1.json @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230207", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://testing.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/toolresults.v1beta3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/toolresults.v1beta3.json index a3d60e856f7..d62513854e7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/toolresults.v1beta3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/toolresults.v1beta3.json @@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230213", + "revision": "20230220", "rootUrl": "https://toolresults.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ANR": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/transcoder.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/transcoder.v1.json index 904cf5596d1..5849a301ad1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/transcoder.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/transcoder.v1.json @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://transcoder.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdBreak": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json index 4608bc92dff..e23c143b03b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://travelimpactmodel.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ComputeFlightEmissionsRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v1.json index 65d85b7c0ad..d5dc3084953 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v1.json @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://verifiedaccess.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Challenge": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v2.json index 8c211827d67..1c3ec5461fc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/verifiedaccess.v2.json @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230214", "rootUrl": "https://verifiedaccess.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Challenge": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json index 262aa31b64b..efc37627490 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230219", "rootUrl": "https://versionhistory.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Channel": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1.json index 5982ff14677..d88d2d5ef94 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1.json @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://vision.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddProductToProductSetRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p1beta1.json index 7683d602ace..f3c4be9b8c1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p1beta1.json @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://vision.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AnnotateFileResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p2beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p2beta1.json index bb6c3b6d3dc..7e88dfed249 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p2beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vision.v1p2beta1.json @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230203", + "revision": "20230210", "rootUrl": "https://vision.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AnnotateFileResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json index 3c7800ed44c..3f31a84bfae 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -818,7 +818,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1143,7 +1143,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1303,7 +1303,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1444,7 +1444,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1629,7 +1629,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1667,7 +1667,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1842,7 +1842,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "Optional. A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1943,7 +1943,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1972,7 +1972,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230202", + "revision": "20230209", "rootUrl": "https://vmmigration.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessKeyCredentials": { @@ -4038,7 +4038,7 @@ "id": "UpgradeApplianceRequest", "properties": { "requestId": { - "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and t he request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", + "description": "A request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/webrisk.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/webrisk.v1.json index 4cb589fbdcb..21311c7010f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/webrisk.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/webrisk.v1.json @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230218", "rootUrl": "https://webrisk.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudWebriskV1ComputeThreatListDiffResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1.json index 3fe47b59452..6c56d436e1d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1.json @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://websecurityscanner.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Authentication": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1alpha.json index 1fce536a242..fdb3403b670 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1alpha.json @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://websecurityscanner.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Authentication": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1beta.json index 0ce3bb47ca4..b242834f438 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/websecurityscanner.v1beta.json @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230205", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://websecurityscanner.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Authentication": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1.json index ce7152ebf33..06c34630d79 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1.json @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://workflowexecutions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelExecutionRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1beta.json index ba6fe72b39c..9171d0d8e8a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflowexecutions.v1beta.json @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230131", + "revision": "20230207", "rootUrl": "https://workflowexecutions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelExecutionRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1.json index abb03807958..39b8ec8d1ca 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1.json @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://workflows.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1beta.json index 18c1de67093..11505a31fe0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workflows.v1beta.json @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://workflows.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workstations.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workstations.v1beta.json index 8fb17e758d2..559985b3683 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workstations.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workstations.v1beta.json @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "workstationClusterId": { - "description": "Required. ID to use for the cluster.", + "description": "Required. ID to use for the workstation cluster.", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -282,24 +282,24 @@ ], "parameters": { "etag": { - "description": "If set, the request will be rejected if the latest version of the cluster on the server does not have this etag.", + "description": "If set, the request will be rejected if the latest version of the workstation cluster on the server does not have this etag.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "force": { - "description": "If set, any workstation configurations and workstations in the cluster will also be deleted. Otherwise, the request will work only if the cluster has no configurations or workstations.", + "description": "If set, any workstation configurations and workstations in the workstation cluster are also deleted. Otherwise, the request only works if the workstation cluster has no configurations or workstations.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, "name": { - "description": "Required. Name of the cluster to delete.", + "description": "Required. Name of the workstation cluster to delete.", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/workstationClusters/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" }, "validateOnly": { - "description": "If set, validate the request and preview the review, but do not actually apply it.", + "description": "If set, validate the request and preview the review, but do not apply it.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" } @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "allowMissing": { - "description": "If set, and the cluster is not found, a new cluster will be created. In this situation, update_mask is ignored.", + "description": "If set, and the workstation cluster is not found, a new workstation cluster will be created. In this situation, update_mask is ignored.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "updateMask": { - "description": "Required. Mask specifying which fields in the cluster should be updated.", + "description": "Required. Mask that specifies which fields in the workstation cluster should be updated.", "format": "google-fieldmask", "location": "query", "type": "string" @@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230201", + "revision": "20230208", "rootUrl": "https://workstations.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -1248,15 +1248,15 @@ "type": "object" }, "CustomerEncryptionKey": { - "description": "A customer-specified encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration.", + "description": "A customer-managed encryption key for the Compute Engine resources of this workstation configuration.", "id": "CustomerEncryptionKey", "properties": { "kmsKey": { - "description": "The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS, for example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`.", + "description": "The name of the Google Cloud KMS encryption key. For example, `projects/PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_RING/cryptoKeys/KEY_NAME`.", "type": "string" }, "kmsKeyServiceAccount": { - "description": "The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. However, it is recommended to use a separate service account and to follow KMS best practices mentioned at https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties", + "description": "The service account to use with the specified KMS key. We recommend that you use a separate service account and follow KMS best practices. For more information, see [Separation of duties](https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/separation-of-duties) and `gcloud kms keys add-iam-policy-binding` [`--member`](https://cloud.google.com/sdk/gcloud/reference/kms/keys/add-iam-policy-binding#--member).", "type": "string" } }, @@ -1527,7 +1527,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "workstationClusters": { - "description": "The requested clusters.", + "description": "The requested workstation clusters.", "items": { "$ref": "WorkstationCluster" }, @@ -2057,7 +2057,7 @@ }, "encryptionKey": { "$ref": "CustomerEncryptionKey", - "description": "Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-specified encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk will be encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks will be encrypted using a generated key. Customer-specified encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-specified encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system will attempt to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours." + "description": "Encrypts resources of this workstation configuration using a customer-managed encryption key. If specified, the boot disk of the Compute Engine instance and the persistent disk are encrypted using this encryption key. If this field is not set, the disks are encrypted using a generated key. Customer-managed encryption keys do not protect disk metadata. If the customer-managed encryption key is rotated, when the workstation instance is stopped, the system attempts to recreate the persistent disk with the new version of the key. Be sure to keep older versions of the key until the persistent disk is recreated. Otherwise, data on the persistent disk will be lost. If the encryption key is revoked, the workstation session will automatically be stopped within 7 hours." }, "etag": { "description": "Checksum computed by the server. May be sent on update and delete requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.", @@ -2096,7 +2096,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "runningTimeout": { - "description": "How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this config should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours.", + "description": "How long to wait before automatically stopping a workstation after it started. A value of 0 indicates that workstations using this configuration should never time out. Must be greater than 0 and less than 24 hours if encryption_key is set. Defaults to 12 hours.", "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtube.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtube.v3.json index 9806998058c..bdfa25997fe 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtube.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtube.v3.json @@ -3831,7 +3831,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230209", + "revision": "20230216", "rootUrl": "https://youtube.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbuseReport": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubeAnalytics.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubeAnalytics.v2.json index 0bfdeb863fb..89159dea8dd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubeAnalytics.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubeAnalytics.v2.json @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://youtubeanalytics.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "EmptyResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubereporting.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubereporting.v1.json index b55b50fb877..93189179487 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubereporting.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/youtubereporting.v1.json @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ } } }, - "revision": "20230212", + "revision": "20230215", "rootUrl": "https://youtubereporting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { From e8e010fa05eb6d6da10e415490e44adfec2c1aa3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "release-please[bot]" <55107282+release-please[bot]@users.noreply.github.com> Date: Tue, 21 Feb 2023 09:53:23 -0500 Subject: [PATCH 3/3] chore(main): release 2.79.0 (#2070) Co-authored-by: release-please[bot] <55107282+release-please[bot]@users.noreply.github.com> --- CHANGELOG.md | 29 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ googleapiclient/version.py | 2 +- 2 files changed, 30 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/CHANGELOG.md b/CHANGELOG.md index 6094731d83c..b527d90fb12 100644 --- a/CHANGELOG.md +++ b/CHANGELOG.md @@ -1,5 +1,34 @@ # Changelog +## [2.79.0](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/compare/v2.78.0...v2.79.0) (2023-02-21) + + +### Features + +* **alertcenter:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/547eb4a4f6b5577fcb6c80638cc9e93cced35089 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **androidenterprise:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/a5c14741ad7ca5b5f53dc4b4fcdab070132639b8 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **baremetalsolution:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/1cca20e7cce92036d67e528123414f669ebd942a ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **batch:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/12b1c85fc3280dbbb23c4db396c64dd3601a303d ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **chat:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/bc983e9dd1e8dbc8ec910bbe36321afb81cf33cd ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **chromemanagement:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/b204e0fa6f03e35f70774067a52026d38bb90549 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **cloudsearch:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/a57ae6337ea0612594b88badfb354b73d68f6a73 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **compute:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/41d899c6514dbb5cf1a9c1358ac777fa19bbf8ae ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **content:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/b2704a04c366aedcd1c665f6f34db47bc81e178f ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **drive:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c189a81e8116af6ae96c26a82cbe0662c2f540a2 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **healthcare:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/58ad8a45dcc3b7cd97f2f30c03a0ff9e0bdf1a83 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **logging:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f365cf32684e625b772e60d45ea1dd188983ac25 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **monitoring:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/48090571c1e8a2cb3831a9540363db8051284440 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **networksecurity:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/aa9721a9179ece2acf74ca2067d48b11a2acce01 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **ondemandscanning:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f247a051529550f3e55aeb456276bafe327517e8 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **paymentsresellersubscription:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/a01ba7b18fb69f14d04e5c4ea67a47945a4b40b7 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **privateca:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/5f5a1d83c419e0c3d9aac0746681a384dfc1af69 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **redis:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/edc5f1f9ca6f56cfd945621414c369bff840ee4e ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **safebrowsing:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/940222c83f916b3b90bbacf4436bbf97a949f852 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **serviceconsumermanagement:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/ba5bd7229c287f2b0636d1128f057334ca8ec4b9 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **servicecontrol:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/6c85d3c5e895805aa9b2e5a73d4d812c449b5388 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **servicenetworking:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/df40666a943166ca27603fb5c14e9b67c711c709 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) +* **serviceusage:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/64cbf8291c51625042a94d6195dfa81e8da63ea7 ([f183bc9](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f183bc9439ca3b0b42de85d670e2c89014263e62)) + ## [2.78.0](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/compare/v2.77.0...v2.78.0) (2023-02-14) diff --git a/googleapiclient/version.py b/googleapiclient/version.py index 57d8fcdfe08..044012934e5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/version.py +++ b/googleapiclient/version.py @@ -12,4 +12,4 @@ # See the License for the specific language governing permissions and # limitations under the License. -__version__ = "2.78.0" +__version__ = "2.79.0"